JP7335793B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine capable of playing games.

2. Description of the Related Art Pachinko machines and slot machines, which are examples of game machines, include electronic parts such as display means such as liquid crystal displays and light emitting means such as LEDs (light emitting diodes).

A game machine of this type includes, for example, a game board and a display device arranged away from the game board on the back side, and by providing an opaque frame member between the game board and the display device, the game can be played. There is a game machine that prevents the inside of the game machine from being exposed through a gap formed between the back surface of the board and the display unit of the display device (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2007-296205 A

In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, there is a need to further enhance the marketability of the gaming machine.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the marketability of the gaming machine .

The game machine of means A is
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display of identification information and being able to be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
display means;
an electronic component provided so as to be visible to the player;
a specific member provided around the electronic component and formed in a color similar to that of the electronic component;
a light-transmitting member which is a member having light-transmitting properties and is provided so that a player can visually recognize the electronic component through the member;
Predetermined electronic components that are difficult or invisible to the player;
a predetermined member provided around the predetermined electronic component;
an operation means that can be operated by a player;
and a production control means capable of executing production,
The translucent member is provided in front of the electronic component and the specific member,
The electronic component is provided at a position further away from the display means than the specific member,
The predetermined member has a color different from that of the predetermined electronic component,
The production control means is
It is possible to execute a change effect that changes the display mode of the displayed identification information,
It is possible to execute a reach effect that suggests being controlled to the advantageous state,
A specific effect can be executed after starting the reach effect,
The operating means is operated at a plurality of timings including a first timing corresponding to the start of the variable display in which the ready-to-win effect is executed and a second timing before the start of the variable display in which the ready-to-win effect is executed. It is possible to execute a predetermined vibration effect to vibrate,
It is possible to execute a special vibration effect for vibrating the operating means in a specific effect period, which is a period during which the specific effect is executed,
As the special vibration effect,
capable of executing a first special vibration effect corresponding to an operation of the effect movable body different from the operating means during the specific effect period;
It is possible to execute a second special vibration effect corresponding to image display during the specific effect period,
The ratio of control to the advantageous state is higher when the predetermined vibration effect is executed than when the predetermined vibration effect is not executed,
The mode differs between the predetermined vibration effect and the first special vibration effect,
The mode differs between the predetermined vibration effect and the second special vibration effect,
The mode differs between the first special vibration effect and the second special vibration effect,
It is characterized by
The game machine of means 1 is
A game machine (for example, pachinko game machine 1, 75SG001, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
Electronic components (for example, LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803) provided so as to be visible to the player;
a specific member (for example, base members 301, 401, 601, 801) provided around the electronic component and formed in a color similar to that of the electronic component;
a translucent member (e.g., cover members 302, 402, 602, 802) which is a member having translucency and is provided so that a player can visually recognize the electronic component and the specific member through the member;
a display means (for example, an image display device 5);
with
The translucent member (for example, the cover member 302) has a decorative pattern (for example, a decorative pattern 331) formed so as to straddle the electronic component (for example, the LED substrate 303) and the specific member (for example, the base member 301). ) (see FIGS. 10-12),
The electronic component (e.g., LED board 303) is provided at a position further away from the display means than the specific member (e.g., upper portion of base member 301),
moreover,
Operation means (for example, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, etc.) that can be operated by the player;
As the vibration effects for vibrating the operating means, a predetermined vibration effect (for example, driving the vibration motor 131 by the vibration pattern included in the operation part effect pattern) and a special vibration effect (for example, by vibration control data included in the variable display effect control pattern) (such as driving the vibration motor 131) can be executed (for example, the vibration control data of the operation section effect control pattern or the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203 is used to perform the variable display effect in step S172. Production control CPU 120 for executing processing, etc.),
Light-emitting effect execution means (for example, in step AKS203) capable of executing a light-emitting effect (for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 in the light emission color included in the operation part effect pattern) that causes the operation means to emit light in accordance with the predetermined vibration effect Effect control CPU 120 etc.) that executes the effect process during variable display in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation part effect control pattern determined by
A specific effect execution means (for example, based on the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203) that can execute a specific effect (for example, reach effect of SP reach A, notification of jackpot determination, jackpot type lottery, etc.) according to the progress of the game Effect control CPU 120 etc.) that executes the effect process during variable display in step S172,
When the predetermined vibration effect is executed, the ratio of control to the advantageous state is higher than when the predetermined vibration effect is not executed (for example, the reliability of the big hit according to the operation part effect pattern, etc.),
Depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed, the ratio of control to the advantageous state differs (for example, the light emission color included in the operation unit effect pattern jackpot reliability according to the application of the operation part production pattern, etc.),
The vibration effect executing means is capable of executing the special vibration effect in accordance with the execution of the specific effect (for example, execution of the vibration effect during periods AKZ01 to AKZ05), and vibrating between the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect. Different aspects (for example, vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 different from vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44, etc.),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the marketability can be enhanced, and the game interest can be improved by drawing attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described later include an invention relating to a game machine of means 2 below. Conventionally, in game machines, there has been a technique of providing a vibrating means in a ball shooting handle, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-38019. However, in such a gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in improving the excitement of the presentation by vibration, and in view of this point, provision of a gaming machine that enhances the entertainment of the game when executing the presentation by vibration is desired. ing.

The game machine of means 2 is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state, etc.) that is advantageous to a player,
Operation means (for example, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, etc.) that can be operated by the player;
As the vibration effects for vibrating the operating means, a predetermined vibration effect (for example, driving the vibration motor 131 by the vibration pattern included in the operation part effect pattern) and a special vibration effect (for example, by vibration control data included in the variable display effect control pattern) (such as driving the vibration motor 131) can be executed (for example, the vibration control data of the operation section effect control pattern or the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203 is used to perform the variable display effect in step S172. Production control CPU 120 for executing processing, etc.),
Light-emitting effect execution means (for example, in step AKS203) capable of executing a light-emitting effect (for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 in the light emission color included in the operation part effect pattern) that causes the operation means to emit light in accordance with the predetermined vibration effect Effect control CPU 120 etc.) that executes the effect process during variable display in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation part effect control pattern determined by
A specific effect execution means (for example, based on the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203) that can execute a specific effect (for example, reach effect of SP reach A, notification of jackpot determination, jackpot type lottery, etc.) according to the progress of the game Effect control CPU 120 etc.) that executes the effect process during variable display in step S172,
When the predetermined vibration effect is executed, the ratio of control to the advantageous state is higher than when the predetermined vibration effect is not executed (for example, the reliability of the big hit according to the operation part effect pattern, etc.),
Depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed, the ratio of control to the advantageous state differs (for example, the light emission color included in the operation unit effect pattern jackpot reliability according to the application of the operation part production pattern, etc.),
The vibration effect executing means is capable of executing the special vibration effect in accordance with the execution of the specific effect (for example, execution of the vibration effect during periods AKZ01 to AKZ05), and vibrating between the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect. Modes are different (for example, vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 different from vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44, etc.).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game by making the player pay attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

The present invention may include only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention together with the matters specifying the invention other than the matters specifying the invention. It may have.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the production|presentation control board which concerns on characteristic part 91AK and 92AK. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a storage area related to characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of determination of moving image data and a text display process table relating to feature parts 91AK and 92AK; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a text display process table related to characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK; It is a figure which shows the example of text display control based on characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the text display setting information based on characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a text display example related to characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a text display example related to characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a text display example related to characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a screen display related to characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing drawing commands for effects related to characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a screen display related to characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK; 9 is a flow chart showing an example of effect drawing synthesis processing related to characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an execution example of image processing related to characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of image display related to characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK; It is a figure which shows the contents of the ready-to-win effect and the drawing process pattern concerning characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of determination of drawing processing patterns related to characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK; It is a figure which shows the production|presentation execution period based on characteristic part 01AK and 02AK. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation execution example based on characteristic part 01AK and 02AK. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation execution example based on characteristic part 01AK and 02AK. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation execution example based on characteristic part 01AK and 02AK. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation execution example based on characteristic part 01AK and 02AK. It is a front view showing a pachinko game machine as a characteristic portion 75SG. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine as the characteristic portion 75SG. It is a front view showing the game board of the pachinko game machine as the characteristic portion 75SG. FIG. 10-3 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 10-3; It is a front view which shows a light-guide plate apparatus. (A) is an enlarged front view showing the main part of the light guide plate device, (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB of (A), and (C) is an enlarged view showing the main part of (B). (A) is a front view showing the first effect unit, and (B) is a rear view. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the state which looked at the structure of the 1st production|presentation unit from diagonally front. (A) is a CC sectional view of FIG. 10-7 (A), (B) is a DD sectional view of FIG. 10-7 (A), (C) is an E- of FIG. 10-7 (A) It is E sectional drawing. (A) is a front view showing a base member, (B) is a front view showing an LED board, and (C) is a front view showing a cover member. (A) is a front view showing the first effect unit with the cover member removed, and (B) is a front view showing the first effect unit with the cover member attached. FIG. 10-11B is an enlarged view showing the main part of FIG. 10-11(B); (A) is a front view showing a variable winning ball unit, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF of (A). (A) and (B) are cross-sectional views showing essential parts of the first effect unit, and (C) and (D) are cross-sectional views showing essential parts of the variable winning ball unit. It is a figure for comparing the first effect unit and the variable winning ball unit. It is a figure for demonstrating a similar color. (A) is a front view showing the second effect unit, and (B) is a front view showing the second effect unit with the cover member removed. (A) is a cross-sectional view along GG in FIG. 10-17(A), and (B) is a cross-sectional view along HH in FIG. 10-17(A). (A) is a diagram explaining the boundary between the base member and the LED substrate, and (B) is a diagram showing the configuration of the second effect unit. (A) is a front view showing a third effect unit and a fourth effect unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view along II in FIG. 10-20, and (B) is a cross-sectional view along JJ in FIG. 10-20. FIG. 21 is a cross-sectional view along KK of FIG. 10-20; It is explanatory drawing which shows the visual recognition condition of a 3rd production|presentation unit and a 4th production|presentation unit. It is a figure which shows the structure of a 3rd production|presentation unit and a 4th production|presentation unit. It is a figure which shows the presentation mode when the 3rd presentation unit and the 4th presentation unit light-emit. (A) is a schematic front view showing a state where the third effect unit is located at the origin position, and (B) is a schematic front view showing a state where the third effect unit is located at the effect position. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; It is a flow chart which shows an example of stop design decision processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a setting example regarding a setting suggestion effect execution determination table; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a configuration example and a setting example regarding a setting suggestion pattern; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of effect processing during variable display; It is a figure which shows the execution example of setting suggestion production|presentation. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine according to the characteristic portion 10SH. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine according to the characteristic portion 10SH. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing related to the characteristic portion 10SH; It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of vibration production|presentation, and an example of a big-hit reliability. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution timing of a vibration production|presentation, and a visual guidance production|presentation, and a production|presentation period. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of vibration production|presentation and visual guidance production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of vibration production|presentation and visual guidance production|presentation. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a rendering device relating to characteristic portions 48AK to 50AK; It is a figure which shows the example of a setting in the case of performing an operation part production|presentation pattern and specific interlocking production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the setting content of a vibration pattern. It is a figure which shows the execution example of the production|presentation by vibration and light emission. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of a continuous production|presentation pattern. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of pre-reading notice setting processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; It is a figure which shows the structural example of a production|presentation control pattern. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a setting example of timings at which operation section effects can be executed; It is a figure which shows the example of control of operation part production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of control of operation part production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of control of operation part production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of control of operation part production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of control of operation part production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of control of operation part production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of execution of the production|presentation which makes a game effect lamp light. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the production|presentation period which can perform specific interlocking production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation execution example in case reach production|presentation is performed. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation execution example in case reach production|presentation is performed. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation execution example in case reach production|presentation is performed. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of music reproduction execution;

A mode for carrying out the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

(form)
The game machine of form 1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games (for example, pachinko gaming machine 75SG001),
Electronic components (for example, LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803) provided so as to be visible to the player;
a specific member (for example, base members 301, 401, 601, 801) provided around the electronic component and formed in a color similar to that of the electronic component;
a translucent member (e.g., cover members 302, 402, 602, 802) which is a member having translucency and is provided so that a player can visually recognize the electronic component and the specific member through the member;
It is characterized by having
According to this feature, even if the electronic parts are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the specific members of the similar color make the electronic parts inconspicuous, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

The gaming machine of form 2 is the gaming machine according to form 1,
Predetermined electronic components (for example, first start switch 22A, second start switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.) that are difficult or invisible to the player,
a predetermined member provided around the predetermined electronic component (for example, a member for fixing the first start switch 22A, the second start switch 22B, the solenoids 81, 82, etc.);
with
The predetermined member is characterized by having a color different from that of the predetermined electronic component.
According to this feature, general-purpose products can be used for the predetermined electronic components that are difficult or invisible to the player, without considering the balance with the predetermined members, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

The gaming machine of form 3 is the gaming machine according to form 1 or 2,
A display means (for example, an image display device 5) is provided,
The electronic component (for example, the LED substrate 303) is provided at a position spaced apart from the display means more than the specific member (for example, an upper portion of the base member 301).
According to this feature, the electronic parts are located away from the display means that the player pays attention to, so they are less conspicuous.

The gaming machine of form 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 3,
Provided above the electronic components (e.g., LED boards 603, 803) and protruding toward the player side from the electronic components (e.g., a protruding portion 3A),
The projecting portion is characterized by being larger than the electronic component.
According to this feature, the electronic component is in the shadow of the projecting portion and becomes inconspicuous.

The gaming machine of form 5 is the gaming machine according to form 4,
The electronic components (eg, LED boards 603, 803) and the specific members (eg, base members 601, 801) are dark (eg, black) (modification)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the electronic component is more likely to be lost in the shadow of the projecting portion, making it less conspicuous.

The gaming machine of form 6 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 5,
The specific member has a higher color brightness or saturation than the electronic component.
According to this feature, the visibility of the specific member is higher than that of the electronic component, so that the electronic component can be relatively inconspicuous.

The gaming machine of form 7 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 6,
The translucent member (eg, cover member 302) has a decorative pattern (eg, decorative pattern 331) formed so as to straddle the electronic component (eg, LED board 303) and the specific member (eg, base member 301). ) (see Figure 10-12)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the electronic parts are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the decoration pattern makes the electronic parts inconspicuous, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

The gaming machine of form 8 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 7,
The electronic component (for example, the LED board 303) is a circuit board,
The specified member (eg, base member 301) has a decorative pattern (eg, decorative pattern 341) at least partially common to the mode of the circuit pattern (eg, printed wiring 320) formed on the circuit board. provided (see Figures 10-12)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the circuit pattern formed on the circuit board becomes inconspicuous.

The gaming machine of form 9 is the gaming machine according to form 7 or 8,
The specific member (eg, base member 301) has a predetermined region (eg, rear wall portions 313A to 313D) that is visible from the player side without passing through the translucent member (eg, cover member 302). ,
A predetermined decorative pattern (eg, decorative pattern 341) identical or similar in form to the decorative pattern (eg, decorative pattern 331) of the translucent member is provided in the predetermined region (see FIGS. 10-12).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it becomes difficult to recognize that the specific member and the translucent member are different members.

The gaming machine of form 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 9,
A decorative portion (eg, decorative portion 420) provided at a position corresponding to a boundary (eg, boundary portion BD) between the electronic component (eg, LED board 403) and the specific member (eg, base member 401). (See Figure 10-19)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the electronic parts are placed so that they can be visually recognized by the player, the decorative part makes it difficult to see the boundary between the electronic parts and the specific member, making the electronic parts less noticeable, which increases the degree of design freedom. can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of form 11 is the gaming machine according to form 10,
The decorative portion includes a plurality of decorative portions,
A plurality of predetermined decorative parts are provided at positions that do not correspond to the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member,
The plurality of decorative portions are characterized by being larger in number than the plurality of predetermined decorative portions.
According to this feature, the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member is obscured by the plurality of decorations, so the electronic component is less conspicuous.

The gaming machine of form 12 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 11,
The translucent member (eg, cover member 402) has a boundary corresponding region corresponding to a boundary (eg, boundary portion BD) between the electronic component (eg, LED board 403) and the specific member (eg, base member 401). (e.g., convex portion 410) and a boundary non-corresponding region (e.g., region other than convex portion 410) that does not correspond to the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member,
Translucency of the boundary corresponding area is lower than translucency of the non-boundary corresponding area.
According to this feature, the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member is less visible to the player through the boundary corresponding area, so the electronic component is less conspicuous.

The gaming machine of form 13 is the gaming machine according to form 11 or 12,
A logotype (eg, the letter “V”) is displayed on the decorative portion (eg, the decorative portion 420) (see FIGS. 10-19).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player is less likely to pay attention to the logotype and be conscious of the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member, so that the electronic component is less conspicuous.

The gaming machine of form 14 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 11 to 13,
The electronic component (eg, LED board 403) includes a light emitting means (eg, second effect LED 404A) capable of causing the decorative portion (eg, decorative portion 420) to emit light (see FIGS. 10-18).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the decorative portion is conspicuous by light emission, it becomes difficult for the player to be aware of the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member, so that the electronic component is less conspicuous.

The gaming machine of form 15 is the gaming machine according to form 14,
The light emitting means (for example, the second effect LED 404A) is provided so that the decorative portion (for example, the decorative portion 420) can emit surface light (for example, the light from the second effect LED 404A is emitted from the inner lens). The light is emitted forward from the entire front surface of 405 substantially uniformly and is incident on the area corresponding to the convex portion 410, so that the entire front surface of the convex portion 410 including the decorative portion 420 emits surface light.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the decorative portion is conspicuous due to the surface emission, it becomes difficult for the player to be aware of the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member, so that the electronic component becomes less conspicuous.

The gaming machine of form 16 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 15,
Around the electronic component (e.g., LED board 803) and the specific member (e.g., base member 801), a rendering means (e.g., third rendering unit 600) having higher visibility than the electronic component and the specific member is provided. provided (see Figures 10-20)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the electronic parts are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the visibility of the effect means is higher than the visibility of the electronic parts, so that the electronic parts are less conspicuous, which increases the degree of freedom in design. be able to.

The gaming machine of form 17 is the gaming machine according to form 16,
The effect means (eg, third effect unit 600) is provided closer to the player (front side) than the electronic component (eg, LED board 803) (see FIG. 10-22).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to easily improve the visibility of the effect means.

The gaming machine of form 18 is the gaming machine according to form 16 or 17,
A rendering section (eg, light-emitting rendering section 630) provided to be visible to the player in the rendering means (eg, third rendering unit 600) is larger than the electronic component (eg, LED board 803) (FIG. 10 -20 reference)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to easily improve the visibility of the effect means.

The gaming machine of form 19 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 16 to 18,
The rendering section (eg, light emitting rendering section 630) provided to be visible to the player in the rendering means (eg, third rendering unit 600) has a higher visibility than the color of the electronic component (eg, LED board 803). It is characterized by being a color with high .
According to this feature, it is possible to easily improve the visibility of the effect means.

The gaming machine of form 20 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 16 to 19,
The effect means (for example, the third effect unit 600) has light-emitting means (for example, third effect LEDs 604A and 604B) capable of irradiating light toward the player side (see FIG. 10-21(A)).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to easily improve the visibility of the effect means.

The gaming machine of form 21 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 20,
It further comprises a specific translucent member (for example, the cover plate 702A of the variable winning ball unit 700) which is a translucent member and is provided at a position different from the translucent member,
The transmittance (e.g., XA%, XB%) at which the light entering the light-transmitting member (e.g., cover member 302) is transmitted in a predetermined direction (e.g., T direction) is higher than the light entering the specific light-transmitting member. Lower than the transmittance (for example, Y%) that transmits light in the predetermined direction (see FIGS. 10-14)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the electronic parts are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the translucency of the light-transmitting member is lower than that of the specific light-transmitting member, so that the electronic parts are less conspicuous. degree of freedom can be increased.

The gaming machine of form 22 is the gaming machine according to form 21,
The plate thickness of the light-transmitting member (for example, the front-rear dimensions L1A and L1B of the cover member 302) is thicker than the plate thickness of the specific light-transmitting member (for example, the front-rear dimension L2 of the cover plate 702A) (see FIGS. 10-14). )
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the translucency of the translucent member is low, the electronic components are less conspicuous.

The gaming machine of form 23 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 22,
The translucent member (for example, the cover member 302) is colored in a predetermined color,
The predetermined color is a color similar to that of the electronic component (for example, the LED substrate 303) and the specific member (for example, the base member 301).
According to this feature, the light-transmitting member is assimilated with the electronic component and the specific member, so the electronic component is less conspicuous.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 constituting a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left corner of the game area), a variable display (also called a special game) of special symbols (also called special symbols) as a plurality of types of special identification information is performed. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

In addition, the "variable display" of the special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the variable display of the special game and the decoration pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to simply as the variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the bottom left of the game area), a first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. , the first reservation display 25A displays the first reservation storage number according to the number of lit LEDs, and the second reservation display 25B displays the second reservation storage number according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). For example, the variable winning ball device 6B includes a starting winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 81, and when the solenoid 81 is in an OFF state, the starting winning opening door is in the closed position, thereby opening the second starting winning opening. It will be in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (it is also said that the second start winning opening is in a closed state). On the other hand, in the variable winning ball device 6B, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the starting winning opening door is in the open position, so that the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening (the second It is also said that the starting prize opening is in an open state.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be one that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one that includes an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning gate door is in the ON state, the big winning gate door opens the big winning gate, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big winning gate. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize in a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the bottom left of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Below the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstructing nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area by the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotation operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be immediately executed) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern winning pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern winning". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, when a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol varies depending on the type of the big hit to be described later) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, a plurality of types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc. described later) are prepared, and the jackpot is obtained according to these. type is set. As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type with which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type with few prize balls, or a jackpot type with which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a predetermined return after power-on, such as when the system is reset) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are provided. lighting or extinguishing, the movement of the movable body 32, or a performance using any performance device including a part or all of these.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided on the image display device 5, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) is a "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of the ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to the variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. In addition, during the small-hit game state, some of the big-hit types (in the big-hit type of the big-hit game state in the same manner as the small-hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in which the subsequent game state is a high probability state) By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection (gate switch 21, starter switch (first starter switch 22A and second starter switch 22B), count switch 23) (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board. When the clear switch is turned on and the power is turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates initialization to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for progressing the game, but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the backed up data (using an error detection code) to determine whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S6) to return the internal state of the main substrate 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be

And CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that designates the game state before the power cut that is backed up, and if the special game is being executed, the effect control that designates the display result of the special game that is being executed You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the recovery time from the power failure, for example, in the image display device 5, it is determined that the power failure has been restored or is being restored from the power failure. , the screen is displayed for notification. The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby, through the switch circuit 110, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). CPU103 by executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the big hit game state and small hit game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized (details later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting prize determination process, the process of detecting the occurrence of the starting prize, storing pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of pending memories is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of pre-reading and judging the display result and the variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. will be The effect control command at the time of starting winning thus set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", when the time saving state or probability variable state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting a round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is a "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit execution count, and a jackpot gaming state when the upper limit execution count is reached. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6 is executed. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main board 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure per waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving a command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game was "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during a small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . In addition, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Further, in the jackpot middle effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big win game state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is set to "7" which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process. ”, and ends the effect processing during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big win game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinguishing of the pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, one of them may have a ratio of “0%” and the other may have a ratio of “100%” or less than “100%”.

(Description of features related to set values)
Characteristic portions relating to set values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described below.

Although not shown, the main board 11 of the pachinko game machine 1 is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1 while being accommodated in a board case configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. ing. Although not shown, the main board 11 also includes a lock switch for switching to a set value change state in which the set values of the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and a jackpot switch to be described later in the set value change state. A setting changeover switch that functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as winning probability (ball-out rate) and an open sensor that detects the opening of the gaming machine frame are provided. Incidentally, the set value change state in the present embodiment is also a state in which the staff of the game hall or the like can check the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 (set value confirmation state).

Operation units such as the lock switch and the setting changeover switch, which can be operated by a staff member of the game arcade, are provided in the setting changeover body portion and housed together with the main board 11 in the board case. The lock switch and setting changeover switch are exposed to the rear side through an opening formed in the rear surface of the substrate case so that they can be operated without opening the substrate case.

A board case accommodating a lock switch and a setting changeover switch is provided on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁Therefore, it is extremely difficult or impossible to operate the lock switch and the setting changeover switch when the game machine frame is closed. . In addition, since the lock switch requires operation of a setting key possessed by a game hall attendant or the like, it can only be operated by an administrator who possesses the setting key. The lock switch is also a switch that can be switched between ON and OFF with a setting key. Although the door key and the setting key are separate keys in the present embodiment, they may be combined into one key.

A display monitor capable of displaying set values and base values is arranged in the substrate case. The display monitor is connected to the main board 11 and arranged on the upper part of the board case. That is, the display monitor is arranged in front of the main board 11 in the board case when visually recognizing it. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the frame for the game machine is not opened, the front side when the main board 11 is visually recognized means the back side of the game board 2 with the frame for the game machine opened. This is the actual front and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加In this way, the display monitor is arranged in front when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the game machine frame opened. However, the front when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko game machine 1 may be common.

The display monitor includes a first display section, a second display section, a third display section, and a fourth display section. The 1st to 4th display parts of the display monitor are each composed of 7 segments composed of 7 segments that draw the figure "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the 7 segments. . The first to fourth display sections of the display monitor are capable of lighting or blinking in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white. It is also possible to display different colors or a so-called rainbow while changing these colors in an extremely short period.

As a predetermined position of the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1, for example, a game information display section may be provided at the lower left position of the game area. In the game information display section, a round indicator, a right-handed lamp, a probability variable lamp, and a time-saving lamp are collectively arranged. The round indicator can display the number of rounds of the big win game and the type of the big win during the big win game. The right-handed lamp lights up in a game state in which a game ball is launched toward the right game area, such as a low-probability base state or a big-hit game state as a time-saving state. The variable probability lamp lights up when it is in the variable probability state. The time-saving lamp lights up when it is in the time-saving state. The round indicator consists of 5 segments (LEDs).

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate) changes according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit (ball output rate) is changed. The setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest ball payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the ball payout rate is. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantage is. As for the setting value, 6, which is the largest value, is the most disadvantageous value for the game arcade side, and the smaller the set value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the more advantageous the game arcade side is. If the ball output rate changes according to the set value, for example, the probability of a big win may change depending on the set value, or the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change depending on the set value although the jackpot probability is constant. good too. In this way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. The set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side.

(Description of Characteristic Portions 91AK and 92AK)
FIG. 8-1 shows a configuration example of various circuits mounted on the effect control board 12 regarding the characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 8-1, various circuits such as a performance control microprocessor 91AK100, an input circuit 91AK121, a memory controller 91AK122, a performance data memory 91AK123, a ROM 91AK124, a RAM 91AK125, and a watchdog timer 91AK126 are mounted on the performance control board 12. ing. The effect control microprocessor 91AK100 includes a CPU 91AK131, a VDP 91AK132, a voice processing circuit 91AK133, a lamp control circuit 91AK134, a motor control circuit 135, and a built-in memory 91AK136. The VDP 91AK132 includes an instruction decoder 91AK141, a demultiplexer 91AK142, a video decoder 91AK143, a moving image renderer 91AK144, a character image renderer 91AK145, a text image renderer 91AK146, a VRAM 91AK147, and a display drive circuit 91AK148. The audio processing circuit 91AK133 includes an audio decoder 91AK151.

The effect control microprocessor 91AK100 executes data processing and signal processing based on the effect control commands received from the main substrate 11, thereby controlling the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamps 9 and other decorations. It may be an integrated processor in which a circuit capable of controlling the execution of the production using some or all of the plurality of production devices, such as the LED for the display and the movable members for production such as the movable body 32, is integrated on one chip. . In addition, the performance control microprocessor 91AK100 includes a CPU 91AK131, a VDP 91AK132 and a built-in memory 91AK136. It may be provided outside the 91AK100.

The input circuit 91AK121 may include a buffer circuit or the like. The buffer circuit of the input circuit 91AK121 is used to receive the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The memory controller 91AK122 executes various processes on the data stored in the performance data memory 91AK123 in accordance with the request signal supplied from the performance control microprocessor 91AK100. The effect data memory 91AK123 preliminarily stores effect data that can be used to execute effects using the effect device, such as various image data representing images displayed on the image display device 5, for example. The image data stored in the effect data memory 91AK123 may include moving image data and still image data. As the still image data, there is character image data, which is sprite image data, which is a plurality of types of image element data corresponding to a plurality of types of effect images, such as a plurality of types of decoration patterns that are variably displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. It would be nice if it was prepared. The effect image corresponding to the decorative design may be included in the character image. In addition, an arbitrary character image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, specifically, an effect image showing a person, a figure, a symbol, etc., and image data of a background image are stored in advance in the effect data memory 91AK123. It is good if there is As still image data, for example, text image data that enables characters to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 may be prepared. In addition to the image data, the performance data memory 91AK123 may store part or all of the audio data used for audio output by the speakers 8L and 8R. The effect data memory 91AK123 may store part or all of the lamp drive data used to drive the lighting of the light-emitting members such as the game effect lamps 9 and the decorative LEDs. The effect data memory 91AK123 may store part or all of the motor drive data used for rotationally driving the drive motor that operates the movable member such as the movable body 32 . The performance data memory 91AK123 may be a non-volatile semiconductor memory that can be electrically erased, written, or rewritten, such as a NAND flash memory. However, when the performance data memory 91AK123 is used as a read-only storage device when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a state of normal use in which progress of performance is controlled.

ROM91AK124 memorize|stores a computer program, fixed data, etc. for production|presentation control. RAM91AK125 provides a work area to CPU91AK131 of microprocessor 91AK100 for production control. The watchdog timer 91AK126 has a counter circuit that counts up or down based on the setting of an internal register, and when the measurement time passes the start time (timeout time) and timeout occurs, it becomes a time elapsing signal. generate a signal. The time-out signal is input to the CPU 91AK131 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100. Due to the generation of the time-out signal, the CPU 91AK131 enters a reset state and restarts the effect control microprocessor 91AK100.

The ROM 91AK 124 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the performance operation in addition to the program for effect control. For example, in the ROM91AK124, the CPU91AK131 of the performance control microprocessor 91AK100 comprises a plurality of determination tables prepared for various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data constituting a determination table, and various performance control patterns. Pattern data and the like are stored. The effect control pattern includes, for example, effect control execution data (display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, motor control data, operation detection control data, etc.) associated with the effect control process timer judgment value, end code, etc. It consists of process data. Part or all of the effect control pattern and effect control execution data may be configured as a display list. The display list is data of a command group describing a series of transfer commands to be executed by the VDP 91AK 132 according to the order of image processing. The display list may include a display control command group, a voice control command group, a lamp control command group, and a motor control command group in a mixed manner. By controlling the progress of the presentation using such a display list, it is sufficient to control the electrical components for presentation in cooperation with each other. The RAM 91AK 125 stores programs and various data used to control electrical parts for presentation. CPU91AK131 should just be able to read the program and data stored in RAM91AK125 in read-out time shorter than the read-out time of the program and data stored in ROM91AK124.

CPU91AK131 performs control processing according to the computer program for production|presentation control. At this time, the CPU 91AK 131 executes an effect control process for controlling the progress of the effect by the effect electric parts according to the program read from the ROM 91AK 124 . The production control process includes, for example, a fixed data reading process in which the CPU91AK131 reads fixed data from the ROM91AK124, a variable data writing process in which the CPU91AK131 writes various variable data to the RAM91AK125 and temporarily stores them, and various variation data read processing for reading variation data, reception processing for CPU 91AK 131 to accept input of various signals from the outside, transmission processing for CPU 91 AK 131 to output various signals to the outside, or part or all of these processing good too.

The VDP 91AK 132 determines the content of image display control in the image display device 5 based on display control commands from the CPU 91AK 131, register settings, and the like. For example, the VDP 91AK 132 determines the switching timing of the effect image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, thereby performing control for executing variable display of decorative symbols and various effect displays. The VDP91AK132 is an image processor having image data processing functions such as a high-speed drawing function, moving image data separation function, and video decoding function. The VDP 91AK132 may be a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), a GCL (Graphics Controller LSI), or an image processing microprocessor generally called a DSP (Digital Signal Processor).

The instruction decoder 91AK141 decodes the instruction portion (instruction code) included in the display control instruction from the CPU 91AK131 and instructs image processing or the like according to the decoding result. For example, a display control instruction group included in the decoded result is supplied to the internal circuit of the VDP91AK132. The instruction decoder 91AK141 may generate a control signal according to the decoding result and supply it to the internal circuit of the VDP 91AK132. The command group for voice control included in the decoding result may be supplied to the voice processing circuit 91AK133. The instruction group for lamp control included in the decoded result may be supplied to the lamp control circuit 91AK134. The instruction group for motor control included in the decoding result may be supplied to the motor control circuit 91AK135.

The demultiplexer 91AK142 receives moving image data read from the performance data memory 91AK123 or the like, separates the data into video data and audio data, and outputs the data. The video data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 is input to the video decoder 91AK143. The audio data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 is input to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The video decoder 91AK143 decompresses and decodes the compression-encoded video data and outputs it. The video data output from the video decoder 91AK143 is supplied to the moving image renderer 91AK144. The video decoder 91AK143 may read compression-encoded character image data or text image data from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like, decompress and decode it, and then supply it to the character image renderer 91AK145 or text image renderer 91AK146.

The moving image renderer 91AK144 writes and stores the video data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143 in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The moving image renderer 91AK144 executes image processing capable of adjusting the hue, saturation, and brightness of the image shown in the image data, or a part or all of these, and temporarily stores the adjusted image data in the VRAM 91AK147. may The character image renderer 91AK145 receives character image data read from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like and character image data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143, and writes and stores the data in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The character image renderer 91AK145 may convert the character image data in vector format into bitmap format and temporarily store it in the VRAM 91AK147. The character image renderer 91AK145 may perform image conversion processing for displaying the character image designated by the character image designation information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the character display setting information. good. The text image renderer 91AK146 receives text image data read from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like and text image data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143, and writes and stores them in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The text image renderer 91AK146 may convert the text image data in vector format into bitmap format and temporarily store it in the VRAM 91AK147. The text image renderer 91AK146 may perform image conversion processing for displaying the text image specified by the text image specifying information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. good.

The VRAM 91AK 147 temporarily stores image data and provides a work area for image data processing by the VDP 91AK 132 . The VRAM 91AK 147 may be provided with areas such as a palette area in which palette data is arranged, a character buffer in which character image data is stored, a text buffer in which text image data is stored, and a CG buffer. The CG buffer temporarily stores palette data that defines the display colors of characters and text when drawing processing is executed by the VDP91AK132, and temporarily stores display data for effect images created by drawing processing. used for storage. The display drive circuit 91AK148 is a circuit for outputting a signal for displaying various images on the screen of the image display device 5 . The display drive circuit 91AK148 outputs a predetermined clock signal (dot clock signal) and scanning signal (drive control signal) to the image display device 5 along with a color signal (grayscale control signal) corresponding to the display data created in the VDP 91AK132. do it.

A frame buffer may be provided within VRAM 91AK147 or in a memory module separate from VRAM 91AK147, such as internal memory 91AK136. The frame buffer provides a virtual display area in which display data of effect images created by drawing processing by the VDP 91AK132 is expanded and stored. The display data stored in the frame buffer is bitmap format image data (pixel data, raster data). The frame buffer stores display data of various images displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, for example, and display data of various images that are not displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. A virtual display area may be included. Alternatively, display data for displaying a screen having the same size as the display screen of the image display device 5 is created in the virtual display area of the frame buffer, and the display data of the virtual display area is supplied to the display drive circuit 91AK148. Thus, the image may be output to the image display device 5 side.

For example, an image display area and an image drawing area are allocated to the storage area of the frame buffer. Display data for displaying an effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 is stored in the image display area. The image drawing area stores the display data of each effect image created by the drawing process. The image display area and the image drawing area may be switched each time a V-blank occurs. A V-blank occurs at a period when the image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 is updated. Each time V-blank is started, a V-blank interrupt signal may be output from the VDP 91AK132 to the CPU 91AK131, and various interrupt signals may be output from the VDP 91AK132 to the CPU 91AK131. By switching between the image display area and the image drawing area each time a V-blank occurs, display data for each effect image is created in the storage area allocated as the image-drawing area in a certain V-blank cycle (first drawing display period). At the same time that the drawing process is performed, this storage area is switched to the image display area in the next V blank period (second drawing display period). Therefore, the display data created by the drawing process in the first drawing display period is output to the image display device 5 in the second drawing display period, and the image drawing area is allocated in the second drawing display period. In the storage area, the display data created by the drawing process is stored.

The audio processing circuit 91AK133 generates audio signals that enable audio output using the speakers 8L and 8R based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP 91AK132. The audio data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 of the VDP 91AK132 is supplied to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The audio decoder 91AK151 decompresses and decodes compression-encoded audio data to generate an audio signal. Also, the audio processing circuit 91AK133 may include an audio data memory capable of pre-storing audio data that is not included in moving image data. The audio data memory may be provided outside the audio processing circuit 91AK133 by being included in the effect data memory 91AK123, the ROM 91AK124, or the like, for example. The audio processing circuit 91AK133 may generate an audio signal by decompressing and decoding audio data read from the audio data memory based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP 91AK132.

The lamp control circuit 91AK134 controls lighting modes (light-emitting modes) such as lighting, extinguishing, and blinking of light-emitting members such as the game effect lamps 9 and decorative LEDs. The lamp control circuit 91AK134 generates lamp control data based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP 91AK132, and outputs the data to the lamp control board 14 and the lamp driver board. The motor control circuit 91AK135 controls operating states such as rotation, stop, rotation speed, and rotation angle (phase) for the drive motor that operably drives the performance movable member such as the movable body 32 . The motor control circuit 91AK135 generates motor control data based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP 132, and outputs the data to the motor driver board. The built-in memory 91AK136 is a memory circuit built in the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, and can store various data used to control the progress of the effect.

FIG. 8-2 shows a configuration example corresponding to the storage contents for the storage area for effect control. In this embodiment, storage areas 91AKM01, 91AKM02, 91AKM11 to 91AKM14 are provided as a plurality of storage areas. Each storage area may be provided so as to be included in, for example, the effect data memory 91AK123, ROM91AKM124, built-in memory 91AK136, or part or all of these. The plurality of storage areas include a storage area 91AKM11 for storing data relating to moving images and a storage area 91AKM13 for storing data relating to text images.

The storage area 91AKM01 stores a performance control program and performance control management data, and functions as a management area such as a program for performance control. For example, the CPU 91AK 131 of the production control microprocessor 91AK 100 performs various judgments, decisions, and settings. Table data, which are configuration data of various tables, pattern data constituting production control patterns, etc., are stored in a storage area as management data. It may be stored in 91AKM01.

The storage area 91AKM02 stores a display control program and display control management data, and functions as a display control program management area. For example, an image processing program prepared for the VDP 91AK 132 of the performance control microprocessor 91AK 100 to perform various image processing, a display process table defining the procedure for displaying the performance image, etc. are stored in the storage area 91AKM02. It is good if there is The image processing program may include a program for converting vector format image data into bitmap format image data. The image processing program may include a program for generating a bitmap-format text image based on text described using character codes and font data.

Storage area 91AKM11 stores moving image related data including moving image data and related data. For moving image data, image compression information including reference images and predicted images is generated by compression encoding such as motion-compensated predictive encoding using images of multiple frames that serve as original images, and multiplexed with audio data. Any multiplexed encoded stream may be used. The moving image related data stored in the storage area 91AKM11 may include table data and data files forming a moving image display process table. The moving image display process table is used for display control processing that can change the display contents and display mode of moving images displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in accordance with the progress of the performance in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the elapsed time. Used. The display content of the moving image is the content of the moving image reproduced and displayed corresponding to the moving image data. The display mode of the moving image is the mode and form of reproducing and displaying the moving image, including the display style and display layout of the moving image. Table data and data files that constitute the moving image display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

Storage area 91AKM12 stores character image related data including character image data and its related data. The character image data may be static image data in which any character image representing a plurality of kinds of decoration patterns, persons, graphics, symbols, etc. is described in vector or bitmap format. The character image-related data stored in storage area 91AKM12 may include table data and data files forming a character display process table. The character display process table is used for display control processing that can change the display contents and display mode of the character image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in accordance with the progress of the performance in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the elapsed time. be done. The display content of the character image is the content of the character image displayed corresponding to the character image data. The display mode of the character image is the mode or form in which the character image is displayed, including the display style and display layout of the character image. Note that table data and data files forming the character display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

Storage area 91AKM13 stores text image data and text image related data including related data. The text image related data may include outline font data. Outline font data is data that can be converted to the character shape of each character in bitmap format image data by specifying a combination of multiple vertex coordinates that connect the outline for each character used to display the text image. be. The text image related data may include vector font data or stroke font data instead of or in addition to outline font data. Vector font data and stroke font data are data that can be converted into the shape of each character in bitmap format image data by specifying parameters for straight lines and curves for each character used to display a text image. . Outline fonts and vector fonts are included in scalable fonts whose quality does not easily deteriorate even when the font is enlarged or reduced. The text image data indicates a text image that constitutes a character string combining a plurality of character images, and arbitrarily set words such as sentences, paragraphs, sentences, phrases, words, or a combination of some or all of these. It is sufficient if the unit of is recognizable. Also, the text image data may indicate a text image with only a single character image. The text image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 using the text image data may indicate telop characters, subtitles, other information transmission characters, and so on. It may indicate a decorative character. Since the text image data is included in the effect data for displaying the text image, it may be stored in the effect data memory 91AK123. On the other hand, font data such as outline font data is used when VDP 91AK 132 executes the image processing program, so it may be stored in either ROM 91AK 124 or built-in memory 91AK 136 . Thus, the storage area 91AKM13 may be provided in the performance data memory 91AK123, the ROM 91AK124 or the internal memory 91AK136. Similarly, other storage areas may be provided in part or all of a plurality of memory devices such as effect data memory 91AK123, ROM 91AKM124, built-in memory 91AK136.

The text image-related data stored in storage area 91AKM13 may include table data and data files that constitute a text display process table. The text display process table is used for display control processing that can change the display content and display mode of the text image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 according to the elapsed time as the performance in the pachinko game machine 1 progresses. be done. The display content of the text image is the content of the text image displayed corresponding to the text image data. The display mode of the text image is the mode or form in which the character image is displayed, including the display style and display layout of the text image. The table data and data files forming the text display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

Storage area 91AKM14 stores audio related data including audio data and related data. The sound data stored in the storage area 91AKM14 is different from the sound reproduced and output in synchronization with the image in the presentation by moving image display, and can reproduce and output any sound as the presentation in the pachinko game machine 1 progresses. Anything that does. The audio-related data stored in storage area 91AKM14 may include table data and data files that constitute an audio output process table. The sound output process table is used for sound control processing that can change sounds such as sound effects and music output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the progress of the performance in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the elapsed time. Table data and data files that constitute the voice output process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM01 as effect control management data.

In the VDP 91AK132 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, the moving image data read from the storage area 91AKM11 is input to the demultiplexer 91AK142 and separated into video data and audio data. The video data is input to the video decoder 91AK143, and the audio data is input to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The video decoder 91AK143 decompresses and decodes the compression-encoded video data and supplies it to the moving image renderer 91AK144. The moving image renderer 91AK144 executes conversion processing of video data according to the display mode including the display style and display layout of the moving image, for example, and writes and stores the converted data in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. In this way, the display of the moving image is controlled using the moving image data stored in the storage area 91AKM11.

In the VDP 91AK132 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, the text image data read from the storage area 91AKM13 is input to the text image renderer 91AK146. If the text image data is compression-encoded, it may be decompressed and decoded by the video decoder 91AK143 before being input to the text image renderer 91AK146. The text image renderer 91AK146 executes conversion processing of the text image data according to the display mode including the display style and display layout of the text image, for example, and writes and stores the converted data in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. Thus, the display of the text image is controlled using the text image data stored in the storage area 91AKM13.

FIG. 8-3 shows an example of determining moving image data and a text display process table according to contents of ready-to-win effects. In super reach effects such as SP reach A and SP reach B, effects by moving image display using moving image data and effects by text image display using text image data can be executed. The period during which the animation display effect is executed and the period during which the text image display effect is executed may be partially or wholly the same period, or may include different periods. The text display process table is a table in which process data used for display control is set, for example, when displaying a text image in which a plurality of character images are combined.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 8-3, one of the moving image data 91AKD01, 91AKD02, 91AKD11 and 91AKD12 is determined, and one of the text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 is determined according to the content of the ready-to-win effect. be done. Among them, the moving image data is determined in one-to-one correspondence with the contents of the ready-to-win effect. For example, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP reach-to-win A (big win)", moving image data 91AKD01 is determined. When the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win B (big hit)", the moving image data 91AKD02 is determined. When the content of ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win A (losing)", moving image data 91AKD11 is determined. When the contents of ready-to-win effect are "SP ready-to-win B (losing)", moving image data 91AKD12 is determined. On the other hand, the text display process table may or may not be determined in common for different ready-to-win effect contents. For example, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win A (big hit)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 30/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 70/100. When the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win B (big hit)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT11 is 20/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT12 is 80/100. When the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP reach A (losing)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 80/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 20/100. When the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP reach B (losing)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT11 is 70/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT12 is 30/100.

The text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 can be determined when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)" or "SP reach A (loss)", and the reach effect content is "SP reach B (big hit)" or In the case of "SP reach B (losing)", it is impossible to decide. The text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 can be determined when the reach effect content is "SP reach B (big hit)" or "SP reach B (loss)", and the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)" or In the case of "SP reach A (losing)", it is impossible to decide. Thus, the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 are used to control the display of the text image when the SP reach A reach effect is executed. The text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 are used to control the display of text images when the SP reach B reach effect is executed.

When the ready-to-win effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", the effect is executed by moving image display using moving image data 91AKD01, and when the ready-to-win effect content is "SP reach A (losing)", a moving image. An effect by moving image display using data 91AKD11 is executed. A text image using either the text display process table 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 is added to the moving image displayed using the moving image data 91AKD01 and the moving image displayed using the moving image data 91AKD11. Displayable. When the ready-to-win effect content is "SP reach B (big hit)", the effect is executed by moving image display using moving image data 91AKD02, and when the ready-to-win effect content is "SP reach B (losing)", a moving image. An effect by moving image display using data 91AKD12 is executed. A text image using either text display process table 91AKT11 or 91AKT12 is added to a moving image displayed using moving image data 91AKD02 and a moving image displayed using moving image data 91AKD12. Displayable. Therefore, it is possible to add and display a text image using a common text display process table to a plurality of moving images displayed using different moving image data.

FIG. 8-4 shows a configuration example of the text display process table. Of these, FIG. 8-4 (A1) shows a configuration example of a text display process table 91AKT01 that can be used in correspondence with SP reach A reach effects, and FIG. 8-4 (A2) shows SP reach A reach It shows a configuration example of a text display process table 91AKT02 that can be used corresponding to the effect. FIG. 8-4(B) shows a configuration example of a text display process table 91AKT11 that can be used in correspondence with SP reach B reach effect.

In each text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with a plurality of text display periods. Note that the text display process table may include one in which text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with a single text display period. The text display period designates the start time to start displaying and the end time to end the display for each text image to be displayed. The start time and end time of the text display period may be specified using the elapsed time from the start of the display of the moving image in the reach effect, or specified using the elapsed time from the start of the variable display. may However, if the display content of the text image is highly related to the display content of the moving image, the start time and end time of the text display period will be calculated using the elapsed time from the start of the display of the moving image. should be specified. Since the elapsed time after the start of the variable display includes, for example, the elapsed time before the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode, the variable display effect before the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode, etc., can be used even in the common ready-to-reach effect. may start to appear at different times. Even in such a case, if the start time and end time of the text display period are specified using the elapsed time from the start of the display of the moving image, the timing at which the specific image in the moving image is displayed, The timing at which a specific text image is displayed can be easily synchronized, and the linkage between the display of the moving image and the display of the text image can be enhanced. The text image designation information designates the text image data used for displaying the text image so as to be identifiable. For example, the text image designation information may be information that designates the storage address, read address, data size, etc. of the text image data in the storage area 91AKM13. Alternatively, the text image specification information can use arbitrary character codes such as ASCII code, UNICODE (UTF-16 or UTF-8, etc.), JIS code (Shift_JIS code, etc.) to specify the content of the text image to be displayed. may be information specifying the The text display setting information is information that designates the display mode of the text image to be settable based on display style information, display layout information, and other metadata of the text image to be displayed. The text display process table may be described using a predetermined markup language such as TTML (Timed Text Markup Language). In addition, the text display process table may be set by using arbitrary table data so that the text image designation information and the text display setting information can be set in association with each other during the text display period.

FIG. 8-5 shows an example of text image display control using the text display process table. Of these, FIG. 8-5 (A1) shows an example of display control in the case of the text display process table 91AKT01, and FIG. 8-5 (A2) shows an example of display control in the case of the text display process table 91AKT02. . FIG. 8-5(B) shows an example of display control in the case of the text display process table 91AKT11. In these display control examples, when the SP reach A reach effect is executed, the display of the moving image is started at timing T00, and when the SP reach B reach effect is executed, at timing T10. The display of moving images is started at a certain time.

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 8-4(A1), as shown in FIG. 8-5(A1), during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image designation information 91AKA01 causes the text image specified by to be displayed. Also, during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed, and during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is displayed. is displayed. Timings T02 to T04 are all included in the period from timing T01 to timing T05. After the timing T05 has passed, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA04 is displayed during the text display period from the timing T06 to the timing T08, and the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed during the text display period from the timing T07 to the timing T09. causes the text image specified by to be displayed. Note that the timing T08 is a timing that comes after the timing T07.

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 8-4(A2), during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, as shown in FIG. causes the text image specified by to be displayed. Also, during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed, and during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed. is displayed. After the timing T05 has passed, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA14 is displayed during the text display period from the timing T06 to the timing T08, and the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed during the text display period from the timing T07 to the timing T09. causes the text image specified by to be displayed.

In this manner, the text image designated by the text image designation information can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in correspondence with a plurality of text display periods set by the text display process table. The first text display period included in the plurality of text display periods may include a second text display period different from the first text display period and a period partially or wholly common to the second text display period. For example, in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, and the second text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. It is set to include 3 text display periods. In this case, part of the first text display period is shared with the second text display period, and part of the other period is shared with the third text display period. Thus, the first text display period includes a period partially common to the second text display period, and includes a period partially common to the third text display period. On the other hand, the entire period of the second text display period is in common with the first text display period, and the entire period of the third text display period is in common with the first text display period. Thus, the second text display period is entirely included in the first text display period, and the third text display period is entirely included in the first text display period. Further, the text display period from timing T06 to timing T08 and the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09 include periods that are partially common to each other. Thus, the first text display period may be partially included in the second text display period, and the second text display period may be partially included in the first text display period. Alternatively, the first text display period may be entirely included in the second text display period, and the second text display period may be entirely included in the first text display period.

By setting in the text display process table, different text images designated by the text image designation information can be displayed according to a plurality of text display periods. As a result, during the display period of the text image added to the moving image, it is possible to change the first component related to the display content of the text image among the plurality of components in the display of the text image according to the elapsed time. become. For example, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed during the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05 by setting in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02. As the second text display period included in the first text display period, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03. After the second text display period ends at timing T03, as a third text display period included in the first text display period, the text image designation information 91AKA03 or the text A text image designated by the image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed. With this setting, only the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed during the period from timing T01 to timing T02 and the period from timing T03 to timing T04 in the first text display period. . On the other hand, of the first text display period, during the period from timing T02 to timing T03, which is common to the second text display period, the first text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed. The display of the text image is changed so that the display of the second text image specified by the information 91AKA02 is added. On the other hand, during the period from timing T04 to timing T05 common to the third text display period in the first text display period, the first text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed with the text image designation information The display of the text image is changed so that the display of the third text image designated by 91AKA03 or the display of the fourth text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is added. In this case, the display of the text image added to the display of the first text image is set so that either the third text image or the fourth text image is displayed according to the determination result of the text display process table. It becomes possible to change.

In the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image specified by the common text image specification information 91AKA01 is displayed during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, and the text from timing T02 to timing T03 is displayed. The text image designated by the common text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed during the display period. On the other hand, in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, in the case of the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 is displayed, and in the case of the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image is displayed. The text image designated by the image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed. The text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02 can be determined corresponding to common moving image data 91AKD01 and 91AKD11. Therefore, even when a moving image using common moving image data is displayed, the text images to be displayed are different in at least a part of a plurality of text display periods. Components can be changed. It should be noted that when a moving image using common moving image data is displayed, the text image as the display mode may be changed in all of the plurality of text display periods according to the determination result of the text display process table. good. When moving images using common moving image data are displayed, part or all of the start time, end time, and period length may be different for a plurality of text display periods according to the determination result of the text display process table. You can let In this way, part or all of the display period for displaying the text image added to one moving image may be changed, or part or all of the text image added to one moving image may be changed. may be

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT11 shown in FIG. 8-4(B), as shown in FIG. 8-5(B), during the text display period from timing T11 to timing T15, the text image designation information 91AKA21 causes the text image specified by to be displayed. During the text display period from timing T11 to timing T12, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA22 is displayed, and during the text display period from timing T13 to timing T14, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA23 is displayed. is displayed. Timings T12 to T14 are all included in the period from timing T11 to timing T15. After the timing T15 has passed, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA24 is displayed during the text display period from timing T16 to timing T17, and the text image designation information 91AKA25 is displayed during the text display period from timing T18 to timing T19. causes the text image specified by to be displayed.

FIG. 8-6 shows a specific example of text display setting information. The text display setting information includes data corresponding to multiple fields such as origin, fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, color, backgroundColor, fontStyle, textAlign, and textDecoration. The origin field can set the origin coordinates when displaying a text image. The fontFamily field can set the font family, which is the font type, for the font of the characters included in the text image. The fontSize field can set the font size that is the size for displaying the text image. The fontWeight field can set the thickness of characters included in the text image. The color field can set the display color of characters included in the text image. The backgroundColor field can set the display color of the background in the text image. The fontStyle field allows you to set the style of the characters in the text image, such as normal, italic, or italic. The textAlign field can set the alignment of characters included in the text image, such as right alignment, center alignment, or left alignment. The textDecoration field can set decorations to be added to the text image, such as underline, overline, strikethrough, and other effect images. In this way, the text display setting information makes it possible to set the display mode of the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image.

FIG. 8-6(A) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB01. FIG. 8-6(B) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB02. FIG. 8-6 (C1) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB03. FIG. 8-6 (C2) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB13. Text display setting information 91AKB01 is included in text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, and 91AKT11. Text display setting information 91AKB02 is included in text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, and 91AKT11. Text display setting information 91AKB03 is included in text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT11, but not included in text display process table 91AKT02. The text display setting information 91AKB13 is included in the text display process table 91AKT02, but not included in the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT11.

In a plurality of text display periods set by the text display process table, the text image designated by the text image designation information is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. can be displayed. Thereby, during the display period of the text image added to the moving image, it is possible to change the second component related to the display mode of the text image among the plurality of components in displaying the text image according to the elapsed time. become. For example, according to the settings in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 is set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. displayed in the specified display style and display layout. As the second text display period included in the first text display period, in the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is set by the text display setting information 91AKB02. Displayed in a display style or display layout. After the second text display period ends at timing T03, the third text display period included in the first text display period is designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. The text image specified by the text display setting information 91AKB03 is displayed in the display style or display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB03, and the text image specified by the text image specifying information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display style set by the text display setting information 91AKB13. or display layout. With this setting, only the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed as text during the period from timing T01 to timing T02 and the period from timing T03 to timing T04 in the first text display period. It is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the setting information 91AKB01. On the other hand, during the period from timing T02 to timing T03 common to the second text display period in the first text display period, the text image is added to the display of the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01. The display of the text image is changed so that the text image designated by the designation information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB02. On the other hand, during the period from timing T04 to timing T05 common to the third text display period in the first text display period, the text image designation information is added to the display of the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01. When the text image designated by the information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB03, and when the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed by the text display setting information 91AKB13. The display of the text image is changed so that it may be displayed in the specified display style or display layout.

In the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed in the text display setting information 91AKB02, unlike the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. can be displayed in the display style and display layout set by In the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is displayed in the text display setting information 91AKB03, unlike the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. may be displayed in the display style or display layout set by Alternatively, in the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed in the text display setting information, unlike the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. It may be displayed in the display style or display layout set by the information 91AKB13. In this way, during the period common to the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03 in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed as the first text display period. 1 display mode, and the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 can be displayed in a second display mode different from the first display mode. Of the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, during the period common to the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 is displayed in the first display mode. Along with the display, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 may be displayed in a third display mode different from the first display mode and the second display mode. Alternatively, during the period common to the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05 in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is first displayed. In addition, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 may be displayed in a fourth display mode different from the first to third display modes. Therefore, during the display period of the text image added to the moving image, some of the text images can be displayed in a display mode different from that of the other text images. Further, after displaying the text image in the second display mode together with the text image in the first display mode, the text image in the second display mode is changed to the text image in the third display mode, and the second display mode is displayed. The display mode of the text image can be changed and displayed so that the text image of the mode may be changed to the text image of the fourth display mode.

In the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 8-4(A1) and the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 8-4(A2), during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image The text image designated by the designation information 91AKA01 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. Also, during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB02. Thereby, a common text image can be displayed in a common display mode. On the other hand, in the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB03 corresponding to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. display. In the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB13 corresponding to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. This allows different text images to be displayed in different display modes. On the other hand, in the text display process table 91AKT11, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA21 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 corresponding to the text display period from timing T11 to timing T15. display. Also, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA22 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB02 corresponding to the text display period from timing T11 to timing T12. In this case, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA21 can be displayed in a common display mode with the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01. Also, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA22 can be displayed in a common display mode with the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02. In this manner, even different text images added to different moving images may be displayed in a common display mode according to setting data based on common text display setting information. Alternatively, in the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB05 corresponding to the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09. Let In the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB15 corresponding to the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09. In this manner, even a common text image may be displayed in different display modes according to the text display setting information.

In the text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with a plurality of text display periods. Further, in a plurality of text display process tables, at least part of the text image designation information and text display setting information set in association with a plurality of text display periods can be set as common information, and , part or all of the information can be set as different information. With these settings, the first component and the second component related to the text image, such as the display content and display mode of the text image, can be individually changed and displayed.

In the text display setting information 91AKB01 shown in FIG. 8-6(A), the color field is set so that the display color of the text image changes stepwise from #FF0040 to #4000FF. In the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 8-4(A1) and the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 8-4(A2), during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, text display A text image is displayed in the display mode set by the setting information 91AKB01. In the text display process table 91AKT11 shown in FIG. 8-4(B), the text image is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 during the text display period from timing T11 to timing T15. In these cases, when the text image in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 is displayed as a text image corresponding to the display content that is the common first component in the corresponding text display period, The display mode, which is the second component of the text image, such as the display color of the text image, can be changed according to the elapsed time. Note that the display color of the text image set by the color field, for example, may be changeable according to the contents of the ready-to-win effect, etc., even when the same text image is specified by the text image specification information. . In this case, whether or not the display color of the text image is changed at a different rate depending on whether or not the control is in an advantageous state, such as whether or not the display result of the variable display is a "big hit". It may be determined, or one of a plurality of display colors may be determined. Further, for example, the display color of the text image set by the color field is changed according to the execution result of the effect control program by the CPU 91AK 131 even if the same text image is specified by the text image specification information. It may be possible. In this case, the VDP 91AK 132 should be able to change the display color of the text image set by the color field to a different display color based on the display control command from the CPU 91AK 131, register settings, and the like. In this way, the display mode such as the display style of the text image can be changed only by changing a part of the data related to the text image contained in the text display process table. , it is possible to display various text images. If the display color of the text image is changed, other display styles may be correspondingly changeable. For example, when the display color of the text image is white, the display of the text image becomes easy for the player to visually recognize, and when the display color of the text image is red, the display of the text image becomes difficult for the player to recognize. Tend. Therefore, when the display color of the text image is changed to red, the text image set by the fontSize field, for example, is displayed so that the font size is larger than when the display color of the text image is white. The size may be changed. As a specific example, a text image displayed with a font size of 10.5px when the display color is white is displayed with a font size of 11px when the display color is changed to red. It would be nice if it could be changed to As a result, it is possible to display a text image that is easy for the player to visually recognize while suppressing the player's sense of incongruity in displaying the text image.

FIGS. 8-7 show an execution example of rendering in which a text image is displayed using the text display process table. In this execution example, text images corresponding to a plurality of text display periods are displayed along with the moving image display when the reach performance of SP reach A is executed. In the reach performance of the SP reach A, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", a moving image is displayed using the moving image data 91AKD01, and when the display result of the variable display is "losing", a moving image is displayed. Moving image display using data 91AKD11 is performed. In the moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD01 and the moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD11, a common effect display is performed in which a friendly character and an enemy character fight against each other. It is sufficient that the content of the effect display is common until the timing of notification. Further, when the display result of the variable display is "big win", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is high, and when the display result of the variable display is "losing", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is increased. becomes higher. Therefore, in the ready-to-win performance of the SP reach-A, even during the moving image display period in which the contents of the common performance display are displayed, the degree of expectation for the big win can be varied according to the display contents of the text image according to the text display process table. can be done.

Effect execution example 91AKD11 shown in FIG. 8-7(A) is effect contents common to text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02. is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. In this case, the text image indicating the reach name "SP reach A" designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 has, for example, the origin coordinates of (300, 30), The font family is AA_gothic, which is classified as a gothic typeface, the font size is 48px, the bold line width corresponds to the bold character thickness, and the display color of the text image changes gradually from #FF0040 to #4000FF. The components in the display of the text image are controlled so that the background display color is #CCF0F0, the character style is italic or italic corresponding to italic, the character placement is centered, and the character decoration is not set. In the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, if the text image renderer 91AK146 of the VDP 91AK132 executes image conversion processing for displaying the text image in a display mode including the display style and display layout designated by the text display designation information. good.

Further, in the effect execution example 91AKD11 shown in FIG. 8-7(A), the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 corresponds to the text display period from the timing T02 to the timing T03. It is displayed in the display mode set by In this case, the text image indicating the line "If this character wins..." specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB02, for example, the origin coordinates are (250,600). ), the font family is BB_mincho, which is classified as a Mincho typeface, the font size is 36px, the normal line width corresponding to the normal character thickness, the display color of the text image is #FFFFFF, and the background display color is #220C0C. , normal typeface corresponding to normal for the character style, left-aligned character alignment, and no character decoration.

Effect execution example 91AKD21 shown in FIG. 8-7 (B1) includes effect contents different from text display process table 91AKT02 when text display process table 91AKT01 is used, and during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, Correspondingly, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB03. In this case, the text image indicating the line "chance!!" specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 is displayed as the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB03, for example, the origin coordinates are (250,600) and the font family is CC_gothic typeface classified as Gothic, font size 60px, normal line width corresponding to normal character thickness, text image display color #000000, background display color #FFFFFF, character style normal The constituent elements in the text image are controlled so that the corresponding normal typeface, character placement is centered, and character decoration is not set. This text image has the same origin coordinates and character decoration as the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02, and has the same font family, font size, character thickness, text image display color, and background display. Colors, character styles, and character alignment have been changed. In this way, when displaying the text image specified by the text image specification information, it may be possible to change and display some of the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information. .

Effect execution example 91AKD22 shown in FIG. 8-7 (B2) includes effect contents different from text display process table 91AKT01 when text display process table 91AKT02 is used, and during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05 Correspondingly, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB13. In this case, the text image indicating the line "Gekiatsu" specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 has, for example, the origin coordinates of (250,600) and the font family of DD_mincho as the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB13. The font size is 72px, the bold line width corresponds to bold, the display color of the text image is gold corresponding to "gold", the background display color is #000000, The constituent elements in the text image are controlled so that the character style is normal body corresponding to normal, the character placement is in the center, and the character decoration is effect display settings for gold display by effect_gold. Compared with the text image specified by the text image specifying information 91AKA02, this text image has only the origin coordinates in common, and has font family, font size, character thickness, text image display color, background display color, Character styles, character alignments, and character decorations have been changed. In this way, when displaying the text image specified by the text image specification information, the data to be changed and the data not to be changed among the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information are individually set. It may be possible. When this text image is compared with the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01, all settings including the origin coordinates have been changed. In this way, when displaying the text image specified by the text image specifying information, it may be possible to change and display all of the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information. When displaying the text image specified by the text image specification information, among the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information, if one data is changed and displayed, the first data and the Other pre-associated data may also be changeable and displayable. For example, if the display color of the text image is changed to gold corresponding to "gold", the character decoration should be changed to the effect display setting for gold display by effect_gold.

The display color of the text image and the background display color are, for each display color of R (red), G (green), and B (blue), luminance (gradation) of any one of "0" to "255". The level can be set in 256 stages. In the text display setting information, the field data forming the color field and the backgroundColor field have the same data format as the field data forming the color field and the backgroundColor field in the character display setting information used for displaying character images, for example. It is good if there is. The coordinates of the origin for displaying the text image can be set by combining the x-coordinate in the horizontal direction and the y-coordinate in the vertical direction on the screen of the image display device 5 . In the text display setting information, the field data forming the origin field may have a data format common to that of the field data forming the origin field in the character display setting information, for example. In this way, some or all of the field data included in the text display setting information is common to the field data included in the setting information used to display the effect image different from the text image, such as the character display setting information. may have a format. With such text display setting information, it is sufficient if the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, can be changed using common information with the effect image that is different from the text image. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load of changing the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image.

A font family that can be set when displaying a text image is not set when displaying a character image. In the text display setting information, the field data forming the fontFamily field may be unique field data not included in the character display setting information. Also, instead of the font size that can be set when displaying a text image, it is sufficient if the character size can be set when displaying a character image. The field data forming the fontSize field in the text display setting information corresponds to the field data forming the characterSize field in the character display setting information, but may have a unique field format. In this way, some or all of the field data included in the text display setting information is unique and different from the field data included in the setting information used to display the effect image different from the text image, such as the character display setting information. It may have a data format. With such text display setting information, it is possible to change the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, using unique information that is not used in the effect image that is different from the text image. good too. This makes it possible to flexibly change the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, and display various text images.

For example, when gold corresponding to "gold" is set as the display color of the text image, the character decoration is effect display setting for gold display by effect_gold. In the text display setting information, when "gold" is set in the color field, by setting effect_gold in the textDecoration field, a glossy text image is displayed and gold is displayed around the text image. It is possible to add and display an effect image for In the effect execution example 91AKD22 shown in FIG. 8-7 (B2), when the text image designation information 91A13 designates a specific text image showing the words "hot", the text display setting information 91AKB13 is used for gold display. By setting the display style, etc., the specific text image showing the line "Super hot" is displayed with glossiness, and the effect image for gold display is displayed around the specific text image. . This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the display of the text image and to improve the interest of the presentation by the display of the text image.

In the pachinko game machine 1, when an effect by moving image display using moving image data is executed, by adding an effect by text image display using text image data, the player can easily recognize the contents of the effect. This makes it easy to provide information that is different from the contents of the presentation. In this case, in a data structure in which text image data is compression-encoded and multiplexed as video data included in moving image data, in text image display using text image data reproduced by decompression and decoding, contours There is a possibility that problems such as blurring and deterioration of display quality may occur. In addition, if different moving image data are prepared according to the display contents of the text image display added to the moving image display, the data volume of the moving image data tends to increase, and the image data processing load also increases. easier. If a special compression encoding process or decompression decoding process is executed in order to prevent the display quality from deteriorating in text image display, the image data processing load may increase further.

In the characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK, when an effect by moving image display using the moving image data read out from the storage area 91AKM11 is executed, an effect by text image display using the text image data read out from the storage area 91AKM13 is added. By doing so, various text image displays can be easily executed with high quality, and the player can easily recognize the contents of the presentation. In addition, since text image display effects using text image data stored separately from moving image data are added, an increase in the data volume of moving image data and an increase in the processing load of image data are avoided. , it is possible to control the appropriate display that can be prevented as much as possible.

A text image display added to a moving image display using moving image data is controlled using a text display process table. Similarly, moving image display is controlled using a moving image display process table, character image display is controlled using a character display process table, and audio output is controlled using audio output process data. In the text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with a plurality of text display periods. The text image designation information designates the display content of the text image corresponding to the text image data as the first component related to the text image. The text display setting information sets the display mode of the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, as a second component related to the text image. In the VDP 91AK 132 of the performance control microprocessor 91AK 100, for example, the text image renderer 91AK 146 displays the text image specified by the text image specification information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. It is possible to execute image conversion processing for the purpose. As a result, during the display period of the text image added to one moving image, the display content of the text image as the first component and the display mode of the text image as the second component can be changed according to the elapsed time. Make it changeable. By making it possible to change the first component and the second component related to the text image added to one moving image, it is possible to display various text images easily and with high quality, and at the same time reduce data capacity and processing load. Appropriate display control is enabled so that growth is prevented.

When the ready-to-win effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", either text display process table 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 is used when the moving image display effect using moving image data 91AKD01 is executed. A text image can be added and displayed. When the ready-to-win effect content is "SP reach A (losing)", either of the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 is used when the moving image display effect using the moving image data 91AKD11 is executed. A text image can be added and displayed. Further, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win B (big hit)", either of the text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 is executed when the moving image display effect using the moving image data 91AKD02 is executed. The used text image can be added and displayed. When the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP reach B (losing)", either text display process table 91AKT11 or 91AKT12 is used when the moving image display effect using the moving image data 91AKD12 is executed. A text image can be added and displayed. In this way, it is possible to add and display a text image using data relating to a common text image, such as a common text display process table, for a plurality of moving images that are different from each other. By adding text images using common data to multiple moving images and displaying them, various text images can be displayed easily and with high quality, while preventing increases in data volume and processing load. Appropriate display control becomes possible.

In the text display process table 91AKT02, a plurality of text images showing the words "hot" are displayed according to the text image designation information 91AKA13 and the text display setting information 91AKB13 set in association with the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. The display style or the like may be displayed so as to be changeable at the timing of . A text image showing the line "Super hot" is a specific text image corresponding to a specific first component group, such as a text image that is a display content that suggests that the display result of the variable display is likely to be a "big hit". Any text image is acceptable. Thus, when displaying a specific text image corresponding to a specific first component group, the second component such as the display mode of the specific text image may be changed at a plurality of timings.

FIG. 8-8 shows an example of display control when the display style of a text image showing the words "hot" can be changed at a plurality of timings. In this display control example, of the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the display color is black and the character decoration is not set during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T041, and the text from timing T041 to timing T042 is displayed in black. During the display period, the display color is gold and character decoration is not set, and in the text display period from timing T042 to timing T05, the display color is gold and the character decoration is effect display setting for gold display. As for the display style of the text image that is common to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the font family is DD_mincho in the fontFamily field and the font size is 72px in the fontSize field. is set.

FIG. 8-8(A) shows a case where a text image with the words "Gekiatsu" is displayed during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T041. As the display style of the text image during this text display period, the color field sets the display color of the text image to black corresponding to #000000, and the textDecoration field sets the character decoration to no setting corresponding to none. As a result, the display mode including the display style is controlled so that the text image showing the line "Super hot" is displayed in black and the character decoration is not set.

FIG. 8-8(B) shows a case where a text image with the words "Gekiatsu" is displayed during the text display period from timing T041 to timing T042. As the display style of the text image during this text display period, the color field sets the display color of the text image to gold corresponding to "gold", and the textDecoration field sets the character decoration to no setting corresponding to none. As a result, the display mode including the display style is controlled so that the display color of the text image showing the line "Super Hot" is gold and the character decoration is not set. When the display color of the text image is set to gold, it is possible to display the text image with glossiness by, for example, gradation display of the text image. However, if the display of the text image is only glossy, it may be difficult for the player to recognize the gold display.

FIG. 8-8(C) shows a case where a text image of the line "Gekiatsu" is displayed during the text display period from timing T042 to timing T05. As the display style of the text image during this text display period, the color field sets the display color of the text image to gold corresponding to "gold", and the textDecoration field sets the effect display setting for gold display corresponding to the text decoration effect_gold. be done. As a result, the display mode including the display style is controlled such that the display color of the text image showing the line "Super hot" is gold and the character decoration is effect display settings for gold display. In addition to setting the display color of the text image to gold, if the character decoration of the text image is set to the effect display setting for gold display, in addition to the gradation display of the text image, for example, the border of the text image It is possible to display an effect image around the text image by using the display color of , shading, border display by beveling or embossing, a layer style that adds glow, or a combination of some or all of these. As a result, in addition to the display of the text image having glossiness, the effect image is added around the text image and displayed, thereby making it easier for the player to recognize the gold display, thereby making it easier for the player to recognize the display of the text image. It can improve the impression of people.

In the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02, a part of the text image is separated from the other part by the text image specification information 91AKA02 and the text display setting information 91AKB02 set in association with the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03. It may be displayed in a different display style. The text image designation information 91AKA02 designates a text image of the line "If this character wins...". The text display setting information 91AKB02 sets a part of the text image "character" out of the text information indicating the line "if this character wins..." to a text image with a different display color and background display from the other parts. All you have to do is set the color and character style.

FIGS. 8-9 show display examples when a portion of the text image is displayed in a display style different from that of the other portions. In this display example, part of the text image "character" is displayed in white, the background color is black, and the character style is italic, while the other part of the text image is displayed in black. It is displayed so that the background display color is white and the character style is normal. The text display setting information 91AKB02 corresponds to a portion of the text image "character". Set the italic corresponding to the character style italic by the fontStyle field respectively. In addition, the text display setting information 91AKB02 has black corresponding to #000000 for the display color of the text image by the color field, white corresponding to #FFFFFF for the background display color, and white corresponding to #FFFFFF by the fontStyle field. Set the normal type corresponding to the character style normal, respectively. Thus, by displaying a portion of the text image in a display style different from that of the other portions, it is possible to enhance the player's impression of the display of the text image.

In the display of a text image that constitutes a character string in which a plurality of character images are combined, a portion displayed in a display style different from that of other portions may be changeable according to the progress of presentation by moving image display. For example, when a piece of music or dialogue is played back along with a moving image, a portion of the text image corresponding to the progress is displayed in a display style different from that of the other portions, such as a specific color display or highlight display. You may let It may be possible to change the display style so that a part of the text image is faded-in or faded-out according to the progress of the music performance or speech reproduction. A portion of the text image displayed in a display style different from that of other portions is changed according to the elapsed time during the execution of an arbitrary effect, not limited to situations in which the music is played or the voice of dialogue is played along with the moving image display. It may be possible. As a result, in the display of the text image, a part displayed in a display style different from that of the other parts is changed in accordance with the progress of the performance, so that the player's impression of the display of the text image can be enhanced.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and in order to solve at least one problem in the prior art, It may be provided with a part of the configuration.

As a specific example, during the display period of the text image added to one moving image, the display content of the text image that is the first component and the display mode of the text image that is the second component are set to the elapsed time, etc. Execute one of the following: display control to enable change according to the situation, or display control to enable display by adding a text image using data related to a common text image to a plurality of moving images. It may be one that does not execute the other. The first component and the second component related to the text image may be able to change arbitrary components, for example, regarding the display content and display mode of the text image. Instead of part or all of the display content and display mode of the text image, or in addition to part or all of the display content and display mode of the text image, any component related to the display of the text image can be changed. may For example, the time interval and movement width for updating the display position when moving and displaying a text image, the enlargement ratio and reduction ratio when displaying an enlarged or reduced text image, these enlargement ratios and reduction ratios depending on the elapsed time It is only necessary to be able to change arbitrary components that can be set for the display of the text image, such as the time interval for updating the enlargement ratio or the reduction ratio and the amount of change when the text image is changed.

When displaying a text image corresponding to the common display contents, the display mode of the text image is changed by changing the text image set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 shown in FIG. 8-6(A). It is not limited to changing the display color, and any display mode such as display style or display layout may be changed. For example, the text image of the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 can be displayed in the corresponding text display period instead of the display color of the text image, or in addition to the display color of the text image. Any display mode such as font size, character thickness, background display color, character style, character arrangement, decorative display, or a combination of some or all of these may be changed. The text image in the display mode set by the text display setting information different from the text display setting information 91AKB01 may be changeable to a display mode different from the display mode of the text image in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. .

The text image data is not limited to being stored in the storage area 91AKM13 as data different from the moving image data, and at least part of the text image data may be included in the moving image data. For example, text image data for displaying highly designed characters, such as cursive or cursive, is multiplexed or compression-encoded as part of video data, and the video data separated from this video data is decompressed. It may be possible to display the text image in a particular manner, such as by decoding. In this case, the data regarding the text image of the specific mode is included in the moving image data and stored in storage area 91AKM11. Thus, the text image data includes specific text image related data included in the moving image data and stored in storage area 91AKM11, and normal text image related data stored in storage area 91AKM13. may

The text display setting information included in the text display process table consists of field data corresponding to part of origin, fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, color, backgroundColor, fontStyle, textAlign, and textDecoration as data corresponding to multiple fields. Alternatively, it may be configured to include field data different from these. For example, when specifying the storage address, read address, data size, etc. of the text image data in the storage area 91AKM13 by the text image specifying information, the text image data stored in the storage area 91AKM13 is read without using the font data. , the corresponding text image can be displayed. In this case, the text display setting information does not need field data related to font settings, so it may be configured without including field data related to font settings such as fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, and fontStyle. On the other hand, in this case, in order to set the display size of the text image, the text display setting information may include separate field data regarding text display settings, such as textSize.

Scalable font data such as outline font data and vector font data stored in the storage area 91AKM13 may be prepared only as data corresponding to text images used in display effects in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or may be, for example, general-purpose Japanese font data. Data corresponding to a text image that is not limited to the text image used in the display effect in the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as word font data, may be prepared. When only the font data corresponding to the text image used in the display effect are stored in the storage area 91AKM13, the increase in data capacity can be prevented when the text image used in the display effect is small. If general-purpose font data corresponding to text images that are not limited to text images used in display effects are stored in the storage area 91AKM13, reuse of the font data will be facilitated, so designing effects for displaying text images. It is possible to reduce the burden, and to prevent an increase in the data capacity when a large amount of text images are used in the display effect.

As a second component related to the text image, the specific text image, which can change the display mode including the display style and display layout of the text image at multiple timings, is not limited to the text image showing the line "Super hot" , any text image preset as a specific text image corresponding to a specific first component group. For example, among a plurality of types of text images, text images prepared in advance for displaying lyrics of music and text images prepared in advance for displaying subtitles of moving images may be used as specific text images. In this way, for specific text images corresponding to audio effects and display effects in which the effect content changes according to the elapsed time, such as the playback output of music and the playback display of moving images, the second component such as the display mode is set in a plurality of ways. It may be changeable with timing. Alternatively, a text image for which a specific display mode is set, such as a text image for rainbow display in which the display color of the text image is rainbow colors, or a text image for motif display in which the pattern or character decoration of the text image is a cherry blossom pattern. may be the specific text image. Alternatively, it is not limited to the text image of the display content that suggests that the display result of the variable display is highly likely to be a "jackpot", but the text image of the display content that suggests that the rate of being controlled to an arbitrary advantageous state is high. may be the specific text image. The advantageous state is not limited to the jackpot game state, and may include a special game state such as a time saving state or a variable probability state. In addition, the upper limit number of round games that can be executed in the jackpot game state is the first round number (for example, "15") that is larger than the second round number (for example, "7"), and it is executable in the time saving state. The upper limit number of times of variable display is the first number (for example, "100") that is higher than the second number (for example, "50"), and the jackpot probability in the variable state is the second probability (for example, 1/50). 1 probability (for example, 1/20), and the number of consecutive chances, which is the number of times repeatedly controlled to the jackpot game state without being controlled to the normal state, is greater than the second consecutive chance number (for example, "5"). It may include a game situation that is more advantageous to the player, such as a part or all of the number of consecutive wins (for example, "10").

A glossy text image is not limited to the case where gold corresponding to "gold" is set as the display color of the text image. may include a case where the display color of is set. When displaying a predetermined specific text image, the specific text image may be displayed in a glossy display mode without being limited to the display color of the text image. When displaying an arbitrary text image with glossiness, settings such as the textDecoration field in the text display setting information should be made so that it can be displayed with an effect image added around the text image. Just do it.

When a text image is displayed in a rainbow, a plurality of display colors may be sequentially changed and displayed within a predetermined range such as coordinates in characters and display time in the display of the text image. For example, if the display color of the text image is set to a rainbow color corresponding to "rainbow" in the color field in the text display setting information, by transitioning different display colors for each coordinate in the character of the text image. , rainbow display should be possible. For example, at the coordinates in the character 1, the display color is changed to red, then orange to yellow, then green, then light blue, then blue, and then blue purple to red purple, depending on the elapsed time. In addition, a plurality of display colors may be sequentially changed. At this time, considering the fact that red is a color that gives a strong impression to the human eye and that the change in blue becomes darker, we adjusted the brightness corresponding to each display color in the rainbow display, and The display colors in the coordinates within the character may be changed in order of red, orange, yellow, green, water, blue, bluish purple, and reddish purple. After purplish-red, it is sufficient to return to red again and change the display color. As a result, the player can smoothly and clearly recognize the change in display color. In this way, when a special element is set as a character image component, such as when the display color of the text image is set to a rainbow color corresponding to "rainbow" by the color field in the text display setting information, the text display process Even if it is possible to display a text image in which multiple display colors are sequentially changed within the text image coordinates and display time range specified by the text image specification information corresponding to the text display period included in the table. good. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the display of the text image and to improve the interest of the presentation by the display of the text image. By sequentially changing different display colors according to the coordinates in the text image, the entire text image may be displayed in a rainbow display. Alternatively, by sequentially changing the common display color for all in-character coordinates, the display of the text image may be changed to a rainbow display according to the elapsed time. In this manner, a text image in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed may be displayed within a predetermined range of either the intra-character coordinates or the display time.

The first component and the second component related to the text image may be changeable to different components depending on whether the player's specific action is detected, or the plurality of components may be changed at different ratios. Either can be changed. The player's specific action that enables the change of the first component and the second component related to the text image is, for example, a push operation or a pull operation on the operation rod of the stick controller 31A, which is the V controller, or other operations on the operation rod of the stick controller 31A. may be an arbitrary operation of tilting the , or an operation of pressing the push button 31b. Not limited to those that can detect player's actions, for example, based on the detection result of any change or difference in the detection target, such as the execution state of processing or control in the detection target, changes in the shape, pattern, or color of the detection target It may be possible to change the first component and the second component related to the text image. A detection device capable of detecting motion, change, difference, etc. in a detection target, such as an infrared sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor, mechanically, electrically, electromagnetically detects the state of the detection target. Any configuration that can be detected will suffice. Alternatively, the state of the detection target may be detected by analyzing the result of photographing the detection target using a predetermined camera (video motion capture). As an example of detecting the state of a detection target using a camera, the screen display state of the mobile terminal may be detected, and the display content and display mode of the text image may be changed based on the detection result.

Some or all of the text image display effects using the text image data may be executed as setting suggesting effects capable of suggesting setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . For example, when the ready-to-win effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 may be determined at different ratios depending on the set values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In such a case, the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 35/100 (=35%) if the set value is 1, and 30/100 (=30%) if the set value is 2. If the setting value is 3, it is 25/100 (=25%), if the setting value is 4, it is 20/100 (=20%), and if the setting value is 5, it is 15/100 (= 15%), and if the set value is 6, it may be set to 10/100 (=10%). Correspondingly, the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 65/100 (=65%) if the set value is 1, and 70/100 (=70%) if the set value is 2. If the setting value is 3, it is 75/100 (=75%), if the setting value is 4, it is 80/100 (=80%), and if the setting value is 5, it is 85/100 (= 85%), and if the set value is 6, it may be set to 90/100 (=90%). According to the setting of such determination ratio, when the ready-to-win effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", the ratio at which the effect by text image display corresponding to either text display process pattern 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 is executed. are made different according to the set values in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, when the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the effect by the text image display according to the text display process table 91AKT01 is likely to be executed, and as the set value increases, the text according to the text display process table 91AKT02 is displayed. The ratio of execution of effects by image display increases. Therefore, when the ready-to-win effect content is "SP ready-to-win A (big hit)", if the text image display effect according to the text display process table 91AKT02 is executed, the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is advantageous for the player. Expectations, which are set values that are reasonable, increase.

In addition, according to the set value in the pachinko game machine 1, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios. For example, in the case of a specific set value, setting suggestion effects may be executed at a higher rate than in the case of a set value other than the specific set value. In this case, in a range where the set value is other than the specific set value, there is provided a limit as a limit that the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is lower than in the range where the set value is the specific set value. A setting suggestion effect may be provided that is executable at a predetermined rate when the specific set value is set and is not executed when the set value is other than the specific set value. In this way, within a range in which the set value is the specific set value, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined rate. On the other hand, a limitation is provided as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed in a range where the set value is other than the specific set value.

Depending on whether it is a special period or not, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios. For example, in the case of the special period, it may be possible to execute the setting suggestion effect at a higher rate than in the case of the period other than the special period. In this case, in a period other than the special period, a limitation is provided as a limit that the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is lower than in the special period. A setting suggestion effect may be provided that is executable at a predetermined rate in the special period and is not executed in the period other than the special period. In this way, it is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect at a predetermined rate within the special period. On the other hand, within a period other than the special period, there is a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed.

Depending on whether or not an arbitrary special condition is satisfied, regardless of whether it is a special period or not, arbitrary setting suggestion effects may be executed at different ratios. For example, when the special condition is established, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than when the special condition is not established. In this case, in the range where the special condition is not satisfied, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is lower than in the range where the special condition is satisfied. A setting suggestion performance may be provided that is executable at a predetermined rate when the special condition is met and is not executed when the special condition is not met. In this way, within the range where the special condition is satisfied, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined rate. On the other hand, in the range in which the special condition is not established, there is provided a limit as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed. The special condition may be any condition that can be established according to the progress or history of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the result of judgment or decision of the game, or the progress or history of the performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the performance. It may be any condition that can be established according to the determination or determination of. It is not limited to setting suggesting effects, and arbitrary effects may be executable at different rates depending on whether or not a preset condition is met, or whether such a condition is met. The effect mode may be determined at a different rate depending on whether or not the condition is satisfied, or the execution timing may be determined at a different rate depending on whether such a condition is satisfied. . In addition, an arbitrary effect may be limited as a limit that a specific effect is not executed in the range where the preset limit condition is satisfied, or compared with the range where the limit condition is not satisfied. A limit may be provided as a limit that the execution rate is lowered and execution is difficult.

(Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 91AK)
A game machine capable of executing a game, for example, a pachinko game machine 1, capable of executing a specific effect of displaying a moving image with a character image added, such as a reach effect of SP reach A or SP reach B, For example, effect execution means such as the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, a first storage area such as a storage area 91AKM11 for storing data related to moving images, and a second storage area such as a storage area 91AKM13 for storing data related to character images. and moving image control means, such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a moving image renderer 91AK144, for controlling the display of moving images using the data stored in the first storage area, and character image display using the data stored in the second storage area. Character image control means such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a text image renderer 91AK146 are provided for controlling display, and the data stored in the second storage area is the first component such as the text image specified by the text image specification information. and a second component such as a display style set by text display setting information. During the display period, the first component and the second component can be changed, eg, as shown in FIGS. 8-7. As a result, various character images can be displayed easily and with high quality, and appropriate display control can be performed so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-8, the character image control means can change the second component related to the character image when displaying the character image corresponding to the common first component during the display period. good too. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The character image control means changes the second component related to the character image, for example, as shown in FIG. It may be possible. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to reduce the processing load.

The character image control means is capable of displaying a specific character image corresponding to a specific first component group, such as a text image showing "Gekiatsu", for example. The second component may be changeable at multiple times. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The character image control means may be capable of individually changing and displaying the first component and the second component relating to the character image, as shown in FIG. 8-4, for example. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The data stored in the second storage area may include outline data that can be used to display character images, such as outline font data. As a result, various character images can be displayed easily and with high quality, and appropriate display control can be performed so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

For example, when a specific element such as when the color field is "gold" is set as a character image component, a glossy character image is displayed as shown in FIG. It may be possible to add an effect image to the surroundings and display it. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the character image display.

When a special element such as "rainbow" is set in the color field as a character image component, for example, red, orange, yellow, green, red, orange, yellow, green, etc. It may be possible to display a character image in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed, such as changing in order of water, blue, bluish purple, and reddish purple. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the character image display.

(Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 92AK)
A game machine capable of executing a game, for example, a pachinko game machine 1, capable of executing a specific effect of displaying a moving image with a character image added, such as a reach effect of SP reach A or SP reach B, For example, effect execution means such as the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, a first storage area such as a storage area 91AKM11 for storing data related to moving images, and a second storage area such as a storage area 91AKM13 for storing data related to character images. and moving image control means, such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a moving image renderer 91AK144, for controlling the display of moving images using the data stored in the first storage area, and character image display using the data stored in the second storage area. Character image control means such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a text image renderer 91AK146 are provided for controlling display, and the data stored in the second storage area is the first component such as the text image specified by the text image specification information. and a second component such as a display style set by the text display setting information. and a second moving image different from the first moving image, such as a moving image using the moving image data 91AKD11, for example, a text image according to the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02. , a character image using data relating to a common character image can be added and displayed. As a result, various character images can be displayed easily and with high quality, and appropriate display control can be performed so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-8, the character image control means displays the character image corresponding to the common first component during the display period of the character image added to one moving image. may be changeable. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The character image control means changes the second component related to the character image, for example, as shown in FIG. It may be possible. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to reduce the processing load.

The character image control means is capable of displaying a specific character image corresponding to a specific first component group, such as a text image showing "Gekiatsu", for example. The second component may be changeable at multiple timings. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The character image control means may be capable of individually changing and displaying the first component and the second component relating to the character image, as shown in FIG. 8-4, for example. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The data stored in the second storage area may include outline data that can be used to display character images, such as outline font data. As a result, various character images can be displayed easily and with high quality, and appropriate display control can be performed so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

For example, when a specific element such as when the color field is "gold" is set as a character image component, a glossy character image is displayed as shown in FIG. It may be possible to add an effect image to the surroundings and display it. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the character image display.

When a special element such as "rainbow" is set in the color field as a character image component, for example, red, orange, yellow, green, red, orange, yellow, green, etc. It may be possible to display a character image in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed, such as changing in order of water, blue, bluish purple, and reddish purple. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the character image display.

(Explanation related to association of characteristic parts)
The configuration regarding the characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK may be appropriately combined with part or all of the configuration regarding the characteristic portion 60AK. For example, an operation effect to be executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed can be executed as a setting suggestion effect, which is an operation effect of the suggestion effect mode, and during the display period of the character image added to one moving image, the first component and the second component may be changeable, and character images using common character image data for the first moving image and the second moving image different from the first moving image may be changed. It may be possible to add and display.

(Description of Characteristic Portions 01AK and 02AK)
FIG. 9-1 shows a configuration example 01AKP0 of screen display on the image display device 5 regarding the characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK. In the configuration example 01AKP0, the screen of the image display device 5 is provided with an active display area 01AKA1, a first reserved display area 01AKB1, a second reserved display area 01AKB2, and a small symbol display area 01AKC1.

In the active display area 01AKA1, active display is performed by displaying an effect image corresponding to the variable display being executed. In the first reserved display area 01AKB1, a reserved display is performed by displaying an effect image corresponding to the variable display whose execution is reserved according to the number of first reserved memories. In the second reserved display area 01AKB2, a reserved display is performed by displaying an effect image corresponding to the variable display whose execution is reserved according to the number of second reserved memories. Thus, in the active display area 01AKA1, the first reserved display area 01AKB1, and the second reserved display area 01AKB2, active display and reserved display, which are specific displays, can be performed based on the information regarding the variable display. The pending display in the first pending display area 01AKB1 is also called "first pending display", and the pending display in the second pending display area 01AKB2 is also called "second pending display".

The first pending display area 01AKB1 can display, for example, pending displays associated with pending numbers "1", "2", "3", and "4" in order from the right end. It is only necessary that the display area is configured to do so. The second pending display area 01AKB2 can display, for example, pending displays associated with pending numbers "1", "2", "3", and "4" in order from the left end. It is only necessary that the display area is configured to do so. In the active display area 01AKA1, active display corresponding to the first reserved display erased (digested) in the first reserved display area 01AKB1 corresponding to the start of the first special game is started, and the second special game is started. Active display corresponding to the second pending display erased (digested) in the second pending display area 01AKB2 corresponding to the start is started. The active display that can be displayed in the active display area 01AKA1 may have the same color and pattern as the first reserved display and the second reserved display. For example, the active display is common to the first reserved display and the second reserved display. may be displayed larger than each hold display. The display mode of the active display may change to a display mode different from that of the first reserved display and the second reserved display due to the execution of the active display change effect. Further, in the active display area 01AKA1, for example, an effect image showing a pedestal may be displayed below the active display so that the active display can be recognized separately from the first reserved display and the second reserved display.

At a predetermined position on the screen of the image display device 5, a small pattern display area 01AKC1 is arranged. The small pattern display area 01AKC1 is smaller than the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, and is provided at a predetermined position such as the right end on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. ing. In the small pattern display area 01AKC1, variable display of small patterns is executed in correspondence with variable display of special patterns and decoration patterns. The effect image showing the small pattern is reduced in size as compared with the identification information image which is the effect image showing the decorative pattern, and can be displayed in a variable manner in a manner that is partially or wholly common to each of the identification information images showing the decorative pattern. A reduced identification information image may be used. For example, if the identification information image showing the decorative pattern includes a part showing a number and a part showing a character, the effect image showing the small pattern corresponds to the same pattern number as the part showing the number included in the decorative pattern. Since this is an image showing a number and does not include a part showing a character, it is sufficient if the small pattern can be displayed in a simpler manner than the effect image showing the decorative pattern. By displaying small symbols in a simple manner in the small symbol display area 01AKC1, it is sufficient to prevent the player from misunderstanding the display contents and display results of the small symbols. In the small pattern display area 01AKC1 provided on the screen of the image display device 5, variable display of small patterns as reduced identification information is performed, and finalized small patterns as display results are derived. The effect image showing the small pattern may be displayed at a position that is always visible.

FIG. 9B shows a configuration example of an effect drawing command. In this embodiment, commands 01AKG01 to 01AKG06 are prepared in advance as a plurality of effect drawing commands. Command 01AKG01 is a drawing command that instructs color blending for blurring by bilinear sampling. The command 01AKG02 is a drawing command instructing a color blend that inverts color information. The command 01AKG03 is a drawing command for instructing color blending for blurring by changing magnification. A command 01AKG04 is a drawing command for instructing color blending for monochrome conversion. The command 01AKG05 is a drawing command instructing color blending for blurring by rotation. Command 01AKG06 is a drawing command instructing to change the offset amount of the image position.

The drawing command for effect may be prepared as one drawing command, or may be prepared as a display list. The display list is a group of commands for drawing control, and can be created by the CPU 91AK131 as a command string combining a plurality of commands for the VDP 91AK132. The VDP91AK132 can execute drawing processing in the order described in the display list. The drawing command for effect may be composed of a combination of command groups for setting a plurality of types of inter-pixel calculations. For example, a drawing command that instructs color blending may function as a drawing command for each effect by setting parameters according to the effect to be applied. For example, the internal register of the VDP91AK132 stores control data specifying the operation target included in the display list, numeric data specifying parameters, and other register values. By storing the register value according to the execution command, Drawing according to the display list is started.

When performing color blending for blurring by bilinear sampling in response to command 01AKG01, for example, a reduced image is generated by bilinear interpolation method texture mapping for image data. When generating this reduced image, a plurality of reduced images with different sampling point groups may be generated. Using a plurality of reduced images generated in this way, a combined reduced image is generated by executing a synthesis process based on color blending, such as alpha blending. After that, by performing enlargement processing of the synthesized reduced image, it is possible to draw an image generated by changing color information included in the image data so as to obtain an image subjected to blurring processing.

When performing color blending to invert color information in response to command 01AKG02, for example, the maximum value (for example, 255) and , and perform difference calculation processing. For example, if the R value corresponding to "red" is "80", then 255-80=175 is obtained, thereby inverting the color information. By executing the same difference calculation process for the G value corresponding to "green" and the B value corresponding to "blue", the color information contained in the image data is converted to an image in which the color information is inverted. can be changed to render the generated image.

In response to command 01AKG03, when executing color blending for blurring by changing magnification, for example, a plurality of enlarged images or reduced images are generated by scaling processing on image data. At this time, a plurality of enlarged images or reduced images having different magnifications such as image enlargement ratios and reduction ratios are generated. For example, for an image with a display magnification of 100%, two types of enlarged images are generated, such as an image with a display magnification of 102% and an image with a display magnification of 104%. A plurality of enlarged or reduced images generated in this way and an image (original image) corresponding to the original image data are used to execute synthesis processing by color blending, such as alpha blending, to perform blur processing. The image generated by changing the color information included in the image data can be drawn so that the image is obtained by changing the color information included in the image data.

When executing color blending for monochrome conversion in response to command 01AKG04, monochrome conversion arithmetic processing is executed for each pixel with respect to RGB values, which are color information of each pixel (one pixel) indicated by image data, for example. do. In the monochrome conversion arithmetic processing, the color information can be changed so that the image becomes monochrome by substituting the RGB values into the arithmetic expression for color tone conversion. By executing the monochrome conversion arithmetic processing in this way, it is possible to draw an image generated by changing the color information included in the image data so as to obtain an image subjected to monochrome conversion.

When color blending for blurring by rotation is executed in response to command 01AKG05, a plurality of rotated images are generated by, for example, rotation calculation processing on image data. At this time, a plurality of rotated images with different image rotation angles are generated. For example, for an image with a rotation angle of 0°, two types of rotated images are generated, such as an image with a rotation angle of 2° and an image with a rotation angle of 4°. An image that has undergone blurring processing by executing synthesis processing using color blending, such as alpha blending, using a plurality of rotated images generated in this way and an image (original image) corresponding to the original image data. An image generated by changing the color information included in the image data can be drawn so that

When changing the offset amount of the image position in response to the command 01AKG06, the position information of the image is changed by, for example, coordinate value conversion processing for the image data. In the coordinate value conversion process, position information for drawing an image, such as UV coordinate values, is changed according to an offset amount set as a parameter. UV coordinate values are given as texture coordinate attribute values when mapping a texture onto an object. By executing the coordinate value conversion process, it is possible to draw an image generated by changing the position information corresponding to the image data so as to obtain an image with a different texture arrangement.

In this way, the drawing commands for effect may include commands such as commands 01AKG01 to 01AKG05 that enable drawing of an image generated by changing the color information included in the image data. Also, the effect drawing command may include a command, such as command 01AKG06, that enables drawing of an image generated by changing the position information corresponding to the image data. In addition, the effect drawing command may include a command that enables drawing of an image generated by changing arbitrary attribute information related to image data.

Unlike these drawing commands for effects, the CPU 91AK 131 can also generate drawing commands for normal display. The drawing command for normal display executes processing for drawing an image corresponding to the image data without changing color information or the like included in the image data by not executing synthesis processing by color blending or the like.

FIG. 9-3 shows an example of screen display including various effect images that can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. FIG. A plurality of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 are drawn divided into a plurality of display layers. Different display priorities are set in advance for the plurality of display layers as display layers for effect images. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 9-3, layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 are provided as a plurality of display layers. Among them, the layer 01AKL1 is a display layer having the highest display priority, and draws an effect image showing a small pattern in the small pattern display area 01AKC1 so that it can be displayed. The layer 01AKL2 is a display layer having the next highest display priority after the layer 01AKL1, and draws an effect image corresponding to the suspended display and the active display so as to be displayable. Also, the layer 01AKL2 may draw an effect image showing a pedestal below the active display so that it can be displayed. The layer 01AKL3 is a display layer having the next highest display priority after the layer 01AKL2, and draws an effect image or the like used for a chance-up effect of increasing the chance during reach. Layer 01AKL4 is a display layer having the next highest display priority after layer 01AKL3, and displays effects images showing decorative patterns in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. Draw possible. The layer 01AKL5 is a display layer with the lowest display priority, and draws an effect image as a background image so that it can be displayed.

A display layer in which a plurality of effect images are arranged is designated by display priority information or the like included in the display list, for example. In the display list, the effect image placed on the layer 01AKL5 is designated as the first drawing target, and then the effect images placed on the respective display layers are designated as drawing targets in the order of layers 01AKL4, 01AKL3, 01AKL2, and 01AKL1. good too. Further, for example, the image data of the effect images drawn on the layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 may be set with a Z value, which is the depth value used when superimposing and drawing the respective effect images. By setting the Z value in the Z value setting table, the Z value of the effect image drawn on each of the layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 may be different depending on the drawing destination layer. For example, a display layer to which a small value is assigned as the Z value is arranged on the nearer side (front side) in the Z axis direction than a display layer to which a large value is assigned as the Z value, and the display priority of the image is higher. You should do it like this.

When the VDP 91AK132 writes the image data read from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like to the frame buffer provided in the VRAM 91AK147 or the like, the VDP 91AK132 may determine the display priority by comparing the Z values. At this time, for example, the image data of the effect image with a small Z value is written in the frame buffer with priority over the image data of the effect image with a large Z value. As a result, the effect image drawn on the display layer to which the small value is assigned as the Z value has a higher display priority than the effect image drawn on the display layer to which the large value is assigned as the Z value. It can be arranged on the front side (front side). On the other hand, the effect image drawn on the display layer to which a large value is assigned as the Z value has a lower display priority than the effect image drawn on the display layer to which the small value is assigned as the Z value. It can be arranged on the back side (rear side) as seen. Note that the relationship between the Z value and the display priority may be a reverse relationship, and a display layer to which a large value is assigned as the Z value has a lower Z value than a display layer to which a small value is assigned as the Z value. It may be arranged on the front side (front side) in the axial direction so that the display priority of the image is high.

In this way, the rendering process of the effect image corresponding to the display layer is executed to generate the display image 01AKD1 including a plurality of effect images. The display image 01AKD1 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 after synthesizing the images drawn on the layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 so as to be superimposed as a plurality of display layers with different display priorities.

Of the layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5, layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 are special layers, and layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 are specific layers. On layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 included in the specific layer, effect images can be drawn and displayed by drawing processing different from the effect images drawn on layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 included in the special layer.

FIG. 9-4 is a flow chart showing an example of effect drawing synthesis processing executed by the VDP 91AK132. The effect drawing synthesizing process is executed, for example, when a display list including effect drawing commands is transferred based on the instruction code decoded by the instruction decoder 91AK141 of the VDP 91AK132. When the effect drawing/synthesizing process is started, image data to be subjected to the effect process is read out (step 01AKS01). For example, in the VDP 91AK132, image data to be processed is read from the performance data memory 91AK123 or the like, and stored in the work area of the VRAM 91AK147 for temporary storage. The data transfer circuit of the VDP 91AK 132 accesses the address of the image data specified by the drawing command, reads the image data to be processed from the effect data memory 91AK 123 or the buffer area of the VRAM 91AK 147, and transfers it to the work area of the VRAM 91AK 147. It should be memorized. Image data to be subjected to effect processing is specified by a drawing command as image data representing an image to be drawn on one of layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, among a plurality of display layers.

Thereafter, effect color blending is executed according to the drawing command (step 01AKS02). For example, the VDP 91AK132 executes, for example, one of the commands 01AKG01 to 01AKG05 by executing inter-pixel arithmetic processing specified by the drawing command using some or all of the moving image renderer 91AK144, the character image renderer 91AK145, and the text image renderer 91AK146. color blending according to the In the case of command 01AKG06, coordinate value conversion processing may be executed to change the offset amount of the image position in texture mapping.

After step 01AKS02, an image is synthesized and drawn corresponding to the low-priority display layer (step 01AKS03). At this time, the image for which effect color blending has been executed in step 01AKS02 is drawn in the frame buffer for screen display in the VRAM 91AK147. For example, the VDP 91AK132 is drawn on layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 by executing inter-pixel arithmetic processing specified by a drawing command by some or all of the moving image renderer 91AK144, character image renderer 91AK145, and text image renderer 91AK146. It suffices to store the images in the screen display frame buffer while synthesizing them according to the display priority. As a result, the image drawn on any of the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers, can be drawn for screen display after changing the color information of the image data by executing color blend for effect. can.

After step 01AKS03, an image is synthesized and drawn corresponding to the display layer of high priority (step 01AKS04). For example, the VDP 91AK132 reads image data to be drawn from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like, and draws it in a frame buffer for screen display in the VRAM 91AK147. An image in the low-priority display layer has already been drawn in this frame buffer in step 01AKS03. The data transfer circuit of the VDP 91AK 132 accesses the address of the image data specified by the drawing command, reads the image data to be drawn from the effect data memory 91AK 123 and the buffer area of the VRAM 91AK 147, and uses the VRAM 91AK 147 for screen display. It can be transferred to the frame buffer and stored. At this time, some or all of the moving image renderer 91AK144, the character image renderer 91AK145, and the text image renderer 91AK146 execute inter-pixel arithmetic processing specified by the drawing command, and draw on layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, respectively. Images may be stored in a frame buffer for screen display while being synthesized according to the display priority. The image data to be drawn in step 01AKS04 is image data representing an image to be drawn on either layer 01AKL1 or 01AKL2, which is a special layer among the plurality of display layers, by a drawing command. As a result, an image drawn on either layer 01AKL1 or 01AKL2, which is a special layer, can be drawn for screen display without executing effect color blending and without changing the color information of the image data. can be done.

In this way, the VDP 91AK 132 can execute drawing processing for displaying various images on the screen of the image display device 5 using image data stored in predetermined areas of the effect data memory 91AK 123 and VRAM 91AK 147 . In addition, by executing the effect drawing synthesis process, on the one hand, an image drawn on one of layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which is a specific layer, can be drawn by changing the color information included in the image data. On the other hand, an image drawn on either layer 01AKL1 or 01AKL2, which is a special layer, can be drawn corresponding to the image data.

When a display list containing drawing commands for normal display but not drawing commands for effect is transferred, the VDP 91AK 132 can execute normal drawing composition processing different from effect drawing composition processing. In the normal drawing synthesis process, the data transfer circuit of the VDP 91AK 132 reads the image data to be drawn from the effect data memory 91AK 123 or the buffer area of the VRAM 91AK 147 by accessing the address of the image data specified by the drawing command, and stores it in the VRAM 91AK 147. Then, the data is transferred to the frame buffer for screen display and stored. At this time, some or all of the moving image renderer 91AK144, the character image renderer 91AK145, and the text image renderer 91AK146 execute inter-pixel arithmetic processing specified by the drawing command, and draw on layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, respectively. Images may be stored in a frame buffer for screen display while being synthesized according to the display priority. In this case, the image drawn on any of the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, and the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, are changed without color blending for effect. can be drawn for screen display without

FIG. 9-5 shows an execution example of image processing by effect drawing synthesis processing. In this case, in the display list containing the drawing commands for effect, the image data to be subjected to effect processing are the image data 01AKD03 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL3 among the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 included in the specific layer, the image data 01AKD03 of the effect image arranged on the layer The image data 01AKD04 of the effect image placed on the layer 01AKL4 and the image data 01AKD05 of the effect image placed on the layer 01AKL5 are designated respectively. When the VDP 91AK 132 reads these image data in step 91AKS 01 of the effect drawing synthesis process, they are temporarily stored in a sub-frame buffer 01AKF 01 provided in the work area of the VRAM 91AK 147 or the like. As a result, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (A1), image data 01AKD03 of the effect image placed on the layer 01AKL3, image data 01AKD04 of the effect image placed on the layer 01AKL4, and effect image data 01AKD04 of the effect image placed on the layer 01AKL5 are obtained. The image data 01AKD05 of the image is stored in the sub-frame buffer 01AKF01.

Subsequently, the VDP 91AK 132 performs effect color blending on the image data stored in the sub-frame buffer 01AKF01 in step 91AKS02 of the effect drawing synthesis process. For example, when a command 01AKG04 designates a color blend for monochrome conversion as an effect drawing command, the color information included in the image data is changed by executing monochrome conversion arithmetic processing. As a result, the image data 01AKD03 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL3 is changed in color information so as to become monochrome-converted image data 01AKD13 as shown in FIG. 9-5(A2). The image data 01AKD04 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL4 is changed in color information so as to become monochrome-converted image data 01AKD14 as shown in FIG. 9-5(A2). The image data 01AKD05 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL5 is changed in color information so as to become monochrome-converted image data 01AKD15 as shown in FIG. 9-5(A2).

After that, the VDP 91AK 132 synthesizes an image corresponding to the low-priority display layer in step 91AKS03 of the effect drawing synthesis processing. For example, the image data read from the sub-frame buffer 01AKF01 is written and stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02 in order from the display layer with the lowest display priority. At this time, overwriting of image data or hidden surface removal may be executed according to the display priority. Of the image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 stored in the sub-frame buffer 01AKF01 shown in FIG. 9-5(A2), the image data 01AKD15 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL5 is read first and written to the main frame buffer 01AKF02. memorize with The image data 01AKD14 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL4 is read second and superimposed on the image data 01AKD15 stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02 to be combined. The image data 01AKD13 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL3 is read third, and superimposed and written on the image data 01AKD14 and 01AKD15 stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02 for synthesis.

Then, the VDP 91AKD 132 synthesizes an image corresponding to the high-priority display layer in step 91AKS04 of the effect drawing synthesis processing. At this time, of the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 included in the special layer, the image data 01AKD02 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL2 is first designated as the image data to be drawn by the drawing command included in the display list, for example. , and the image data 01AKD01 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL1 is specified next. The VDP 91AK 132 writes and stores the image data in the main frame buffer 01AKF02 each time it reads the image data. That is, among the image data 01AKD01 and 01AKD02 to be drawn, the image data 01AKD02 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL2 is read first, and superimposed on the image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02. Write and synthesize. Finally, the image data 01AKD01 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL1 is read and superimposed on the image data 01AKD02 and 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02 to be combined.

In this way, the image data 01AKD03 to 01AKD05 temporarily stored in the sub-frame buffer 01AKF01 are converted into the image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 in which the color information is changed by color blending for effect, and the image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 after the conversion are given priority for display. The data are written to the main frame buffer 01AKF02 in order according to the frequency. After that, the image data 01AKD01 and 01AKD02 are written in the main frame buffer 01AKF02 in the order according to the display priority without changing the color information by not performing color blending for effect. Therefore, 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, are drawn by specific drawing processing such as color blending for effects, and display various images for effects such as background images, effect images showing decorative patterns, and effect images for increasing chances during reach. It is possible. On the other hand, 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, are drawn by normal drawing processing that does not perform color blending for effects. A related predetermined image can be displayed.

FIG. 9-6 shows an example of image display by execution of effect drawing synthesis processing. When the display list including the effect drawing command is transferred, the VDP 91AK 132 can display the effect image drawn by changing the color information included in the image data by executing the effect drawing synthesis process. .

FIG. 9-6A shows an image display example 01AKM01 in the case of monochrome conversion. When a display list including command 01AKG04 is transferred as a drawing command for effect, an effect image drawn by monochrome conversion arithmetic processing among color blends for effect is displayed in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. It is possible. The monochrome conversion calculation process is a process for drawing with fewer colors than the color information contained in the image data. As a result, the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers of the image display example 01AKM01, are drawn by monochrome conversion arithmetic processing for drawing with fewer colors than the color information included in the image data as the specific drawing processing. A production image can be displayed. Layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers of the image display example 01AKM01, can be drawn without changing the color information and the like included in the image data by normal drawing processing, and can display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game.

FIG. 9-6B shows an image display example 01AKM02 in the case of color information inversion. When a display list containing command 01AKG02 is transferred as a drawing command for effect, it is possible to display an image for effect drawn by difference calculation processing among color blends for effect in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. is. The difference calculation process is a process for drawing by converting the value of color information included in the image data so as to be inverted by the difference from the maximum value. As a result, in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers of the image display example 01AKM02, as specific drawing processing, drawing is performed by difference calculation processing for converting the value of color information included in the image data and drawing, and an effect image is drawn. can be displayed. Layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers of the image display example 01AKM02, can display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game by drawing without converting the values of color information included in the image data by normal drawing processing.

In addition, when a display list including the command 01AKG01 is transferred as a drawing command for effect, layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, perform color blending for blurring by bilinear sampling as specific drawing processing. It is possible to display an effect image drawn by changing the color information included in the image data. In this case, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are the special layers, may be drawn without changing the color information or the like contained in the image data by the normal drawing process, so that a predetermined image relating to the progress of the game can be displayed.

When a display list including command 01AKG03 is transferred as a drawing command for effect, in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, image data is processed by combining color blending for blurring by changing magnification as specific drawing processing. It is possible to display a rendering image drawn by changing the color information contained in the . In this case, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are the special layers, may be drawn without changing the color information or the like contained in the image data by normal drawing processing, and display a predetermined image relating to the progress of the game.

When a display list including command 01AKG05 is transferred as an effect drawing command, layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, perform color blending for blurring due to rotation as specific drawing processing. It is possible to display an effect image drawn by changing the included color information. In this case, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are the special layers, may be drawn without changing the color information or the like contained in the image data by the normal drawing process, so that a predetermined image relating to the progress of the game can be displayed.

When a display list including command 01AKG06 is transferred as an effect drawing command, in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, image data is converted by coordinate value conversion processing for changing the offset amount of the image position as specific drawing processing. It is possible to display an effect image drawn by changing the position information corresponding to . In this case, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are the special layers, may be drawn without changing the position information or the like corresponding to the image data by the normal drawing process, and display a predetermined image relating to the progress of the game.

By using these drawing commands for effects, it is possible to create an effect image drawn by changing the color information contained in the image data, or an effect image drawn by changing the position information corresponding to the image data, on a specific layer. can be displayed. As a result, even an effect image drawn using common image data can be drawn by changing color information or position information by making it possible to execute different image processing according to the effect drawing command. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the data amount of the image data from increasing, and to execute various display effects to improve the amusement of the game.

FIG. 9-7(A) shows a setting example of the reliability of the big hit according to the contents of the ready-to-win effect. The big hit reliability for each ready-to-win effect is the ratio of the cases where the variable display result is "big win" and the game is controlled to the big win game state among the cases where each ready-to-win effect is executed. In this setting example, the reliability of the big hit is set to be different according to a plurality of types of reach effects such as SP reach A1 to A3 or SP reach B, which are super reach. For example, in the variable display pattern determination table, by assigning a determination value to be compared with a random value for determining the variable display pattern, the ratio of the variable display result to be a "big hit" is set differently according to multiple types of ready-to-win effects. It is good if there is.

SP reach A1-A3 is the reach production of super reach whose big hit reliability is lower than SP reach B, and is also called "weak SP reach". The SP reach B is a reach performance of a super reach with a higher hit reliability than the SP reach A1 to A3, and is also called "strong SP reach". For example, the jackpot reliability of SP reach A1 is 20%, the jackpot reliability of SP reach A2 is 25%, the jackpot reliability of SP reach A3 is 30%, and the jackpot reliability of SP reach B is 80%. is. Therefore, when the ready-to-win effect of SP reach A1 is executed, the variable display result becomes "big hit" about once out of five times. On the other hand, when the ready-to-win effect of SP ready-to-win B is executed, the variable display result is "big hit" about four times out of five times. The contents of the ready-to-win effect may include an effect mode in which commonality can be partially recognized in the case of the SP reach-to-reach A1 to A3. For example, the SP reach A1 to A3 may reproduce and display a common moving image as a background image. Alternatively, the SP reach A1 to A3 may be animated with a common character image. The contents of the ready-to-win effect may include an effect mode in which the difference between the SP reach-B and the SP reach-A1 to A3 can be recognized. For example, for SP reach B, a moving image different from SP reach A1 to A3 may be reproduced and displayed as a background image. Alternatively, SP reach B may be animated with a character image different from SP reach A1 to A3. The contents of the ready-to-win effect may include an effect mode in which one of the cases of SP reach A1 to A3 can recognize the difference from other cases. For example, the SP reach A1 to A3 may reproduce and display different moving images as background images. Alternatively, the SP reach A1 to A3 may be animation-displayed with different character images. In addition, the presentation mode in which the difference can be recognized is arbitrary display on the screen of the image display device 5, arbitrary sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and arbitrary display using light-emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs. light emission, any action using the movable member for presentation, or a combination of some or all of these.

The execution of a super reach effect, such as SP reach A1 to A3, includes the execution of a drawing effect by displaying an image drawn in response to an effect drawing command. As the drawing effect, it may be possible to select and execute one of a plurality of types of display effects capable of displaying an image drawn by different drawing processes according to the effect drawing command. As a drawing effect, the image drawn in response to the drawing command for effect is not displayed, but even if it is possible to display the image drawn in response to a drawing command different from the drawing command for effect. good. When the reach effect that becomes super reach is executed, even if it includes the case where the display of the image drawn in response to the drawing command for normal display is executed without executing the specific drawing effect good.

FIG. 9-7(B) shows a setting example of the content of drawing effect corresponding to the drawing effect pattern. In this setting example, drawing effect patterns 02AKA01, 02AKA02, 02AKB01, 02AKB02, 02AKB11, and 02AKB12 are prepared in advance as a plurality of drawing effect patterns. Some or all of the drawing effect contents are different according to these plurality of drawing effect patterns. The contents of the drawing effect include presence/absence and type of drawing effect by effect display, and presence/absence of drawing effect by strobe display. A drawing effect that does not include effect display or strobe display is also called a normal drawing effect. A drawing effect by effect display or strobe display is also called a specific drawing effect.

Effect display is effect display in which color information included in image data is changed and an image is drawn when an effect drawing command is generated and transferred. The types of effect display include a monochrome conversion effect and a color information inversion effect. The monochrome conversion effect draws and displays an effect image that has undergone monochrome conversion using command 01AKG04 among the effect drawing commands. In the color information inversion effect, command 02 among the effect drawing commands is used to draw and display an effect image in which color information is inverted. In this way, the effect display may be any effect image that is rendered by changing the color information included in the image data. For the effect display, for example, the command 01AKG06 among the effect drawing commands may be used to display an effect image drawn by changing the position information corresponding to the image data.

A strobe display is an effect display in which an image drawn using image data and a single-color (for example, black or white) image set differently from the image data are alternately and repeatedly displayed every predetermined number of frames. is. Strobe display may be performed on images drawn on layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, when a drawing command different from the effect drawing command is generated and transferred. On the other hand, strobe display may not be performed for images drawn on layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers. In this way, strobe display may be performed within the range of the image drawn on the specific layer, but may be restricted as a limit such that it is not performed within the range of the image drawn on the special layer. A temporary stop display may be performed together with the strobe display. The pause display is an effect display that gives the impression that the progress of the effect due to the display of the image is paused by continuously displaying the same image over a predetermined number of consecutive frames. It should be noted that, when strobe display is not executed, temporary stop display may be performed.

FIG. 9-8 shows an example of determination of drawing effect patterns. For example, in the effect control process process of step S76, when the variable display start setting process is executed in step S171, a plurality of drawing It suffices if one of the production patterns can be determined. When the variable display pattern corresponding to the ready-to-win effect of super reach is specified, the CPU 91AK131 extracts a random number value for determining the drawing effect pattern, and based on the random value, according to the variable display result and the ready-to-win effect content, A drawing effect pattern may be determined by referring to the drawing effect pattern determination table.

In the determination example shown in Fig. 9-8, when the variable display result is "losing", if the content of reach effect is any of SP reach A1 to A3, it is drawn at a rate of 60% (= 60/100) Effect pattern 02AKA01 is determined, drawing effect pattern 02AKA02 is determined at a rate of 10% (=10/100), drawing effect pattern 02AKB01 is determined at a rate of 10% (=10/100), and 5% (=5 /100), drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is determined, drawing effect pattern 02AKB11 is determined at a rate of 10% (=10/100), and drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 is determined at a rate of 5% = (5/100). be done. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "big hit", if the content of reach effect is any one of SP reach A1 to A3, drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is determined at a rate of 5% (=5/100). , the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02 is determined at a rate of 10% (=10/100), the drawing effect pattern 02AKB01 is determined at a rate of 15% (=15/100), and the drawing effect pattern 02AKB01 is determined at a rate of 20% (=20/100). Drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is determined, drawing effect pattern 02AKB11 is determined at a rate of 20% (=20/100), and drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 is determined at a rate of 30% (=30/100). Due to such a determined ratio, the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 and drawing effect patterns other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 have different ratios in which the variable display result is "big hit" and controlled to the big win game state.

The drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is a pattern in which a specific drawing effect, which is a drawing effect using effect display or strobe display, is not executed. On the other hand, drawing effect patterns 02AKA02, 02AKB01, 02AKB02, 02AKB11, and 02AKB12 are patterns for executing a specific drawing effect by one or both of effect display and strobe display. Then, when the ready-to-win effect content is any one of SP reach A1 to A3, when the variable display result is "big win", the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is higher than when the variable display result is "losing". The ratio of determination to the drawing effect pattern other than . Therefore, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is any of SP reach A1 to A3, when a specific drawing effect, which is a drawing effect by effect display or strobe display, is executed, it is more likely than when the specific drawing effect is not executed. , the variable display result becomes "big win" and the ratio of being controlled to the big win game state increases. Further, the drawing performance patterns other than the drawing performance pattern 02AKA01 are set according to the variable display result so that the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than the drawing performance pattern 02AKA01.

When the content of the ready-to-win effect is SP ready-to-win B, only the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 can be determined, and a restriction is provided so as not to determine anything other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01. When the content of the ready-to-win performance is SP ready-to-win B, super-ready-to-win ready-to-win performance of “strong SP ready-to-win” with higher reliability of big win than SP ready-to-win A1 to A3 is executed. In such a case, if a specific drawing effect by effect display or strobe display is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the reach effect of super reach, which has a high hit reliability, and there is a risk of reducing the interest in the game. be. Therefore, within the range where the content of the ready-to-win effect is SP ready-to-reach B, a limitation is provided as a limit that the specific drawing effect by effect display or strobe display is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's attention from being disturbed with respect to the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win, which has a high degree of reliability for big hits, and to appropriately improve the amusement of the game.

When the content of the ready-to-win effect is any of the SP reach-to-reach A1 to A3, it can be determined to any one of the drawing effect patterns 02AKA01, 02AKA02, 02AKB01, 02AKB02, 02AKB11, and 02AKB12 at different ratios according to the variable display result. . When the content of ready-to-win performance is any one of SP ready-to-win A1 to A3, a super ready-to-win ready-to-win performance of “weak SP ready-to-win” with a lower reliability of big win than in the case of SP ready-to-win B is executed. In such a case, when a specific drawing performance is executed by effect display or strobe display, the variable display result becomes "big win" and the ratio of control to the big win game state increases. In this way, when the content of ready-to-win performance is any one of SP ready-to-win A1 to A3, execution of the specific drawing performance increases the ratio of control to the big win game state, so super ready-to-win with low reliability of big win. Even with the ready-to-win effect, the execution of the specific drawing effect increases the expectation of the player and appropriately enhances the interest in the game.

It should be noted that even when the content of the ready-to-win effect is SP ready-to-win B, it may be possible to determine a drawing effect pattern other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 at a predetermined ratio. However, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is the SP ready-to-win effect B, it is possible to determine a drawing effect pattern other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 at a lower rate than when the content of the ready-to-reach effect is the SP reachable effects A1 to A3. In this way, in the range where the ready-to-win effect content is SP reach-B, the specific drawing effect by effect display or strobe display can be executed at a lower rate than in the range where the ready-to-win effect content is SP reach A1 to A3. may be set as a limit.

FIG. 9-9(A) shows an effect execution period in variable display of super reach. When variable display of super reach is performed, the period from the start of variable display to the end of variable display can be divided into a plurality of effect execution periods such as effect execution periods D0 to D4. The effect execution period D0 is a period from the start of the variable display to the start of execution of the ready-to-win effect after the ready-to-win game is established. The performance execution period D1 is a period from the start of the ready-to-win performance execution period in which the ready-to-win performance as super ready-to-win performance is executed to the start of the chance-up performance execution period in which the chance-up performance can be executed. The performance execution period D2 is a period from the start of the chance-up performance execution period to the start of the result-informing performance execution period in which the result-informing performance can be executed after the chance-up performance execution period ends. The result notification effect may be any effect as long as it notifies the effect result corresponding to the display result of the variable display in the ready-to-win effect for super reach. The effect execution period D3 is a period from the start of the result notification effect execution period to the end thereof. The effect execution period D4 is a period from the end of the result notification effect execution period to the end of the variable display.

FIG. 9-9(B) shows an effect control example 02AKC01 in each effect execution period. Among the plurality of performance execution periods D0 to D4, in the performance execution period D2 from the start of the chance-up performance execution period to the start of the result notification performance execution period, when the drawing performance pattern is other than 02AKA01, the specific drawing performance SPE is performed. become viable. In the case of the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, since the specific drawing effect SPE is not executed, the normal drawing effect NOR can be executed even in the effect execution period D2 without executing the specific drawing effect SPE.

Among the plurality of effect execution periods D0 to D4, in the effect execution period D0 from the start of variable display to the start of the ready-to-win effect of super reach, regardless of whether it is the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 or other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01. , the specific drawing effect SPE is not executed and the normal drawing effect NOR can be executed. For example, in the effect execution period D0, when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, if it is possible to execute the light emitting effect using the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs in response to the output of BGM and sound effects good. In addition, during the effect execution period D0, when the decorative design is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the "left" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L and 5R, or when the "left", "middle" and "right" ', the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R stop displaying the decorative patterns that constitute the pseudo consecutive chances, and the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs are turned on in response to BGM and sound effect output. It may be possible to execute a light emitting effect using. In addition, during the entire effect execution period D0, the normal drawing effect NOR is executed, and the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs emit light in response to the BGM and sound effect output during the execution of the variable display. It may be possible to perform a production.

Among the effect execution periods D1 to D4 in which the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win is executed during the execution of the variable display, in the effect execution period D1 following the effect execution period D0, the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 or other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01. , the specific drawing effect SPE is not executed and the normal drawing effect NOR can be executed. In the effect execution period D2 after the effect execution period D1, the normal drawing effect NOR can be executed in the case of the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, and the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed in the case of the drawing effect pattern other than 02AKA01. be. In the normal drawing effect NOR based on the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, an image drawn by the normal drawing process can be displayed. In the specific drawing effect SPE by the drawing effect pattern other than 02AKA01, for example, in the specific layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, an image drawn by the specific drawing process can be displayed. Note that even when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed by a pattern other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, for example, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, may display an image drawn by the normal drawing process.

In the effect execution period D3 and the effect execution period D4 after the effect execution period D2, the specific drawing effect SPE is not executed and the normal drawing effect NOR regardless of whether it is the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 or other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01. becomes viable. In the effect execution period D3, as in the effect execution period D2, the normal drawing effect NOR can be executed in the case of the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, and the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed in the case of the drawing effect pattern other than 02AKA01. may be When the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed in the effect execution period D3, the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE is performed in the normal drawing in the effect execution period D4 for notifying fixed decoration patterns, etc., which are the result of variable display. It suffices to return to the execution of the effect NOR. Also, the specific drawing effect SPE may be executable in all of the plurality of effect execution periods D1 to D4. Execution of the specific drawing performance SPE can be started based on the determination result that the ready-to-win performance of super-ready-to-win is executed as a determination result at the time of start winning before the variable display for executing the ready-to-win performance of super-to-win. You may do so. Even if the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed in a period other than the effect execution period D2, for example, in 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers, as in the case of executing the specific drawing effect SPE in the effect execution period D2 Images drawn by specific drawing processing can be displayed. For example, layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, may display images drawn by normal drawing processing.

Among a plurality of performance execution periods D0 to D4, when the normal drawing performance NOR is executed even in a period other than the performance execution period D0, a light emission performance using a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 or other decorative LEDs is performed. It is viable. On the other hand, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed in the effect execution period D2 or the like, control is performed so that the light emitting effect is not executed. For example, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs is turned off so that the light emitting effect is not executed. In this way, when the normal drawing effect NOR capable of displaying the image drawn by the normal drawing process is executed, the light emitting effect by the light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 can be executed. On the other hand, when the specific drawing effect SPE capable of displaying the image drawn by the specific drawing process is executed, the lighting effect by the light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 is not executed. Therefore, within the range of the effect execution period during which the normal drawing effect NOR is executed in which the image drawn by the normal drawing process can be displayed, the light emitting effect by the light emission of the light emitting member can be executed, while the image drawn by the specific drawing process is enabled. In the range of the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE capable of displaying is executed, there is a limitation as a limit that the light emission effect by the light emission of the light emitting member is not executed. When the specific drawing effect SPE by effect display or strobe display is executed, by not executing the light emitting effect, the player can easily recognize the image drawn by the specific drawing process. The display can improve amusement in the game.

Note that when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed in the effect execution period D2 or the like, the restriction is not limited to not executing the light emitting effect by light emission of the light emitting member, and for example, the normal drawing effect NOR is executed. A limitation may be provided to the effect mode of the light emitting effect, such as reducing the effect amount of the light emitting effect more than in the case of using the light emitting effect. When the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the effect amount is reduced by reducing the light emission amount (luminance) of the light emitting member in the light emission effect compared to when the normal drawing effect NOR is executed. may be provided. Alternatively, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the amount of effect is limited by reducing the number of light emitting members capable of emitting light in the light emitting effect as compared to when the normal drawing effect NOR is executed. may be provided. Alternatively, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the amount of effect is reduced by reducing the emission color used in the light emission effect (e.g., monochromatic light emission) compared to when the normal drawing process NOR is executed. A limit may be set as follows.

FIGS. 9-10 to 9-13 show execution examples of reach effects and drawing effects. FIGS. 9-10 show an effect execution example when the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is determined among the cases where the ready-to-win effect of super reach is executed. FIG. 9-11 shows an effect execution example in the effect execution period D2 when the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02 is determined. FIG. 9-12 shows an effect execution example in the effect execution period D2 when the drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is determined. FIG. 9-13 shows an effect execution example in the effect execution period D2 when the drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 is determined.

FIG. 9-10(A) shows an effect execution example 02AKM01 in the case where the variable display mode of decorative symbols is the ready-to-win mode and the ready-to-win game is established. At this time, in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, the common decorative patterns corresponding to the number "7" are stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) to establish a ready-to-win state. , reach production of normal reach is executed. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM01, it is possible to appropriately execute the normal drawing effect NOR accompanied by the light emission effect corresponding to the effect execution period D0. For example, it is sufficient if it is possible to execute a light emitting effect using light emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs in response to BGM and sound effect output from the establishment of reach to the development of super reach.

FIG. 9-10(B) shows an effect execution example 02AKM02 in the case where the ready-to-win effect of the normal reach is changed to the ready-to-win effect of the super ready-to-win in response to the start of the effect execution period D1. FIGS. 9-10(C) and 9-10(D) show production execution examples 02AKM03 and 02AKM04 when the ready-to-win production of super ready-to-win progresses in the production execution period D1. In the case of the effect execution examples 02AKM02 to 02AKM04, in response to the effect execution period D1, regardless of the determination result of the drawing effect pattern, the normal drawing effect NOR accompanied by the light emitting effect can be executed, and the specific drawing effect can be executed. Do not run SPE.

FIG. 9-10(E) shows an effect execution example 02AKM05 in the case where the during-reach chance-up effect is executed in the effect execution period D2. FIG. 9-10(F) shows an effect execution example 02AKM06 when the ready-to-win effect is executed after the chance-up effect in the effect execution period D2. In the case of the effect execution examples 02AKM05 and 02AKM06, the normal drawing effect NOR accompanied by the light emission effect by the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is executed corresponding to the effect execution period D2. At this time, since it is the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, the specific drawing effect SPE by effect display or strobe display is not executed.

FIG. 9-10(G) shows an effect execution example 02AKM07 when the result notification effect is executed in the effect execution period D3. At this time, as the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win, a ready-to-win effect with different effect contents depending on the result of the variable display is executed. Then, the fixed decoration pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed by shaking display or the like. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM07, corresponding to the effect execution period D3, regardless of the determination result of the drawing effect pattern, the normal drawing effect NOR accompanied by the light emitting effect can be executed, and the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed. don't run

FIG. 9-10(H) shows an effect execution example 02AKM08 in the case where the fixed notification of the variable display result is executed in the effect execution period D4. At this time, as the ready-to-win performance of super-ready to finish is completed, the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed by a complete stop display. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM08, corresponding to the effect execution period D4, regardless of the determination result of the drawing effect pattern, the normal drawing effect NOR accompanied by the light emitting effect can be executed, and the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed. don't run

FIG. 9-11(A) shows an effect execution example 02AKM11 when the in-reach chance-up effect is executed corresponding to the start of the effect execution period D2. The effect display at this time may be the same as the effect display in the effect execution example 02AKM05. However, the temporary stop display may be started in response to drawing effect pattern 02AKA02. For example, images drawn in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, may be copied to a copy area provided in the VRAM 91AK147 and stored reusably. Further, in response to execution of the specific drawing effect SPE by strobe display, control is performed so as not to execute the light emission effect.

FIG. 9-11(B) shows an effect execution example 02AKM12 in the case of executing strobe display following the effect execution example 02AKM11. In the case of effect execution example 02AKM12, a black image as a whole is drawn and displayed as a single-color image in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. At this time, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, only need to be able to display an image drawn by the normal drawing process.

FIG. 9-11(C) shows an effect execution example 02AKM13 in the case of executing the effect display of temporary stop display during strobe display following the effect execution example 02AKM12. In the case of effect execution example 02AKM13, by repeating the pause display started in effect execution example 02AKM11, it is sufficient that the pause display can be executed during strobe display. For example, in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, an image read out from the copy area of the VRAM 91AK147 may be drawn to repeatedly display an image pause similar to the effect execution example 02AKM11.

FIG. 9-11(D) shows an effect execution example 02AKM14 in which an image similar to the effect execution example 02AKM12 is repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02AKM13. FIG. 9-11(E) shows an effect execution example 02AKM15 in which images similar to those of the effect execution examples 02AKM11 and 02AKM13 are repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02AKM14. FIG. 9-11(F) shows an effect execution example 02AKM16 in which images similar to those of the effect execution examples 02AKM12 and 02AKM14 are repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02AKM15. FIG. 9-11(G) shows an effect execution example 02AKM17 in which images similar to those of the effect execution examples 02AKM11, 02AKM13, and 02AKM15 are repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02AKM16. FIG. 9-11(H) shows an effect execution example 02AKM18 in which images similar to those of the effect execution examples 02AKM12, 02AKM14, and 02AKM16 are repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02AKM17. In this way, by alternately and repeatedly switching between an image drawn using the image data and a single-color image with settings different from the image data, temporary stop display can be performed along with strobe display. . After the stroboscope display of effect execution example 02 AKM18 is completed, the normal drawing effect NOR is returned to and the light emission effect is executed.

Such strobe display can be executed without using dedicated image data by using an image with settings different from the image data according to a drawing command transferred from the CPU 91AK131 to the VDP 91AK132. As a result, even if the image for effect is drawn using common image data, the specific drawing effect SPE by strobe display can be executed in accordance with the drawing command, so that the normal drawing effect NOR does not affect the player. Since different impressions can be given, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data amount of image data and to execute various display effects to improve amusement in the game.

In FIG. 9-12(A), corresponding to the start of the effect execution period D2, when the chance-up effect during reach is executed, the specific drawing effect SPE by the monochrome conversion effect according to the drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is executed. This shows an effect execution example 02AKM21. The effect display at this time is different from the effect display in the effect execution example 02AKM05 in that the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers, display an image drawn by a specific drawing process such as monochrome conversion arithmetic processing. are doing.

FIG. 9-12(B) shows an effect execution example 02AKM22 in the case of executing strobe display subsequent to the effect execution example 02AKM21. In the case of effect execution example 02AKM22, as in effect execution example 02AKM12, layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, draw and display an image that is entirely black as a single-color image. At this time, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, only need to be able to display an image drawn by the normal drawing process.

FIG. 9-12(C) shows an effect execution example 02AKM23 in which, following the effect execution example 02AKM22, a specific drawing effect SPE is executed by a monochrome conversion effect according to the drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 during execution of the chance-up effect during reach. is shown. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM23, it is sufficient if the in-reach chance-up effect started in the effect execution example 02AKM21 can be continuously executed. It should be noted that a temporary stop display may be executed as a chance-up effect during strobe display. Alternatively, in the specific rendering effect SPE by the monochrome conversion effect, even when the strobe display is executed, as in the effect execution example 02AKM05, by displaying the image drawn using the image data read according to the elapsed time, The temporary stop display of the chance-up effect may not be executed.

FIG. 9-12(D) shows an effect execution example 02AKM24 in which an image similar to the effect execution example 02AKM22 is repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02AKM23. FIG. 9-12(E) shows an effect execution example 02AKM25 when the ready-to-win effect after the chance-up effect in the effect execution period D2 is executed following the effect execution example 02AKM24. The effect display at this time is different from the effect display in the effect execution example 02AKM06 in that the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers, display an image drawn by a specific drawing process such as monochrome conversion arithmetic processing. are doing.

FIG. 9-12(F) shows an effect execution example 02AKM26 in which images similar to those of the effect execution examples 02AKM22 and 02AKM24 are repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02AKM25. FIG. 9-12(G) shows an effect execution example 02AKM27 when the ready-to-win effect after the effect execution example 02AKM25 in the effect execution period D2 is executed following the effect execution example 02AKM26. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM27, it is sufficient if the ready-to-win effect executed in the effect execution example 02AKM25 can be continued. As a ready-to-reach effect during strobe display, pause display may be executed, or pause display may not be executed as a specific drawing effect SPE by a color information conversion effect. FIG. 9-12(H) shows an effect execution example 02AKM28 in which images similar to those of the effect execution examples 02AKM22, 02AKM24, and 02AKM26 are repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02AKM27. In this way, alternately and repeatedly switching between an image obtained by monochrome conversion, which is drawn by reducing the number of colors in the color information by monochrome conversion calculation processing using image data, and a single-color image with settings different from the image data. By displaying with , it is possible to execute the specific drawing effect SPE by the monochrome conversion effect together with the stroboscopic display.

Effect display, which is a monochrome conversion effect, uses an image drawn with a smaller number of colors than the color information included in the image data according to the drawing command for effect transferred from the CPU 91AK 131 to the VDP 91AK 132. It can be executed regardless of the data. As a result, even if the image for effect is drawn using common image data, the specific drawing effect SPE by the monochrome conversion effect can be executed in accordance with the effect drawing command. Since the impression given to the player can be varied, it is possible to prevent the data amount of the image data from increasing and execute various display performances to improve the interest in the game. In addition, by combining the effect display, which is a monochrome conversion effect, and the strobe display, the player can easily recognize the color change of the display image, and the display effect can be achieved while preventing the data amount of the image data from increasing. It is possible to enhance the impression of the game and improve the amusement of the game.

In FIG. 9-13(A), when the chance-up effect during reach is executed corresponding to the start of the effect execution period D2, the specific drawing effect SPE is executed by the color information inversion effect according to the drawing effect pattern 02AKB12. It shows an effect execution example 02AKM31. Compared with the effect display in the effect execution example 02AKM05, the effect display at this time is an image drawn by converting the value of color information by a difference calculation process, which is a specific drawing process, in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. is displayed.

FIG. 9-13(B) shows an effect execution example 02AKM32 in the case of executing strobe display following the effect execution example 02AKM31. In the case of effect execution example 02AKM32, as in effect execution examples 02AKM12, 02AKM22, etc., layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 serving as specific layers draw and display an image that is entirely black as a single-color image. At this time, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, only need to be able to display an image drawn by the normal drawing process.

FIG. 9-13(C) is an effect execution example in which, following effect execution example 02AKM32, a specific drawing effect SPE is executed by a color information inversion effect according to drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 during execution of a chance-up effect during reach. 02AKM33 is shown. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM33, it is sufficient if the in-reach chance-up effect started in the effect execution example 02AKM31 can be continuously executed. It should be noted that a temporary stop display may be executed as a chance-up effect during strobe display. Alternatively, in the specific drawing effect SPE by the color information reversal effect, even when strobe display is executed, an image drawn using the image data read according to the elapsed time is displayed as in the effect execution example 02AKM05. , the pause display of the chance-up effect may not be executed.

FIG. 9-13(D) shows an effect execution example 02AKM34 in which an image similar to the effect execution example 02AKM32 is repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02AKM33. FIG. 9-13(E) shows an effect execution example 02AKM35 when the ready-to-win effect after the chance-up effect in the effect execution period D2 is executed following the effect execution example 02AKM34. Compared with the effect display in the effect execution example 02AKM06, the effect display at this time is an image drawn by converting the value of color information by a difference calculation process, which is a specific drawing process, in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. is displayed.

FIG. 9-13(F) shows an effect execution example 02AKM36 in which images similar to those of the effect execution examples 02AKM32 and 02AKM034 are repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02AKM35. FIG. 9-13(G) shows an effect execution example 02AKM37 when the ready-to-win effect after the effect execution example 02AKM35 in the effect execution period D2 is executed following the effect execution example 02AKM36. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM37, it is sufficient if the ready-to-win effect executed in the effect execution example 02AKM35 can be continued. It should be noted that pause display may be executed as a reach effect during strobe display, or pause display may not be executed as a specific drawing effect SPE by color information conversion effect. FIG. 9-13(H) shows an effect execution example 02AKM38 in which images similar to those of the effect execution examples 02AKM32, 02AKM34, and 02AKM36 are repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02AKM37. In this way, the image is alternately and repeatedly switched between an image obtained by inverting color information drawn by converting the value of color information by difference calculation processing using image data, and a single-color image with settings different from the image data. By displaying it, it is possible to perform a specific drawing effect SPE by a color information reversal effect together with strobe display.

The effect display, which is the color information inversion effect, uses an image drawn by converting the value of the color information included in the image data in accordance with the drawing command for effect transferred from the CPU 91AK 131 to the VDP 91AK 132, and uses dedicated image data. It can be executed regardless of As a result, even for an effect image drawn using common image data, the specific drawing effect SPE by the color information reversal effect can be executed according to the effect drawing command, so that the normal drawing effect NOR and the normal drawing effect NOR. can give different impressions to the player, so that it is possible to prevent the data amount of the image data from increasing and execute various display performances to improve the interest in the game. In addition, by combining effect display, which is a color information reversal effect, and strobe display, the player can easily recognize the change in color of the displayed image, and the image data can be displayed while preventing an increase in the amount of image data. It is possible to enhance the impression of the presentation and improve the amusement of the game.

By executing the specific drawing effect SPE by effect display or strobe display, it is possible to give the player a sense of incongruity of the display effect that is not present in the normal drawing effect NOR. When the content of ready-to-win production is any of SP ready-to-reach A1 to A3, a super-ready-to-win ready-to-win production of “weak SP ready-to-win” with a lower reliability level than the case of SP reach B is executed. It is possible to execute a specific drawing effect SPE that gives a sense of incongruity in the display effect not found in the normal drawing effect NOR. Then, when the specific drawing performance SPE is executed, the ratio of control to the jackpot game state increases, so that the player's expectation can be enhanced and the interest in the game can be improved appropriately.

The invention relating to the characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features related to the feature parts 01AK and 02AK. It may be one provided with a part.

The strobe display has been described as being performed by alternately and repeatedly switching between an image drawn using image data and a single-color image with settings different from the image data. In such strobe display, there may be a case where a single-color image is partially or entirely replaced with a specific image prepared in advance. For example, when inserting and displaying a performance image that is a character image as a specific image, the display result of the variable display becomes "big win" and is controlled to a big win game state, as compared with the case where a single color image is repeatedly displayed. The drawing effect content of the drawing effect pattern and the determination ratio may be set so that the ratio is high.

It has been explained that when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the light emitting effect using the light emitting member is not executed. The light emitting effect using such a light emitting member may include a light emitting display effect by causing the display portion of the light guide plate to emit light. For example, a light guide plate as a transparent light guide member having light transmittance is provided on the front side (front side) of part or all of the display screen of the image display device 5 . Also, a light emitting member such as a light guide plate LED is provided near the light guide plate, and light from the light emitting member is introduced through the end face of the light guide plate and reflected by a reflection portion formed in advance inside the light guide plate. Then, a light-emitting display effect for displaying a predetermined pattern or the like may be executed. Then, in the effect execution period in which the normal drawing effect NOR is executed corresponding to the drawing effect pattern etc., it is sufficient if the light emitting display effect can be executed based on the determination result of the light emitting display effect pattern. On the other hand, in the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed in accordance with the drawing effect pattern or the like, control may be performed so that the light emission display effect is not executed.

Further, the light emitting effect using such a light emitting member may include a button light emitting effect by causing a button light emitting portion mounted inside the push button 31B to emit light. In this case, in the effect execution period in which the normal drawing effect NOR is executed corresponding to the drawing effect pattern etc., it is sufficient if the button light emitting effect can be executed based on the determined result of the button light emitting effect pattern. On the other hand, in the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed in accordance with the drawing effect pattern or the like, control may be performed so that the button light emitting effect is not executed.

When a plurality of display layers are provided, the setting of whether each display layer is a special layer or a specific layer can be arbitrarily changed based on the specifications of the pachinko game machine 1 or the like. For example, a layer 01AKL2 that draws an effect image corresponding to a suspended display or an active display so as to be displayable may be included in the specific layer instead of the special layer. In the setting that the layer 01AKL2 is included in the specific layer, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the effect images corresponding to the suspended display and the active display are drawn and displayed by the specific drawing process, and the color information, etc. may be changed. Then, when the specific drawing effect SPE by the monochrome conversion effect is executed, it is sufficient if the effect image corresponding to the suspended display or the active display can be changed to a monochrome image with a small number of colors and displayed. While enabling the monochrome display of such a suspended display and active display, when it is possible to execute a change effect that changes the display color of a specific display related to variable display, such as a suspended display and an active display, a specific drawing effect SPE , the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE may be terminated when the display color of the specific display is changed, and the execution of the normal drawing effect NOR may be started or resumed. The display color of the specific display should be different according to the degree of expectation of being controlled to the big win game state. When the change effect includes a success pattern of changing the display color of the specific display and a failure pattern of not changing the display color of the specific display, the change effect of the success pattern is executed during execution of the specific drawing effect SPE, Execution of the specific drawing effect SPE may be ended when the display color of the specific display changes to the specific color, and execution of the normal drawing effect NOR may be started or resumed. At the timing when the pending display is displayed, the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE is started, and after the variable display and active display corresponding to the pending display are performed, the success pattern changing effect is executed, and the display color of the active display is changed. Execution of the specific drawing effect SPE may be ended when the color changes to the specific color, and execution of the normal drawing effect NOR may be started or resumed.

As a display layer included in the special layer, a direction display layer may be included that draws a displayable effect image or the like indicating the shooting direction of the game ball. For example, in the direction display layer, as an operation promotion effect for left-handed or right-handed effects, a performance image that prompts the player to shoot the game ball toward the left game area or the right game area when the shooting promotion effect is executed is displayed. It is sufficient if it can be drawn and displayed. In the pachinko game machine 1, a game can be played by shooting game balls as game media, and a first route and a second route are provided as movement routes along which the game balls can flow. The first path may be a right-handed path that is the right side of the game area, and the second path may be a left-handed area of the game area. In the first state in which it is advantageous to let the game ball flow down the first path, the first promotion image for prompting the shooting of the game medium toward the first path can be drawn and displayed on the direction display layer. If it is Further, when the second state is advantageous for the game ball to flow down the second path, the second promotion image prompting the shooting of the game medium toward the second path based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, It may be possible to draw and display on the direction display layer. In this way, since the direction display layer is included in the special layer, an image drawn by the specific drawing process can be displayed in the specific layer during the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed. The display layer only needs to be able to display an image drawn by normal drawing processing. Therefore, the effect image prompting the player to shoot the game ball toward the left game area or the right game area may be drawn and displayed on the special layer by the normal drawing process as a predetermined image related to the game. The image that prompts the shooting of the game medium can be drawn and displayed by normal rendering processing instead of the specific rendering processing, so that the visibility of the image that prompts the shooting of the game media is appropriately ensured, and various display effects are executed. As a result, the game interest can be improved.

As the operation-promoting effect, it may be possible to draw and display a effect image that indicates that the effect output amount can be changed, such as a part or all of the volume, screen brightness, and light emission amount. As a display layer included in the special layer, an operation display layer may be included that draws an effect image or the like in such an operation promotion effect so that it can be displayed.

As a display layer included in the special layer, a warning display layer for drawing a warning image or the like for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality in the pachinko gaming machine 1 so as to be displayable may be included. For example, in the warning display layer, various sensors connected to the main board 11 in the pachinko game machine 1, such as a magnetic sensor, a radio wave sensor, a vibration sensor, a door open sensor, a grand prize entrance door sensor, a full tank sensor, and a ball out sensor. When it is determined that various errors have occurred based on the state, the state of the payout board, the detection state of the game ball by the start switch, the count switch, etc., a warning image corresponding to the error that occurred is drawn and displayed. If possible. The warning display layer may be set to the display layer with the highest display priority among the plurality of display layers. In this way, by including the warning display layer in the special layer, it is possible to display the image drawn by the specific drawing process in the specific layer in the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, whereas the warning The display layer only needs to be able to display an image drawn by normal drawing processing. Therefore, the warning image for reporting the occurrence of an abnormality may be a predetermined image related to the game, as long as it can be drawn and displayed on the special layer by the normal drawing process. The warning image that notifies the occurrence of an abnormality can be drawn and displayed using normal drawing processing instead of a specific drawing process. You can run it to improve your gaming interest. When notifying the occurrence of an abnormality, even during the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE in which no light emitting effect is executed, the light emitting member may be caused to emit light to notify the abnormality light emission. In this way, notification regarding the occurrence of an abnormality may be executed with a higher priority than other effects.

As a display layer included in the special layer, a suggestion display layer that draws an effect image in the setting suggestion effect so as to be displayable may be included. For example, the suggestion display layer may draw and display setting suggestion images determined at different ratios according to the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . In the pachinko game machine 1, any one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player can be set. It suffices if it is possible to execute setting suggestion effects with different determination ratios. For example, it may be possible to select one of a plurality of setting suggesting images at different ratios depending on the setting value, draw the selected setting suggesting image on the suggestive display layer, and display the selected setting suggesting image. In this way, by including the suggestive display layer in the special layer, it is possible to display an image drawn by the specific drawing process in the specific layer during the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed. The display layer only needs to be able to display an image drawn by normal drawing processing. An image suggesting a set value in the pachinko game machine 1 can be drawn and displayed on a special layer by normal drawing processing instead of specific drawing processing, so that images suggesting set values with different degrees of advantage for the player can be displayed. It is possible to enhance amusement in a game by executing various display effects while appropriately ensuring visibility. Alternatively, the suggestive display layer may be included in the specific layer instead of the special layer. In this way, by including the suggestive display layer in the specific layer, it is possible to display an image drawn by the normal drawing process in the special layer during the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, whereas the suggestive display layer can be displayed in the special layer. The display layer may display an image drawn by a specific drawing process. An image suggesting a set value in the pachinko game machine 1 can be drawn and displayed in a specific layer by a specific drawing process, thereby diversifying the display of the image suggesting the set value with different advantages for the player. , can improve the game interest.

At least part of the features of the pachinko game machine 1 can be applied not only to the pachinko game machine 1 but also to slot machines and the like. As an example of application to this slot machine, it is possible to control an assist time (also called AT), which is a notification period during which navigation notification for notifying a stop order that is advantageous to a player according to an internal lottery result can be executed. As the navigation notification, an effect image may be displayed on the screen of the image display device to notify the stopping order in an identifiable manner. In this case, a display layer included in the special layer may include a notification display layer that renders a displayable effect image used for navigation notification. For example, in the notification display layer, when notifying the order to stop the variable display by the left, middle and right reels, if it is possible to draw and display a stop order image indicating the order of the stop operation by the stop switch on the notification display layer good. In this way, by including the notification display layer in the special layer, it is possible to display the image drawn by the specific drawing process in the specific layer during the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed. The display layer only needs to be able to display an image drawn by normal drawing processing. Visibility of the image notifying the operation mode by drawing and displaying the image notifying the operation mode when stopping the variable display in the slot machine in the special layer by the normal drawing process instead of the specific drawing process. can be appropriately ensured, various display performances can be executed, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 01AK)
The present embodiment includes the following inventions. That is, in a game machine such as a pachinko game machine capable of executing a game, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-171129, in a game machine such as a pachinko game machine, an effect image is displayed according to the instruction of the display list. , and technology for game machines that draws a processed image in which multiple deformed images generated using a reversed image are arranged, such as those described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-29947. was also proposed. In the game machine described in the above-mentioned patent publication, there is a possibility that the visibility of important images may deteriorate due to the change of the entire image. Therefore, with the aim of providing a game machine that enhances the enjoyment of the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image,
The game machine related to the characteristic part 01AK is a game machine capable of executing a game, such as the pachinko game machine 1. An image processing means such as VDP91AK132 capable of executing drawing processing, for example, the image processing means performs normal drawing processing such as drawing processing in response to drawing commands for normal display, for example, drawing corresponding to image data, Specific drawing processing such as drawing processing corresponding to drawing commands for effects, for example, drawing by changing color information included in at least image data, can be executed. An image in each layer can be displayed, and the plurality of layers includes specific layers such as layers AKL03 to AKL05, and special layers having a higher priority than the specific layers, such as layers AKL01 and AKL02. In steps 01AKS01 to 01AKS03, the specific layer is drawn by a specific drawing process to display an image for effect. A predetermined image can be displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the amount of data, to appropriately ensure the visibility of the image, and to make it possible to execute various display effects, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

The specific rendering process may be performed using a smaller number of colors than the color information contained in the image data (for example, monochrome conversion), such as monochrome conversion. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data volume and to make it possible to execute various display effects, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The specific drawing process may convert the value of the color information included in the image data and draw (for example, color information reversal), such as color information reversal. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data volume and to make it possible to execute various display effects, thereby improving the interest in the game.

For example, as in production control example 02AKC01, for example, a first period (for example, production execution period D1) in which specific drawing processing such as production execution period D1 is not executed, and a second period in which specific drawing processing such as production execution period D2 is executed. In the first period, the light emitting means can emit light, and in the second period, the light emitting means may not emit light. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

Alternatively, for example, a first period during which specific drawing processing is not executed, such as effect execution period D1 (for example, effect execution period D1), and a second period during which specific drawing processing is executed, such as effect execution period D2 (for example, effect execution period D2) etc.), the light emitting means can emit light in the normal mode during the first period, and the light emission of the light emitting means may be restricted more than in the normal mode during the second period. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

For example, set value change processing S6A, which can be set to any one of a plurality of set values (e.g., values from 1 to 6), such as values from 1 to 6, which have different advantages for the player. A setting means such as the CPU 103 that executes (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the set value change processing S6A) is provided, and a suggestion regarding the setting of the setting means is performed by displaying a specific mode. Suggestive effects (eg, effects according to the effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12) can be executed, and an image drawn by a specific drawing process may not be displayed as an image to be displayed by the set suggestive effects. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

For example, set value change processing S6A, which can be set to any one of a plurality of set values (e.g., values from 1 to 6), such as values from 1 to 6, which have different advantages for the player. A setting means such as the CPU 103 that executes (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the set value change processing S6A) is provided, and a suggestion regarding the setting of the setting means is performed by displaying a specific mode. An effect (for example, an effect according to the effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12) can be executed, and an image drawn by a specific drawing process may be displayed as an image displayed by the setting suggestion effect. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game by making it possible to execute various display effects while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

For example, it may be possible to execute a specific drawing effect (for example, a specific drawing effect by drawing effect pattern 02AKA02) such as a specific drawing effect by drawing effect pattern 02AKA02, in which an image is paused and displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data volume and to make it possible to execute various display effects, thereby improving the interest in the game.

For example, as in production execution examples 02AKM21 to 02AKM28, the specific layer may alternately display an image drawn using image data and a monochrome image (for example, see production execution examples 02AKM21 to 02AKM28). As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data volume and to make it possible to execute various display effects, thereby improving the interest in the game.

For example, variable display of decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R (for example, “left”, “middle”, “right” decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, Variable display of the identification information image, such as variable display of decorative patterns in 5R), and reduction in a form smaller than the identification information image, such as variable display of small patterns in the small pattern display area 01AKC1 Variable display of the identification information image (for example, variable display of small patterns in the small pattern display area 01AKC1, etc.) can be executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 9-5, the identification information image is drawn and displayed by a specific drawing process. It is possible, and the reduced identification information image may be drawn and displayed by normal drawing processing. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game by making it possible to execute various display effects while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

(Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 02AK)
The game machine related to the characteristic part 02AK is a game machine capable of executing a game, such as the pachinko game machine 1. Equipped with an image processing means such as VDP91AK132 capable of executing drawing processing, and specific effects such as super ready-to-win effects suggesting control to an advantageous state for the player, such as a jackpot game state. can be executed during variable display, and the effect pattern of the specific effect differs in the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state, for example, a first pattern such as drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 and a second pattern such as drawing effect pattern 02AKA02. At least in the first period, such as the effect execution period D1, among the effect periods in which the specific effect is executed, regardless of whether it is the first pattern or the second pattern, for example, during the normal drawing effect It is possible to display an image drawn by normal drawing processing such as drawing processing in response to the drawing command of , and among the effect periods in which the specific effect is executed, the second period, such as the effect execution period D2, after the first period, for example In the second period, an image drawn by normal drawing processing can be displayed in the case of the first pattern, and in the case of the second pattern, specific drawing processing such as drawing processing according to a drawing command during a specific drawing effect is performed. It is possible to display an image drawn by As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data volume and to appropriately raise the expectation of the player while making it possible to execute various display effects, thereby improving the game interest.

The specific drawing process may be drawn with a smaller number of colors than the color information contained in the image data, such as monochrome conversion. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data volume and to make it possible to execute various display effects, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The specific rendering process may be rendered by converting the value of color information included in the image data, such as color information reversal. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data volume and to make it possible to execute various display effects, thereby improving the interest in the game.

For example, as in effect control example 02AKC01, it is possible to execute a light emitting effect by means of the light emitting means in response to the display of the image drawn by the normal drawing process in the specific effect, and to display the image drawn by the specific drawing process in the specific effect. Correspondingly, the light emission effect may not be executed. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

Alternatively, in response to the display of the image drawn by the normal drawing process in the specific effect, the lighting effect by the light emitting means can be executed in a normal mode, and in response to the display of the image drawn by the specific drawing process in the specific effect, You may restrict|limit light emission production|presentation rather than a normal aspect. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

A setting means such as a CPU 103 for executing a set value change process S6A, for example, which can be set to one of a plurality of set values such as values from 1 to 6, which has different advantages for the player, Suggestion regarding the setting of the setting means is performed by displaying in a specific mode, for example, a setting suggestion effect such as an effect according to the effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12 can be executed, and an image displayed by the setting suggestion effect is drawn by a specific drawing process. It is also possible not to display the image that is displayed. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

Setting means, such as the CPU 103 for executing the setting value change processing S6A, which can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values, such as values from 1 to 6, which have different advantages for the player, are provided. Suggestion regarding means setting is performed by display in a specific mode, for example, setting suggestion effect such as effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12 can be executed, and an image displayed by setting suggestion effect is drawn by specific drawing processing. It may be possible to display an image. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game by making it possible to execute various display effects while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

In the second period, it may be possible to execute an effect of pausing and displaying an image in the case of the second pattern, such as a specific drawing effect by the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data volume and to make it possible to execute various display effects, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In the second period, it may be possible to alternately display an image drawn using the image data and a monochromatic image in the case of the second pattern, such as production execution examples 02AKM21 to 02AKM28. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data volume and to make it possible to execute various display effects, thereby improving the interest in the game.

For example, variable display of the identification information image, such as variable display of decorative patterns in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and small patterns in the small pattern display area 01AKC1, for example. It is possible to perform variable display of a reduced identification information image in a form that is smaller than the identification information image, such as variable display of the identification information image. For example, as shown in FIG. It can be drawn and displayed, and the reduced identification information image can be drawn and displayed by normal drawing processing. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game by making it possible to execute various display effects while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

The configuration regarding the characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK may be appropriately combined with a part or all of the configuration regarding the characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK and the configuration regarding the characteristic portion 60AK. For example, an operation effect to be executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed can be executed as a setting suggestion effect, which is an operation effect of the suggestion effect mode, and during the display period of the character image added to one moving image, the first component and the second component, or add a character image using data related to a common character image to the first moving image and the second moving image different from the first moving image In the specific layer, the specific drawing process is used to draw the effect image, and the special layer, which has a higher priority than the specific layer, is drawn by the normal drawing process, It may be possible to display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game, and in the second period after the first period, it is possible to display an image drawn by the normal drawing process in the case of the first pattern, It may be possible to display an image drawn by the specific drawing process in the case of the second pattern in which the rate of control to be in an advantageous state is different from that of the first pattern.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 75SG)
Next, the pachinko game machine 75SG001 of the characterizing portion 75SG in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-1 to 10-26. FIG. 10-1 is a front view showing a pachinko gaming machine as the characteristic portion 75SG. FIG. 10-2 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like installed in the pachinko game machine as the characteristic portion 75SG. FIG. 10-3 is a front view showing a game board of a pachinko game machine as the characteristic portion 75SG. FIG. 10-4 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 10-3. In the following description, the direction in which the player is positioned is the front of the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001, and the opposite direction is the rear. Also, the description will be made with reference to the up, down, left, and right directions as seen from the player positioned in front of the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001. In addition, the same reference numerals are given to the same parts as in the above-described embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4, the pachinko game machine 75SG001 includes a game board 2 (also referred to as a gauge board 2) forming a game board surface, and a game machine frame 3 (which supports and fixes the game board 2). (also referred to as an underframe 3). A game area Y is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot and struck in the game area Y from a predetermined ball shooting device. In addition, a glass door frame 50 having a glass window 50a is provided in the game machine frame 3 so as to be rotatable around the left side, and the game area Y can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 50. When the glass door frame 50 is closed, the game area Y can be seen through the glass window 50a.

The game board 2 is made of transparent (transparent) synthetic resin material such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, methacrylic resin, etc., and is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. , a guide rail 211, an outer rail decoration 212, and the like, and a spacer member 201 integrally attached to the back side of the board plate 200. As shown in FIG. The game board 2 is made of a non-translucent member such as a plywood board and has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. may be configured

An opening 2c is formed in the board surface plate 200 and the spacer member 201 of the game board 2, and the display area of the image display device 5 provided at a position away from the game board 2 on the back side is viewed through the opening 2c to the player side. It can be visually recognized from (the front side). In addition, an area overlapping the board 200 in the display area of the image display device 5 is visible through the board 200 .

A center decorative frame 51 is attached to the opening 2c of the board 200, and the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51, the guide rails 211 and the outer rail decorations 212 is the game ball flowing-down area in the game area Y. It is A light guide plate device 500, which will be described later, is provided at a position corresponding to the opening 2c surrounded by the center decorative frame 51. As shown in FIG.

A first effect unit 300 is provided at a lower position on the back side of the board 200 , that is, at a position below the image display device 5 . A second effect unit 400 is provided on the right side of the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51 , that is, at a position corresponding to the right side of the display area of the image display device 5 . A third effect unit 600 is provided at a position corresponding to the upper portion of the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51 , that is, the upper portion of the display area of the image display device 5 . A fourth effect unit 800 is provided at the upper left position on the back side of the board 200 , that is, at the upper left position of the image display device 5 . In addition, a variable winning ball unit 700 in which a game ball flowing down the game area Y can win a prize is provided at the right lower position of the board plate 200 .

Since the first effect unit 300 and the fourth effect unit 800 are provided on the back side of the board 200, they are visible from the player side (the front side of the pachinko game machine 75SG001) through the board 200. ing. On the other hand, at least the front surfaces of the second effect unit 400 and the third effect unit 600 are positioned in front of the game board surface, which is the front surface of the board surface plate 200, and are arranged in the opening 2c, thereby providing a light guide plate device. The light guide plate 501 of 500 is visible from the player side.

(Light guide plate device 500)
Next, the light guide plate device 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-5 and 10-6. FIG. 10-5 is a front view showing the light guide plate device. 10-6, (A) is an enlarged front view showing the essential parts of the light guide plate device, (B) is a cross-sectional view along line BB of (A), and (C) is an enlarged view showing the essential parts of (B). is. Here, in order to facilitate understanding, the light-emitting regions 506 are indicated by dots (halftone dots), and the non-light-emitting regions 507 without dots (halftone dots) are indicated by white.

As shown in FIGS. 10-5 and 10-6, the light guide plate device 500 includes a light guide plate 501 provided so as to close the region surrounded by the center decorative frame 51 except for the right and lower regions; An LED substrate 503 on which a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 502 for making light incident on the right end surface 501 a of the light guide plate 501 is mounted, and a concentrator for concentrating the light from the light guide plate LEDs 502 toward the right end surface 501 a of the light guide plate 501 . and an optical lens 504 . The light guide plate device 500 is supported by a base member (not shown) fixed to the back surface of the game board 2 and the center decorative frame 51 .

The light guide plate 501 is a plate member made of a material such as a transparent synthetic resin such as acrylic or polycarbonate having a predetermined front-to-rear width dimension (plate thickness=approximately 5 mm). It is arranged in front of the third effect unit 600 and close to the glass window 50a.

Further, the light guide plate 501 has a light emitting region 506 as a first region forming a predetermined light guide pattern for reflecting forward and emitting light from the light guide plate LED 502 entering from the right end surface 501a and emitting from the front surface. , a light emitting area (see halftone dot areas in FIGS. 10-5 and 10-6(A)) that emits light by light entering the inside from the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501, and A non-light-emitting region 507 as a second region that does not form a predetermined light-guiding pattern that reflects the light from the light guide plate LED 502 forward and emits it from the front surface, that is, does not emit light by the light that is incident inside the light guide plate 501 . and a non-light-emitting region (see white regions in FIGS. 10-5 and 10-6(A)).

The light emitting region 506 is formed so that a figure with a radial peripheral edge appears at a substantially central position of the light guide plate 501. When light enters the light guide plate 501, the light emitting region 506 reflects the light forward. By emitting the light, a predetermined image is displayed by light emission on the light guide plate 501 .

As shown in FIGS. 10-6B and 10-6C, the light-emitting region 506 has a fine uneven state so as to guide the incident light from the light guide plate LED 502 that enters from the right end surface 501a and emit it from the front surface. (rough surface) is formed on the back side. Specifically, the light emitting region 506 is formed in an uneven state (rough surface) having a substantially semicircular shape with a constant pitch when viewed from the side in the direction in which light travels. In FIG. 10-6(C), the uneven state (rough surface) is shown in an enlarged manner to aid understanding, but the actual light emitting region 506 is a microscopic surface that is difficult to see with the naked eye. It is in an uneven state.

When light enters the inside from the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501, a predetermined image (still image) is displayed on the light guide plate 501 by means of a dot pattern consisting of a plurality of concave portions 510 formed in the light emitting region 506 (Fig. See halftone dot area at 10-5). That is, the light-emitting region 506 as a first region forming a predetermined light-guiding pattern in which the light from the light guide plate LED 502 that enters from the right end surface 501 a is reflected forward and emitted from the front surface is formed from the plurality of concave portions 510 . This is an area where a dot pattern is formed, and a non- A light emitting region 507 is a region where a dot pattern composed of a plurality of recesses 510 is not formed. Further, in the characteristic portion 75SG, a predetermined image (graphic) is exemplified as display information that can be displayed by the light guide plate 501, but in addition to these, decorations such as pictures, characters, symbols, patterns, or patterns are also possible. Other display information including information may be displayed.

When light is not incident on the light guide plate 501 from the right end face 501a, the light guide plate 501 as a whole including the light emitting region 506 is in a colorless and transparent state. The second effect unit 400 and the third effect unit 600 can be visually recognized (see through) from the front of the light guide plate 501 . Further, when light is incident from the right end surface 501a, the portion of the light emitting region 506 emits light, but the portion other than the light emitting region 506 remains colorless and transparent.

In the characteristic portion 75SG, the light emitting region 506 is formed in a substantially semicircular uneven state, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured by a molding method in which an uneven portion is provided on the back surface (rear surface) of 501 . In addition, the reflective part is configured by a silk printing method in which reflective dots are printed on an acrylic plate with white ink, a sticking dot method in which an acrylic plate and a reflective plate are attached with dot-shaped adhesive material, and a groove processing method. can be

In the characteristic portion 75SG, each unevenness of the light emitting region 506 on the back surface (rear surface) of the light guide plate 501 has a substantially semicircular shape in a cross-sectional view, but the present invention is not limited to this. The cross-sectional shape of each unevenness of the light emitting region 506 can be variously modified, such as a substantially triangular shape, as long as it constitutes a reflecting surface capable of reflecting light toward the front (front surface).

The condensing lens 504 is formed in the shape of a long plate extending vertically from a translucent member such as acrylic or polycarbonate. A plurality of semicircular projections 504A that protrude toward the light guide plate 501 in a front view are continuously formed in the vertical direction on the surface of the condenser lens 504 on the light guide plate 501 side. The condenser lens 504 is composed of a single member integrally provided with a plurality of convex portions 504A. Each convex portion 504A is formed one by one corresponding to each of the light guide plate LEDs 502 .

Incidentally, the protrusions 504A are not limited to one-to-one correspondence with the light guide plate LEDs 502, and one protrusion 504A may correspond to two or more light guide plate LEDs 502, for example. Further, the condenser lens 504 is not limited to being composed of a single member in which a plurality of convex portions 504A are integrally provided, and a plurality of condenser lenses separately formed corresponding to the light guide plate LEDs 502 may be used. may be used.

As shown in FIG. 10-6C, the front-rear width of the condenser lens 504 on the light guide plate 501 side is smaller than the front-rear width of the condenser lens 504 on the light guide plate LED 502 side. In addition, since the front-rear width of the condenser lens 504 on the light guide plate 501 side is substantially the same as the front-rear width of the light receiving surface of the light guide plate 501, the light emitted from the condenser lens 504 is diffused in the front-rear direction. light (without light leakage) into the light guide plate 501 .

The front surface of the condenser lens 504 is a flat inclined surface that gradually inclines rearward from the light guide plate LED 502 side toward the light guide plate 501 side. It is a flat inclined surface that gradually inclines forward toward the 501 side. That is, the condensing lens 504 is formed in a tapered shape in which the plate thickness is gradually reduced from the light guide plate LED 502 side toward the light guide plate 501 side.

Also, a slight gap is provided between the condenser lens 504 and the light guide plate 501 . For example, the gap is of such a size that the condensing lens 504 and the light guide plate 501 do not come into contact with each other even if vibration occurs during transportation or use of the pachinko game machine 75SG001. As a result, it is possible to prevent the condensing lens 504 and the light guide plate 501 from being damaged by vibrations that occur during transportation and use of the pachinko game machine 75SG001.

Next, the light guide state of the emitted light from the light guide plate LED 502 will be described. Emitted light emitted from each light guide plate LED 502 enters a condenser lens 504 . Here, since the incident surface of the condenser lens 504 is formed in a curved shape to form a lens surface, even if the light emitted from the light guide plate LED 502 has a high directivity, it is incident on the condenser lens 504. The emitted light is radially diffused in the horizontal direction within the condensing lens 504 . Light incident on the condenser lens 504 is refracted rightward and emitted when passing through the inner curved lens surface.

As a result, even when the directivity of the light emitted from the light guide plate LED 502 is high, the light emitted from the light guide plate LED 502 can be radially diffused to some extent by the condenser lens 504, and the light emitting area of the light guide plate 501 can be expanded. can be expanded. In addition, since the light emitted from the condensing lens 504 is guided in the horizontal direction (because it is suppressed from spreading radially), only the portions corresponding to the respective light guide plate LEDs 502 can emit light. Further, the light incident on the condenser lens 504 from the light guide plate LED 502 is condensed toward a substantially central position in the front-rear direction while repeating total reflection in the front-rear direction. The light is emitted from the end surface on the 501 side (the portion with the smallest front-to-rear width).

With such a configuration, the light from the light guide plate LED 502 can be focused and guided to the light guide plate 501 without being diffused in the front-rear direction. In particular, even when the front-rear width of the light emitting surface of the light guide plate LED 502 is larger than the front-rear width of the light guide plate LED 502 side of the condenser lens 504, the light from the light guide plate LED 502 is not diffused in the front-rear direction. 501, the light from the light guide plate LED 502 can be prevented from diffusing to the surroundings.

Light from the condensing lens 504 is guided into the light guide plate 501 and reaches the light emitting area 506, whereupon the light is reflected toward the front side (player's side). As a result, when viewed from the player, the light emitting area 506 of the light guide plate 501 emits light by the reflected light, so that the area indicated by halftone dots in FIG. , the figure will be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 10-4, the image display device 5 is arranged at the back and the light guide plate device 500 is arranged at the front when viewed from the player (in the front-rear direction). As seen from the player, the image display device 5 has a horizontally long rectangular shape. For example, the image display device 5 uses a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal panel. The image display device 5 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be an EL display device such as an organic EL display device or an inorganic EL display device.

(First production unit 300)
Next, the first effect unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-7 to 10-12. 10-7, (A) is a front view showing the first effect unit, and (B) is a rear view. FIG. 10-8 is an exploded perspective view showing the configuration of the first effect unit as viewed obliquely from the front. 10-9, (A) is a CC sectional view of FIG. 10-7 (A), (B) is a DD sectional view of FIG. 10-7 (A), and (C) is FIG. 10-7 It is a cross-sectional view along EE in (A). 10-10, (A) is a front view showing the base member, (B) is a front view showing the LED board, and (C) is a front view showing the cover member. 10-11, (A) is a front view showing the first effect unit with the cover member removed, and (B) is a front view showing the first effect unit with the cover member attached. FIG. 10-12 is an enlarged view showing the main part of FIG. 10-11(B).

As shown in FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9, the first effect unit 300 is arranged to cover the base member 301 and the front side of the base member 301, and is attached to the base member 301 with a plurality of screws N1. and an LED board 303 attached to the front surface of the base member 301 with a plurality of screws N2. It is provided so as to be visible through the glass window 50a and the board plate 200 .

The base member 301 is made of a non-translucent synthetic resin material and is oblong in a front view, and has black surfaces (front and rear surfaces and peripheral surfaces). The front surface of the base member 301 includes a flat portion 311 formed of a flat surface, a concave portion 312 formed in the lower portion of the flat portion 311 and shaped like a horizontally long rectangle when viewed from the front, and rear wall portions 313A to 313A located slightly behind the flat portion 311. 313D and

Above the flat portion 311, a plurality of trapezoidal projections 314A to 314E forming part of a decorative pattern 331, which will be described later, are formed in the longitudinal direction. Parts 313A to 313D are visible. Incidentally, the rear wall portions 313A to 313D are formed so as to incline rearward upward (see FIG. 10-9(B)). A predetermined decorative pattern 341 is engraved on the front surfaces of the rear wall portions 313A to 313D.

As shown in FIG. 10-9, the concave portion 312 has a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, has a depth capable of accommodating the LED substrate 303, and is formed so as to be surrounded by the flat portion 311 when viewed from the front. ing. In the state where the LED board 303 is attached, the front surface of the LED board 303 and the flat portion 311 are substantially flush with each other, and only the first effect LEDs 304, which will be described later, are positioned forward of the flat portion 311. there is In addition, the concave portion 312 is formed with a plurality of vertically elongated heat radiation holes 315 and an opening 316 for routing a cable (not shown) connected to the LED substrate 303 to the rear side.

As shown in FIGS. 10-8 and 10-9, on the front surface of the LED board 303, a plurality of first effect LEDs 304 capable of emitting light forward and a plurality of other electronic components (not shown) are mounted. A plurality of printed wirings 320 are formed (see the enlarged view of FIG. 10-10(B)). On the back side of the LED board 303, a board-side connector CN for connecting a cable (not shown) to the LED board 303 and electronic parts (not shown) are mounted. In addition, the surface of the LED substrate 303 (the insulating portion excluding the printed wiring 320 on the front and back surfaces) is black.

The cover member 302 is made of a translucent (transparent) synthetic resin material and has a horizontally long shape when viewed from the front. It has second translucent parts 322A and 322B mainly corresponding to the first effect LED 304 . At positions corresponding to the projections 314A to 314E of the base member 301, a plurality of trapezoidal projections 324A to 324E are formed in the longitudinal direction.

As shown in FIG. 10-9, the front surfaces of the second light-transmitting portions 322A and 322B protrude forward from the front surface of the first light-transmitting portion 321, and a recess 322D is formed on the back surface. The first production LED 304 can be accommodated. In addition, a light diffusing portion 322C composed of fine uneven portions is formed on the back surface of the second light transmitting portions 322A and 322B, so that the light from the rear first effect LED 304 can be diffused and emitted forward. ing. The concave and convex portions may be formed by sandblasting, diamond cutting, or the like, and the forming method, shape, and the like can be changed in various ways.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-10(C), the first translucent portion 321 is provided with a plurality of decoration patterns 331 having a hexagonal shape when viewed from the front. Specifically, one decorative pattern 331 has a horizontally long rectangular shape in a front view, with a decorative portion 331A formed of a plurality of horizontal lines extending in the left-right direction and decorative portions 331B and 331C formed of inclined lines extending in oblique left and right directions. A decorative portion 331D and a decorative portion 331E having a triangular shape when viewed from the front are provided, and a plurality of decorative patterns 331 are continuously provided by sharing the decorative portions 331A to 331C with adjacent decorative patterns 331. .

Further, each of these decorative portions 331A to 331E is formed by, for example, sandblasting the rear surface (or front surface) of the cover member 302 to form fine irregularities, or by attaching a translucent seal or the like. As a result, each decorative portion 331A to 331E looks milky white or translucent when viewed from the player's side.

As shown in FIG. 10-11(A), the LED board 303 as an electronic component having the first effect LED 304 is arranged on the front side of the base member 301, and the front side is covered with the cover member 302. ing. However, since the cover member 302 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material, it is possible for the player to see the front surface of the base member 301 and the LED board 303 through the cover member 302 . be.

Here, by arranging the same black base member 301 around (periphery) the black LED substrate 303, the LED substrate 303 assimilates with the surrounding base member 301, and the LED substrate 303 and the cover member 302 are integrated. It is difficult to understand the boundary portion BD between and. In other words, it becomes difficult to see that the LED board 303 is provided on a part of the front surface of the base member 301, so that the LED board 303, which is an electronic component, becomes less noticeable.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-11(B), when the cover member 302 is attached to the front side of the base member 301 with the LED substrate 303 arranged in the concave portion 312 of the base member 301, the base member 301 and the LED substrate are mounted. The cover member 302 is positioned high so as to cover the front surface of the base member 303, and the front surface of the base member 301 and the LED substrate 303 can be easily seen through the first translucent portion 321 from the player side. As for the first effect LED 304, it is difficult for the player to see through the second translucent portions 322A and 322B. The milky-white or semi-transparent decorative portions 331A to 331E applied to the cover member 302 are arranged on the front side of the base member 301 and the LED substrate 303, so that the milky-white or semi-transparent color appears on the front side of the black background. The decorative pattern 331 can be visually recognized.

As shown in FIG. 10-12, when the cover member 302 is arranged on the front side of the base member 301, a predetermined decorative pattern 331 among the plurality of decorative patterns 331 (for example, the decorative patterns 331J to 331M in FIG. 10-12). etc.) are formed (provided) so as to straddle the LED board 303 and the cover member 302 when viewed from the player side. Specifically, the decorative portions 331B and 331C formed of inclined lines are arranged so as to intersect the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 303 and the cover member 302 facing in the left-right direction, and one decorative pattern 331 is formed between two members (LED Since one decorative pattern 331 is provided across the substrate 303 and the cover member 302), it looks as if it is provided on one member. It becomes difficult to recognize that is a separate member.

Further, part of the boundary portion BD between the LED board 303 and the cover member 302 is difficult to see from the player side due to the decoration parts 331B and 331C overlapping on the front side, so the LED board 303 becomes less noticeable. Since the decorative portions 331B and 331C are linear, even if they are arranged so as to overlap with the front side of the boundary portion BD, the area overlapping the boundary portion BD is small, but the decorative pattern 331 does not overlap the LED substrate 303 and the cover. It is difficult to recognize that the LED board 303 and the cover member 302 are separate members because they are formed over substantially the entire front surface of the member 302 .

In addition, the decorative portion 331A of each decorative pattern 331 is arranged substantially parallel to the boundary portion BD, making it difficult to distinguish between the boundary portion BD and the shape of the boundary portion BD. In addition, the LED board 303 is less conspicuous because milky white, which has a higher brightness than black, is conspicuous. By arranging the decorative portion 331A so as to overlap along the boundary portion BD, the decorative portion 331A may make it difficult for the player to visually recognize a part of the boundary portion BD.

In addition, these decorative portions 331A to 331C are formed in a linear shape in the same manner as the printed wiring 320 provided on the LED substrate 303, and are arranged substantially parallel to a part of the printed wiring 320, so that the printed wiring Since the pattern is similar (or common) to the wiring pattern of 320, it is difficult to distinguish between them, so the LED substrate 303 is less conspicuous.

Furthermore, although the decorative portions 331D and 331E are different from the printed wiring 320 and the boundary portion BD, they are thicker and have a larger area than the printed wiring 320 and the boundary portion BD, and are more conspicuous than the printed wiring 320 and the boundary portion BD. Further, since the printed wiring 320 is partially overlapped on the front side of the printed wiring 320, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the printed wiring 320, so that the LED substrate 303 becomes inconspicuous.

In addition, on the front surface of each of the rear wall portions 313A to 313D of the base member 301, a decorative pattern 341 consisting of vertically flattened hexagonal linear protrusions is provided so as to be visible from the player side. Since the decorative pattern 341 is similar (or common) to the wiring pattern of the printed wiring 320, even in the region of the base member 301 not covered with the cover member 302, the wiring pattern of the printed wiring 320 is similar to the wiring pattern. Since the decorative pattern 341 can be formed, the LED substrate 303 becomes inconspicuous.

In addition, the base member 301 has rear wall portions 313A to 313D as predetermined areas visible from the player side without seeing through the cover member 302, and the rear wall portions 313A to 313D are provided on the cover member 302. Since the decorative pattern 341 as the predetermined decorative pattern having the same or similar form as the decorative pattern 331 provided is provided, it becomes difficult to recognize that the base member 301 and the cover member 302 are different members. 303 becomes inconspicuous.

Further, since the LED substrate 303 is arranged in the concave portion 312 formed in the lower portion of the base member 301, the LED substrate 303 is positioned below the upper region of the concave portion 312 in the base member 301, that is, at a position spaced apart from the image display device 5. By being provided, it is located away from the image display device 5 which the player pays attention to, so that it is less conspicuous.

In this way, a predetermined decorative pattern 331 among the plurality of decorative patterns 331 (for example, decorative patterns 331J to 331M in FIGS. 10-12) is attached to the LED board 303 and the cover member 302 when viewed from the player side. By being provided so as to straddle, the LED board 303, which is an electronic component, becomes inconspicuous. Therefore, even electronic parts such as the LED board 303, which should not be shown to the player from the standpoint of appearance and design, can be provided on the front side or the like, which is visible from the player side. can increase

(Variable winning ball unit 700)
Next, the variable winning ball unit 700 will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. 10-13. 10-13, (A) is a front view showing the variable winning ball unit, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF of (A).

As shown in FIGS. 10-13, the variable winning ball unit 700 has a base member 701 attached to the board 200 from the front side, and a cover member 702 provided on the front side of the base member 701. The device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 are integrated as a unit.

A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided on the upper right of the variable winning ball unit 700, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the lower left. In between, there are a game ball path 705A that allows a game ball (game ball P) to enter the large winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 7, and a game ball (game ball) to the second start winning opening of the variable winning ball device 6B A game ball path 705B into which P) can enter is provided. Further, below the special variable winning ball device 7, an LED board 703 having a plurality of performance LEDs 704 capable of irradiating light forward is provided.

The base member 701 and the cover member 702 are made of a translucent synthetic resin material. Therefore, the game ball passing through the game ball paths 705A and 705B can be viewed through the cover plate 702A from the player side.

(First effect unit 300 and variable winning ball unit 700)
Next, the first effect unit 300 and the variable winning ball unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-14 to 10-16. 10-14, (A) and (B) are cross-sectional views showing essential parts of the first effect unit, and (C) and (D) are cross-sectional views showing essential parts of the variable winning ball unit. 10-15 are diagrams for comparing the first effect unit and the variable winning ball unit. 10 to 16 are diagrams for explaining similar colors.

First, as shown in FIG. 10-3, the first effect unit 300 and the variable winning ball unit 700 are arranged side by side on the left and right below the image display device 5. The right end of the 1 effect unit 300 is provided so as to overlap or approach the left end of the variable winning ball unit 700 . 10-4 and 10-13(B), the front portion of the variable winning ball unit 700 is arranged on the front side of the board 200, while the first effect unit 300 is positioned on the board 200. located on the back side of the

As shown in FIGS. 10-14(A) and (B), the front-rear dimension L1A, which is the plate thickness dimension of the cover member 302 in the first translucent portion 321 of the first effect unit 300, is the second translucent portions 322A and 322B. is longer than the front-rear dimension L1B which is the plate thickness dimension of the cover member 302 in (L1A>L1B).

In the first light-transmitting portion 321 of the cover member 302, the transmittance of the light transmitted in the T direction out of the light entering from the front in the direction perpendicular to the front surface of the first light-transmitting portion 321 (T direction) is XA. %. In addition, in the second light transmitting portions 322A and 322B of the cover member 302, out of the light that has entered from the front in the direction perpendicular to the front surfaces of the second light transmitting portions 322A and 322B (T direction), the light is transmitted in the T direction. The light transmittance is XB%. In other words, not all of the light (100%) entering the first light-transmitting portion 321 and the second light-transmitting portions 322A and 322B from the front is transmitted in the T direction, and part of the light is reflected on the front surface. , is emitted in a direction different from the T direction (so as to spread to the surroundings). In particular, the second light-transmitting portions 322A and 322B have the light diffusing portion 322C made up of uneven portions formed on the back surface, so that the light can be transmitted in a direction different from the T direction more easily than the first light-transmitting portion 321. , the transmittance of light in the T direction is lower than the transmittance of the first light transmitting portion 321 (light transmittance is low: XA%>XB%).

As shown in FIGS. 10-14(C) and 10-14(D), in the cover plate 702A, of the light entering from the front in the direction perpendicular to the front surface (T direction), the transmittance of the light transmitted in the T direction is Y %. Here, the front-rear dimension L2 of the cover plate 702A is shorter than the front-rear dimensions L1A and L1B of the first translucent portion 321 and the second translucent portions 322A and 322B of the cover member 302 (L2<L1A, L2<L1B), the light incident from the front surface is guided in the T direction inside and is difficult to diffuse to the surroundings before being emitted from the rear surface, and there is no light diffusion portion like the second translucent portions 322A and 322B. Since it is a flat plate, the light transmittance of the cover plate 702A in the T direction is higher than the light transmittance of the cover member 302 in the T direction (Y%>XA%, Y%>XB%).

In other words, the translucency of the cover member 302 is lower than that of the cover plate 702A. Rather than visually recognizing the ball P), the case of visually recognizing a predetermined portion on the back side of the cover member 302 (for example, the first effect LED 304 or the LED board 303) through the cover member 302 from the player side. is low in visibility, the LED board 303 including the first effect LED 304, which is an electronic component, becomes inconspicuous.

As shown in FIGS. 10-15, in the first effect unit 300, the LED board 303 including the first effect LED 304, which is an electronic component, and the base member 301 arranged therearound are of the same color (black). , the LED substrate 303 is less conspicuous. Also, the front-rear dimensions L1A and L1B of the cover member 302 of the first effect unit 300 are longer than the front-rear dimension L2 of the cover plate 702A of the variable winning ball unit 700 (L1A, L1B>L2), and the first effect unit The light transmittance (XA%, XA%) of the cover member 302 of 300 in the T direction is lower than the light transmittance (Y%) of the cover member 702 of the variable winning ball unit 700 in the T direction. (Y%>XA%, Y%>XB%), the LED substrate 303 is less conspicuous.

Therefore, when the first effect unit 300 and the variable winning ball unit 700 provided at a different position (on the right side) from the first effect unit 300 are viewed from the player side, the cover member 702 is seen through. Since the visibility when the LED board 303 is viewed through the cover member 302 is lower than the visibility when the game ball P is viewed, the variable winning ball unit 700 located near the first effect unit 300 , the LED substrate 303 arranged on the back side of the cover member 302, which is a translucent member, feels more difficult to see. In addition, since the cover member 302 is arranged on the back side of the cover plate 702A and the base member 301 and the LED substrate 303 are dark black, the LED substrate 303 becomes less conspicuous.

Further, in the characterizing part 75SG of the present embodiment, the LED board 303, which is an electronic component, and the base member 301, which is a specific member arranged around the LED board 303, are of the same color (black). The color is not limited to this, and the electronic component and the specific member may not have the same color. For example, they may have the same color or a similar color.

Color has three attributes: hue (color), lightness (brightness), and saturation (vividness). 1. A combination of colors (adjacent colors) that have the same tone (hue group with the same lightness (brightness) and saturation (vividity)) and that are adjacent to each other in terms of hue; 3. Combinations of the same hue but different tones; Color combinations that differ only in lightness or saturation are included.

Fig. 10-16 shows an example of "1. A combination of colors (adjacent colors) that have the same tone (hue group with the same lightness (brightness) and saturation (vividity)) and are adjacent in terms of hue". If the three primary colors of colorants, cyan (C), magenta (M), and yellow (Y), are arranged at angular intervals of 120 degrees in a predetermined number (here, 24 colors) of the color wheel, Each of the three colors is dissimilar to each other. Colors having a hue difference within the range of 30 to 60 degrees on the hue circle are "similar colors", and are not limited to combinations of adjacent colors adjacent to each other on the hue circle.

For example, when cyan (C) is used as a reference color, colors belonging to the range of 30 degrees to the magenta (M) side and 30 degrees to the yellow (Y) side (total of 60 degrees) are similar to cyan (C). When magenta (M) is used as a reference color, colors that fall within the range of 30 degrees to the cyan (C) side and 30 degrees to the yellow (Y) side (60 degrees in total) are similar to magenta (M), and yellow ( When Y) is used as a reference color, colors belonging to the range of 30 degrees to the cyan (C) side and 30 degrees to the magenta (M) side (60 degrees in total) are similar to yellow (Y). Therefore, even if the number of colors on the color wheel is less than 24 or more than 24, a combination of colors having a hue difference within an angle of 30 to 60 degrees on the color wheel may be defined as "similar colors".

In addition, similar colors include warm colors such as red and yellow that give a feeling of warmth, cold colors that give a feeling of coldness such as blue and purple, and green and purple. It preferably includes a combination of colors included in neutral colors, which are chromatic colors positioned between warm colors and cool colors.

(Second production unit 400)
Next, the second effect unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-17 to 10-19. 10-17, (A) is a front view showing the second effect unit, and (B) is a front view showing the second effect unit with the cover member removed. 10-18, (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along line GG of FIG. 10-17(A), and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line HH of FIG. 10-17(A). 10-19, (A) is a diagram explaining the boundary between the base member and the LED board, and (B) is a diagram showing the configuration of the second effect unit.

As shown in FIGS. 10-17 and 10-18, the second effect unit 400 includes a base member 401, a cover member 402 arranged to cover the front side of the base member 401, and a front surface of the base member 401. and an inner lens 405 arranged on the front side of the LED board 403. As shown in FIG. , that is, from the side of the player facing the pachinko game machine 75SG001 through the glass window 50a and the light guide plate 501 so as to be visible.

The base member 401 is made of a non-translucent synthetic resin material and has a substantially half-moon shape when viewed from the front, and has white surfaces (front, rear, and peripheral surfaces).

The LED board 403 has a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front end of a boss projecting from the front surface of the base member 401 . A plurality of second effect LEDs 404A and 404B and other electronic components (not shown) are mounted on the front surface of the LED board 403 . In addition, on the back surface of the LED board 403, a plurality of second effect LEDs 404C capable of emitting light upward, a plurality of second effect LEDs 404D capable of emitting light downward, and other electronic components (illustrated ) are installed multiple times. The second effect LEDs 404A to 404D are angle type LEDs capable of irradiating light parallel or substantially parallel to the mounting surface of the LED board 403 . In addition, the surface of the LED substrate 403 (the insulating portion excluding the printed wiring on the front and back surfaces) is white.

The inner lens 405 is made of a synthetic resin material having translucency, is formed in substantially the same shape as the LED substrate 403, and includes a plurality of second effect LEDs 404A arranged along the upper side of the front surface of the LED substrate 403, It is arranged between a plurality of second effect LEDs 404B arranged along the lower side on the front surface of the LED board 403, the light from the second effect LED 404A is incident on the front end surface, and the light from the second effect LED 404B of light is incident on the rear end face.

As shown in FIG. 10-18(A), on the back surface of the inner lens 405, the light incident from the second production LEDs 404A and 404B is reflected forward by a reflecting portion 406 for reflecting the light forward. , and is emitted forward substantially uniformly from the entire front surface of the inner lens 405 . Since the front surface of the inner lens 405 is a flat surface, it emits surface light like a light guide plate.

The reflecting portion 406 is formed in an uneven state (rough surface) such that a cross-sectional view of the traveling direction of the light guided inside the inner lens 405 has a substantially triangular wave shape with a constant pitch. Specifically, it is configured by a molding method in which uneven portions are formed on the back surface of the inner lens 405 by stamper or injection. A sticking dot method in which the plate is attached with a dot-like adhesive material, a groove processing method, or the like may be used to form the reflecting portion.

The cover member 402 is made of a translucent (transparent) synthetic resin material and has a box shape with an open rear surface, and is formed so as to be able to cover the front side of the base member 401 and the LED substrate 403 . At a position corresponding to the LED board 403 on the front surface of the cover member 402, a protrusion 410 having a shape slightly enlarging the LED board 403 in a front view is projected forward.

On the front surface of the convex portion 410, a decorative portion 420 consisting of a letter “V” (logotype) is printed with a colored paint having translucency, or a translucent sheet on which letters are printed is adhered. For example, it is provided so as to allow light to pass therethrough. A light diffusing portion 402A composed of an uneven portion is formed on the back surface of the convex portion 410 so that the light from the inner lens 405 can be diffused and emitted forward.

In a region above the convex portion 410 on the back surface of the cover member 402, a plurality of convex streak portions 421A protruding to the back side extend vertically at positions corresponding to the respective second effect LEDs 404C. In addition, in a region below the convex portion 410 on the back surface of the cover member 402, a plurality of convex streak portions 421B protruding to the rear side extend vertically at positions corresponding to the respective second effect LEDs 404D. A light diffusing portion made up of an uneven portion may also be formed on a portion of the rear surface of the cover member 402 where the protruding portions 421A and 421B are not formed. Further, the cover member 402 is formed so as to incline rearward from the projection 410 upward and downward.

The plurality of ridges 421A and 421B has an uneven portion continuously formed on the rear end surface, and a stepped portion 421C is formed at an intermediate position in the longitudinal direction. By extending so as to be inclined to the rear side, the light emitted upward and downward from the second effect LEDs 404C and 404D can enter from these concave and convex portions and the stepped portion 421C. The emitted light is diffused by the concave-convex portion and emitted forward.

In this way, the second effect unit 400 emits light from the second effect LEDs 404A and 404B, and the light emitted from the second effect LEDs 404A and 404B is projected forward by the inner lens 405 and the cover member 402 is projected. By being incident on the region corresponding to the portion 410, the entire front surface of the convex portion 410 including the decorative portion 420 emits surface light.

As shown in FIG. 10-19(A), an LED board 403 as an electronic component having second effect LEDs 404A to 404D is arranged on the front side of the base member 401, and the front side is covered by the cover member 402. covered. However, since the cover member 402 is made of a synthetic resin material having translucency, it is assumed from the player's side that a light diffusion portion is formed in a portion of the cover member 402 other than the ridges 421A and 421B. However, it is possible to see the front surfaces of the base member 401 and the LED substrate 403 through the portions other than the protruding portions 421A and 421B.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-19(B), by arranging the same white base member 401 around (periphery) the white LED substrate 403, the LED substrate 403 and the surrounding base member 401 are arranged. As a result, the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 403 and the cover member 402 is obscured. In other words, it becomes difficult to see that the LED board 403 is provided on a part of the front surface of the base member 401, so that the LED board 403, which is an electronic component, becomes less noticeable.

Also, as shown in FIG. 10-19(A), the decorative portion 420 provided on the front surface of the convex portion 410 is a boundary between the LED board 403, which is an electronic component, and the base member 401 when viewed from the player side. It is provided at a position corresponding to a part of the upper side and the lower side of the part BD. That is, a part of the decoration part 420 is arranged so as to overlap (overlap) a part of the boundary part BD on the front side of the boundary part BD. The LED board 403 becomes inconspicuous because it becomes difficult to see. Therefore, even electronic parts such as the LED board 403, which should not be shown to the player from the standpoint of appearance and design, can be provided on the front side, etc., visible from the player side. can increase

Moreover, the decorative portion 420 is provided so as to cover (overlap) the front side of the boundary portion BD in a larger area than the decorative pattern 331 described above. discreetly.

In this embodiment, the decorative portion 420 partially overlaps (overlaps) a position corresponding to part of the upper side and lower side of the boundary portion BD when viewed from the player side. The present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative portions 420 may be arranged at positions corresponding to all portions of the boundary portion BD. In addition, it is preferable to provide so as to overlap about ⅓ or more of the boundary portion BD.

In addition, since the letter "V" is displayed as the logotype in the decorative portion 420, it becomes difficult for the player to pay attention to the logotype and be conscious of the boundary portion BD between the LED board 403 and the base member 401. Therefore, the LED substrate 403 becomes inconspicuous.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the form in which the letter "V" indicating a big hit is applied as a logotype is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and includes "big hit", "BONUS", "RUSH". , characters indicating a variable display result, characters indicating a big hit such as "heat", "hot heat", and "!!", and characters such as the model name of the game machine, the title, and the name of the character appearing. Furthermore, not only characters but also decorations such as characters, symbols, designs, pictures, and patterns may be displayed as decorations.

In addition, the LED board 403 has a second effect LED 404A as a light emitting means capable of causing the decoration part 420 to emit light, so that the decoration part 420 is conspicuous due to the light emission, so that the player can use the LED board 403 and the base member 401 together. Since it becomes difficult to be conscious of the boundary portion BD between and, the LED substrate 403 becomes less conspicuous.

In addition, the second effect LED 404A is provided so that the decorative portion 420 can emit surface light through the inner lens 405, so that the decorative portion 420 is conspicuous due to the surface light emission, so that the player can use the LED board 403. and the base member 401, the LED substrate 403 becomes less conspicuous.

Further, in the present embodiment, the decorative portion 420 is exemplified as one decorative portion made of the letter “V”, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the convex portion 410 of the cover member 402 is not limited to this. When a plurality of decorative portions 420 are provided in the area of the cover member 402 and a plurality of predetermined decorative portions (for example, patterns) different from the decorative portion 420 are provided in a region other than the convex portion 410 of the cover member 402, the plurality of decorations The number of parts is preferably greater than the number of predetermined decorative parts. By doing so, the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 403 and the base member 401 is made difficult to see by the plurality of decorative portions, and is more conspicuous than the plurality of predetermined decorative portions provided in other regions. Therefore, the LED substrate 403 becomes inconspicuous.

In this case, it is sufficient that the plurality of decorative portions and the plurality of predetermined decorative portions have different modes. Any one of color, size, etc. may be different.

In addition, the cover member 402 includes a convex portion 410 that is a boundary corresponding region corresponding to the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 403 and the base member 401, and a convex portion 410 that does not correspond to the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 403 and the base member 401. The translucency of the convex portion 410 may be lower than the translucency of the region other than the convex portion 410 . By doing so, the boundary part BD between the LED board 403 and the base member 401 becomes difficult for the player to see through the convex part 410 , so that the LED board 403 becomes less conspicuous.

(Third production unit 600 and fourth production unit 800)
Next, the third effect unit 600 and the fourth effect unit 800 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 10-20 to 10-26. 10-20 (A) is a front view showing the third effect unit and the fourth effect unit. 10-21, (A) is a cross-sectional view along II in FIG. 10-20, and (B) is a cross-sectional view along JJ in FIG. 10-20. FIG. 10-22 is a cross-sectional view along KK of FIG. 10-20. FIG. 10-23 is an explanatory diagram showing the visibility status of the third effect unit and the fourth effect unit. FIG. 10-24 is a diagram showing the configuration of the third effect unit and the fourth effect unit. FIG. 10-25 is a diagram showing an effect mode when the third effect unit and the fourth effect unit emit light. FIG. 10-26 is a schematic front view showing (A) the state where the third effect unit is located at the origin position, and (B) the state where the third effect unit is located at the effect position.

(Third production unit 600)
As shown in FIGS. 10-20, 10-21(A) and 10-26, the third effect unit 600 includes a base member 601 and a cover member arranged to cover the front side of the base member 601. 602, an LED board 603 attached to the front surface of the base member 601, and an inner lens 605 arranged on the front side of the LED board 603; ) and the performance position shown in FIG. and a power transmission member 632 for transmitting power to the light emitting effect part 630, and as shown in FIG. That is, it is provided so as to be visible through the glass window 50a and the light guide plate 501 from the side of the player facing the pachinko game machine 75SG001.

The base member 601 is made of a non-translucent synthetic resin material and has a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front.

The LED board 603 has a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front end of an upright wall projecting from the front peripheral edge of the base member 601 . A plurality of third effect LEDs 604A and 604B and other electronic components (not shown) are mounted on the front surface of the LED board 603 . The third effect LEDs 604A and 604B are capable of emitting light forward. In addition, the surface of the LED substrate 603 (the insulating portion excluding the printed wiring on the front and back surfaces) is white. Incidentally, the cable C connecting the LED board 603 and the effect control board 12 is wired along the power transmission member 632 (see FIG. 10-26).

The inner lens 605 is made of a synthetic resin material having translucency, and is formed in substantially the same shape as the LED substrate 603. The plurality of third effect LEDs 604A and 604B arranged in front of the LED substrate 603 are viewed from the front side. arranged to cover.

As shown in FIG. 10-21(A), on the front and back of the inner lens 605, the light from the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B arranged on the back side is diffused and emitted forward. Surface light emission is achieved by providing the light diffusing portion 605A made up of uneven portions.

The cover member 602 is made of a translucent (transparent) synthetic resin material and has a box shape with an open rear surface, and is formed so as to be able to cover the front sides of the base member 601 and the LED substrate 603 .

On the front surface of the cover member 602, a decorative portion 620 consisting of characters (logotype) of "XXX" is printed with a colored paint having translucency, or a translucent sheet on which characters are printed is adhered. For example, it is provided so as to allow light to pass therethrough. A light diffusing portion 602A composed of an uneven portion is formed on the back surface of the cover member 602 so that the light from the inner lens 605 can be diffused and emitted forward.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the logo type is exemplified with the characters "XXX" indicating a big hit, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the model name of the gaming machine, title, appearance Characters such as character names, characters indicating variable display results such as "big hit", "BONUS", and "RUSH", and characters suggesting big hits such as "heat", "hot heat", and "!!" may be used. Furthermore, not only characters but also decorations such as characters, symbols, designs, pictures, and patterns may be displayed as decorations.

In this way, the third effect unit 600 emits light from the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B, and the light emitted forward from the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B through the inner lens 605 is further emitted from the cover member 602. The light is diffused through and emitted forward, so that the entire front surface of the cover member 602 including the decorative portion 620 emits light.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-20, the plurality of third effect LEDs 604A are arranged along the periphery of the characters "XXX" forming the decoration portion 620, and the plurality of third effect LEDs 604B are arranged along the periphery of the letters "XXX". It is arranged at a position that does not correspond to the portion 620 . By arranging the plurality of third effect LEDs 604A along the periphery of the characters "XXX" forming the decorative portion 620 in this way, when the third effect LEDs 604A emit light, "XXX" is displayed. Since the periphery of the character is lit up, the shape of the decorative portion 620 can be easily recognized.

In addition, the power transmission member 632, which constitutes a part of the power transmission member that transmits power to the light emission effect portion 630, has one end rotatably supported about a rotation shaft facing in the front-rear direction, and the other end emits light. Although it is an arm member provided with the effect part 630, the power transmission member can be changed in various ways, and if it can transmit power so that the light emission effect part 630 can move in the vertical direction, it can be a rack gear and a pinion gear. There may be.

(Fourth production unit 800)
As shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21 (B), the fourth effect unit 800 includes a base member 801, a cover member 802 arranged to cover the front side of the base member 801, a base member 801, and an inner lens 805 arranged on the front side of the LED board 803. As shown in FIG. In the upper left part, it is provided so as to be visible through the glass window 50a and the board 200 from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001, that is, from the side of the player facing the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001.

The base member 801 is made of a non-translucent synthetic resin material and is shaped like a box with an open front surface. In addition, the surfaces (front and rear surfaces and peripheral surface) are white.

The LED board 803 is formed to be smaller than the base member 801 when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front end of a boss (not shown) erected on the front surface of the base member 801 . A plurality of fourth effect LEDs 804 and other electronic components (not shown) are mounted on the front surface of the LED board 803 . The fourth effect LEDs 804 are angle-type LEDs capable of emitting light in parallel or substantially parallel to the mounting surface of the LED board 803 , and are arranged along the periphery of the front surface of the LED board 803 . The surface of the LED substrate 803 (the insulating portion excluding the printed wiring on the front and back surfaces) is white.

The inner lens 805 is made of a synthetic resin material having translucency, and is placed in a region surrounded by the plurality of fourth effect LEDs 804 on the front surface of the LED substrate 803 .

As shown in FIG. 10-21(B), on the back surface of the inner lens 805, the light incident from the fourth effect LED 804 is reflected forward by a reflecting portion 806 for reflecting forward, The light is emitted forward substantially uniformly from the entire front surface of the inner lens 805 . Since the front surface of the inner lens 805 is a flat surface, it emits surface light like a light guide plate.

The cover member 802 is made of a translucent (transparent) synthetic resin material, and is formed so as to be able to cover the front side of the base member 801 and the LED substrate 803 . More specifically, the cover member 802 does not cover the front end of the standing wall 801A along the guide rail 211 of the standing walls erected along the front peripheral edge of the base member 801, and does not cover the front end of the standing wall 801B other than the portion along the guide rail 211. It covers the front end. A light diffusing portion 802A is formed on the rear surface of the cover member 802, and is made up of an uneven portion, so that the light from the inner lens 805 can be diffused and emitted forward.

In this way, the fourth effect unit 800 emits light from the fourth effect LED 804 , and the light emitted forward from the fourth effect LED 804 through the inner lens 805 further passes through the cover member 802 . By being diffused and emitted forward, the entire front surface of the cover member 802 emits surface light.

Next, the third effect unit 600 and the fourth effect unit 800 are described. As shown in FIG. 10-24, the third effect unit 600 and the fourth effect unit 800 have base members 601, 801 and LED substrates 603, 803 whose surfaces are the same white color. 801 and the front side of the LED substrates 603, 803 are covered with translucent cover members 602, 802, and the front side emits light when the third production LEDs 604A, 604B and the fourth production LED 804 are lit. It is

As shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21(A), an LED board 603 as an electronic component having third effect LEDs 604A and 604B is arranged on the front side of the base member 601, and the front side thereof is the cover. It is covered by member 602 . However, since the cover member 602 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material, even if the light diffusion portion 602A is formed in the cover member 602, the player can see through the cover member 602. Although it is possible to visually recognize the back side, the inner lens 605 having the light diffusion portion 605A formed on the front and rear surfaces is provided on the back side so as to cover the LED substrate 603 from the front side. Although it is possible to visually recognize the front surface of the LED substrate 603, it is extremely difficult to visually recognize it.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-21(A), by arranging the standing wall of the same white base member 601 around (periphery) the white LED substrate 603, the LED substrate 603 is arranged on the surrounding base member. Assimilated with 601, the boundary BD between the LED substrate 603 and the cover member 602 is obscure. In other words, it becomes difficult to recognize that the LED board 603 is provided on the base member 601, so that the LED board 603, which is an electronic component, becomes less noticeable.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21(B), the LED board 803 as an electronic component having the fourth effect LED 804 is arranged on the front side of the base member 801, and the front side thereof is covered with a cover member 802 . However, since the cover member 802 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material, even if the cover member 802 is provided with the light diffusing portion 802A, the player can see through the cover member 802. It is possible to visually recognize the front surface of the base member 801 and the LED substrate 803 .

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-21(B), by arranging the same white base member 801 around (periphery) the white LED substrate 803, the LED substrate 803 and the surrounding base member 801 are arranged. As a result, the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 803 and the cover member 802 is obscured. In other words, it becomes difficult to see that the LED board 803 is provided on a part of the front surface of the base member 801, so that the LED board 803, which is an electronic component, becomes less noticeable.

However, the fourth effect LED 804 is an angle-type LED in which light is incident from the side end surface of the inner lens 805, and is arranged along the peripheral edge of the LED substrate 803, so that the LED including the fourth effect LED 804 The front side of the front peripheral edge of the substrate 803 is not covered with the inner lens 805, and the inner lens 805 has a smaller area than the inner lens 605 where the reflecting portion and the light diffusing portion are formed. The visibility when viewing the LED board 803 including the fourth effect LED 804 through the inner lens 805 from the side is the same as that of the LED board including the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B through the inner lens 605 from the player side. It is higher than the visibility when 603 is visually recognized. That is, the LED board 803 is more conspicuous than the LED board 603 .

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-24, the light emitting effect section 630 of the third effect unit 600 is larger than the LED board 803 of the fourth effect unit 800 when viewed from the player side (see FIG. 10-20). ), and the arrangement position of the front surface in the front-rear direction is forward (player side) of the arrangement position of the front surface of the fourth effect unit 800 (see FIGS. 10-22 and 10-23). The light emission mode of the fourth effect LED 804 of the effect unit 800 is surface light emission, while the light emission mode of the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B of the third effect unit 600 is flashing (see FIG. 10-25). 10-25, the backgrounds of the third effect unit 600 and the fourth effect unit 800 are shown in black for the convenience of explaining the light emission mode.

In this way, the light emitting effect section 630 of the third effect unit 600 is larger than the LED board 803 of the fourth effect unit 800 when viewed from the player side, is positioned closer to the player, and emits strong light. Therefore, the visibility when viewed from the player's side is higher than that of the fourth effect unit 800 as the effect means. That is, in the vicinity of the fourth effect unit 800, the third effect unit 600, which is effect means having higher visibility when viewed from the player side than the fourth effect unit 800, is provided. Since the third effect unit 600 is more conspicuous than the 4 effect unit 800 and attracts the player's attention, the LED board 803, which is an electronic component of the fourth effect unit 800, is less conspicuous.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the light emission effect section 630 of the third effect unit 600 is larger than the LED board 803 of the fourth effect unit 800 when viewed from the player side, and is positioned close to the player, and , By emitting light with strong light, a mode configured as a rendering means having higher visibility than the LED substrate 803 and the base member 801 has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the third rendering The light emitting effect section 630 of the unit 600 is different from the LED board 803 of the fourth effect unit 800 in at least one of the size when viewed from the player side, the position with respect to the player, and the light emitting mode, thereby improving visibility. should be high.

In addition, the front surface of the light emission effect section 630 of the third effect unit 600 as the effect means may be colored with a color with higher visibility than the surface color of the LED substrate 803, or a decorative part with a color with high visibility may be provided. Alternatively, the visibility of the light emitting effect portion 630 may be easily improved by using the cover member 602 molded in a highly visible color. Further, the visibility of the light emission effect section 630 may be easily enhanced by the light emission mode (for example, lighting color, lighting mode, brightness, etc.) of the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B.

In addition, as the rendering means, a mode in which the light emitting rendering section 630 of the third rendering unit 600 capable of emitting light by the lighting means and operable by the rendering motor 631 is applied has been exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, it may be light emitting means (such as a lamp portion) provided around the fourth effect unit 800 in the gaming machine frame 3, or effect means that does not emit light by the light emitting means, or may be driven by a predetermined drive source. It may be a production unit fixed at a predetermined position without operating.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-23, a protruding portion 3A (eaves portion) is formed in the upper front portion of the gaming machine frame 3 so as to protrude forward beyond the game board 2 and the glass window 50a. The protruding part 3A is formed above the game area Y so as not to obstruct the visual recognition of the game ball passing over the upper part of the game area Y. When the game machine 75SG001 is installed on the game island of the game arcade, the area E1 (the area indicated by halftone dots in the drawing) below the projection 3A is shaded by the projection 3A blocking external light from the game arcade. It gets dark.

Therefore, the third effect unit 600 and the fourth effect unit 800 are provided at positions corresponding to the area E1 in the upper part of the game area Y, so that the LED boards 603 and 803 are easily lost in the shadow of the projecting part 3A. so it becomes less noticeable.

In addition, above the LED boards 603 and 803, a protrusion 3A is provided that protrudes toward the player side beyond the LED boards 603 and 803. The protrusion 3A is larger than the LED boards 603 and 803 ( 10-23), the LED boards 603 and 803 become inconspicuous because they are shadowed by the projecting portion 3A.

In addition, although the LED substrates 603 and 803 and the base members 601 and 801 are white, the present invention is not limited to this. By doing so, the LED substrates 603 and 803 and the base members 601 and 801 are more likely to be lost in the shadow of the protruding portion 3A, so that they are less conspicuous.

In this embodiment, as the projecting portion projecting toward the player side above the electronic components and the specific member, a projecting portion 3A projecting above the LED substrates 603 and 803 toward the player side is applied. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the projecting portion is not limited to a projecting portion protruding from a part of the game machine frame 3. For example, the game board 2 or the game machine It may be composed of other game devices (for example, a winning ball device, etc.) or a performance device provided in the region Y. FIG. In addition, the projecting part 3A is not only fixed on the front surface of the game machine frame 3, but also moves from the origin position to the projecting position at a predetermined timing, thereby allowing the player to move above the electronic parts and specific members. It may be a protruding part that protrudes to the side.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-26, the light emitting region 506 of the light guide plate 501 corresponds to the movement of the light emitting effect section 630 and the power transmission member 632 of the third effect unit 600 operating on the back side of the light guide plate 501. It is formed so as to overlap in front and behind most of the moving region E2 (the region surrounded by the dashed line in FIG. 10-26).

Specifically, the movement area E2 of the light emitting effect part 630 and the power transmission member 632 is an area where the light emitting effect part 630 moves from the origin position to the effect position, and is an area including the origin position and the effect position. When light is incident on the light guide plate 501 from the right end surface 501a, the light emitting region 506 emits light. It becomes invisible or invisible through 501 . That is, the effect control CPU 120 turns on the light guide plate LED 502 to light up the light guide plate LED 502 at least during the movement period in which the light emission effect part 630 and the power transmission member 632 are moved from the origin position to the effect position and the effect period during which the light emission area is located. 506 to emit light, the light emission effect unit 630 and the power transmission member 632 become invisible or invisible through the light guide plate 501 from the player side. It is possible to suppress conspicuousness of the cable C (electronic component) or the like provided along the member 632 .

Further, when the light guide plate LED 502 is extinguished and the light emitting effect of the light emitting area 506 ends after the light emitting effect part 630 moves to the effect position, the power transmission member 632, the cable C, etc. become visible, but the light emitting effect part By lighting the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B of 630 to make the light emission effect part 630 stand out, the power transmission member 632 and the cable C can be made inconspicuous.

In addition, the electronic components (for example, the LED board 603 and the cable C) operably provided in this manner are visible to the player during the waiting period of waiting at the origin position and the movement period. However, it is preferable to make it difficult or invisible from the player's side at least during the effect period in which it is positioned at the effect position. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the electronic parts from becoming conspicuous during the presentation period in which the player pays attention.

Further, the pachinko game machine 75SG001 of the characterizing portion 75SG of the present embodiment is
Electronic components (for example, LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803) provided so as to be visible to the player;
a specific member (for example, base members 301, 401, 601, 801) provided around the electronic component and formed in a color similar to that of the electronic component;
a translucent member (e.g., cover members 302, 402, 602, 802) which is a member having translucency and is provided so that a player can visually recognize the electronic component and the specific member through the member;
It is characterized by having
By doing so, even if the electronic parts are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the specific members of the similar color make the electronic parts inconspicuous, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased.
It should be noted that the electronic component and the specific member can be changed to arbitrary colors as long as they have similar colors. In addition, the electronic component and the specific member may be of the same color (for example, black and black, white and white, etc.) as in the above embodiment.

(Description on deformation and application of characteristic portion 75SG)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 75SG001 described above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention.

For example, in the characterizing part 75SG of the above embodiment, light-emitting diodes such as the first effect LED 304, the second effect LEDs 404A to 404D, the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B, and the fourth effect LED 804 are provided as electronic components. Although the embodiment in which the LED boards 303, 403, 603, and 803 are applied is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and a circuit board (the main board 11 not (including control board 12, relay board, etc.), electronic components such as sensors, solenoids, motors, connectors, cables (wiring), and substrates and members for fixing them.

Further, in the characterizing portion 75SG of the above-described embodiment, as the specific member, the form in which the base members 301, 401, 601, 801 for arranging the LED substrates 303, 403, 603, 803 as electronic components are applied is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if it is not a member constituting a part of a unit (apparatus) in which electronic components are arranged or accommodated as described above, it may be a member provided around electronic components. If there is, a different member provided separately from the unit (device) that arranges or houses the electronic component (for example, a member that constitutes a part of another unit, or a part of the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3) a member constituting a part, etc.).

In addition, in the characterizing part 75SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the cover members 302, 402, 602, 802 constituting a part of the unit (apparatus) in which electronic components are arranged or accommodated is applied as the translucent member is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if it is not a member constituting a part of a unit (device) in which electronic components are arranged or accommodated as described above, it may be a member having translucency. If the member is provided so that the electronic component and the specific member can be visually recognized by the player through the member, a different member (for example, A member forming part of another unit, a member forming part of the game board 2 or the frame 3 for a game machine, etc.).

Further, in the characterizing portion 75SG of the above embodiment, the electronic component and the specific member provided around the electronic component have the same color (the same color), but the present invention is not limited to this. However, as long as the electronic component and the specific member provided around the electronic component have the same color as described above, the electronic component and the specific member are not limited to having the same color.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 75SG of the above embodiment, the base members 301, 401, 601, 801 as specific members partially overlap the LED substrates 303, 403, 603, 803 as electronic components on the back side. , non-overlapping portions are arranged around the LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803, but the present invention is not limited to this. They may be arranged side by side on at least one of the upper side, the lower side, the left side, and the right side without partially overlapping when visually recognized. In addition, if the specific member is placed around the electronic component when viewed from the player side, the electronic component and the specific member are arranged apart in the vertical, horizontal, front and rear directions, etc. may have been

In addition, the specific member provided around the electronic component includes the specific member provided at a position visible from the player side together with the electronic component, for example, it is arranged within a range of about 5 cm away from the electronic component. A specific member may be included.

In addition, in the characterizing part 75SG of the above-described embodiment, the mode in which the cover members 302, 402, 602, and 802 made of a synthetic resin material having translucency is applied as the translucent member was exemplified. The material is not limited, and any material can be used as long as it is a member having translucency, such as a glass material. Further, the member may be transparent or translucent, or may be colored in a predetermined color, as long as the player can visually recognize the electronic parts and the specific member through the member. Also, the light transmittance may not be 100% or a value close to 100%.

In addition, in the characteristic part 75SG of the above embodiment, the cover members 302, 402, 602, 802 as translucent members allow the player to see the LED substrates 303, 403, 603, 803 as electronic components through the members. and a part or all of the base members 301, 401, 601, 801 as specific members are exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and at least part of the electronic component provided that the electronic component and the specific member are visible together, even if at least part of the specific member is not made visible through the member. It is good if there is.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 75SG of the above embodiment, the cover members 302, 402, 602, 802 as translucent members include the LED substrates 303, 403, 603, 803 as electronic components and the base members 301, 301 as specific members. 401, 601, and 801 are arranged along the electronic component and the specific member on the front side, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the electronic component and the specific member are not necessarily arranged along the electronic component and the specific member. It does not have to be. In other words, the electronic component or the specific member may be arranged obliquely with respect to the translucent member.

In addition, in the characterizing part 75SG of the above-described embodiment, the entire surfaces of the LED substrates 303, 403, 603, 803 and the base members 301, 401, 601, 801 have a predetermined color (black or white). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the colors of the portions of the electronic component and the specific member that are visible through the translucent member (for example, the front color of the electronic component and the specific member) are similar colors. If so, the entire surface area does not necessarily have to be similar colors. In addition, the colors of these electronic components and specific members may be colored during molding of the members, may be colored by painting or printing after molding, or may be given a predetermined color by affixing a sticker or the like. may be

Further, in the characterizing portion 75SG of the above embodiment, the electronic component and the specific member provided around the electronic component have the same color (the same color), but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, for example, a predetermined electronic device that is provided in a manner that is difficult or invisible to the player separately from the LED substrates 303, 403, 603, 803 as electronic components and the base members 301, 401, 601, 801 as specific members. Components (for example, first start switch 22A, second start switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.) and predetermined members provided around the predetermined electronic components (for example, first start switch 22A, second member for fixing starting switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.). , and predetermined members (for example, members for fixing the first start switch 22A, the second start switch 22B, the solenoids 81, 82, etc.) are preferably of a different color.

In this way, the predetermined electronic parts such as the first starter switch 22A, the second starter switch 22B, the solenoids 81, 82, etc., which are provided so as to be difficult or invisible to the player, must be balanced with the predetermined members that fix them. Since general-purpose products can be used without considering

Further, by setting the color of the specific member to a color that has the same hue and has a higher lightness or saturation than the color of the electronic component, the specific member has higher visibility than the electronic component. It is possible to make the electronic components relatively inconspicuous.

In addition, by coloring the light-transmitting member with the same color as the electronic component and the specific member, the light-transmitting member is assimilated with the electronic component and the specific member, so that the electronic component can be made less conspicuous.

Further, for example, when electronic parts such as a black LED board are arranged on the right side of the game board 2, the electronic parts are provided on the left side of the game board 2 on the opposite side of the image display device 5, around the electronic parts. Separately from the specific member, by providing the outer rail decoration 212 of the same color or similar color to the electronic component so that it can be visually recognized by the player, the black members are arranged on the left and right sides of the image display device 5 in a well-balanced manner. As a result, it is difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable, and the electronic parts can be made less conspicuous. In this way, by symmetrically arranging a member having the same color as the electronic component or a similar color to the electronic component separately from the specific member, the electronic component can be made less conspicuous.

Further, the configuration regarding the characteristic portion 75SG may be appropriately combined with some or all of the configurations regarding the characteristic portions 91AK, 92AK, 01AK, and 02AK. For example, when the effects described in the characteristic portions 91AK, 92AK, 01AK, and 02AK can be executed in the image display device 5, the first effect unit 300 described in the characteristic portion 75SG provided around the image display device 5 , the second effect unit 400, the third effect unit 600, and the fourth effect unit 800 become inconspicuous, so that the effect can be favorably displayed.

Specifically, for example, as described with reference to FIGS. 9-9 to 9-11, the normal drawing effect NOR is executed even during periods other than the effect execution period D0 among the plurality of effect execution periods D0 to D4. In this case, it is possible to execute a light emitting effect using the first light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 or other decorative LEDs, and the light emitting effect is executed when executing the specific drawing effect SPE in the effect execution period D2 or the like. In the case of controlling not to be done, electronic components (for example, LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803) and specific members (for example, base members 301, 401, 601, 801) around (for example, game effect lamp 9 , etc.) may be controlled so as not to be executed (or the amount of light is made lower than the amount of light of the game effect lamp 9, etc.). By doing so, it is possible to prevent electronic parts and specific members from being conspicuous due to the execution of the light emitting effect using the second light emitting member when the light emitting effect using the first light emitting member is restricted. can.

In addition, among the second light-emitting members provided around the electronic component and the specific member, the decorative portion 420 of the light-transmitting member arranged on the front side of the electronic component and the specific member can emit surface light. For a light-emitting member such as the LED 404A that is inconspicuous even if it continues to emit light, the amount of light may be maintained (the execution may not be restricted) even when controlling so as not to execute the light-emitting effect using the first light-emitting member. . By doing so, it is possible to make the electronic parts and the specific members inconspicuous without excessively lowering the presentation effect.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1,75SG001 is exemplified as an example of the game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. While the number of balls enclosed in a circulative manner inside the gaming machine and lent out in response to a player's request for lending and the number of prize balls awarded according to winning are added, the number of game balls used in the game is added. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed type game machine in which is stored after being subtracted. Since scores and points are given to the player instead of game balls in these enclosed type game machines, the given scores and points correspond to the game value.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is used as an example of the game medium, but the game medium is not limited to a spherical game medium. It may be a medium.

Further, in the above embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine is used as an example of a gaming machine. In addition, one game is completed by deriving a variable display result to a variable display device capable of variable display of a plurality of types of individually identifiable symbols, and according to the variable display result derived to the variable display device. It can also be applied to slot machines in which prizes can be generated.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to enclosed gaming machines, slot machines, etc., in which game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winnings. Also, the game machine capable of playing a game is at least one that performs a game, and is not limited to a pachinko game machine or a slot machine, and may be a general game machine.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if it is modified or added without departing from the scope of the present invention.

Further, among the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, and the configurations shown in later-described embodiment examples and each modified example, all or part of the configurations may be arbitrarily combined.

In addition, it should be considered that the above-mentioned embodiment disclosed this time and the below-mentioned form are examples in all respects, and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of the claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine (eg, pachinko gaming machine 1, 75SG001, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (eg, jackpot game state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player. Visible electronic components (e.g., LED substrates 303, 403, 603, 803) and specific members (e.g., base member 301) provided around the electronic components and formed in the same color as the electronic components , 401, 601, 801), and a light-transmitting member (for example, the cover member 302) which is provided so that a player can visually recognize the electronic component and the specific member through the member. , 402, 602, 802) and display means (for example, the image display device 5), and the translucent member (for example, the cover member 302) is connected to the electronic component (for example, the LED board 303) and the specific A member (eg, base member 301) has a decorative pattern (eg, decorative pattern 331) formed across (see FIGS. 10-12), and the electronic component (eg, LED board 303) An operation means (for example, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, etc.) provided at a position spaced apart from the display means than a member (for example, the upper part of the base member 301) and operated by the player, and the operation means As the vibrating vibration effect, a predetermined vibration effect (for example, driving the vibration motor 131 by the vibration pattern included in the operation part effect pattern) and a special vibration effect (for example, driving the vibration motor 131 by the vibration control data included in the variable display effect control pattern). driving, etc.) (for example, the vibration control data of the operation section effect control pattern or the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203 is used to execute the effect process during variable display in step S172. Effect control CPU 120, etc.), and the light emission effect that causes the operation means to emit light in accordance with the predetermined vibration effect (for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 according to the light emission color included in the operation part effect pattern). Effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the effect process during variable display in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS203), and the specified according to the progress of the game Specific effect execution means (for example, variable display in step S172 based on the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203) A performance control CPU 120 for executing performance processing, etc.), and the ratio of control to the advantageous state is higher when the predetermined vibration performance is executed than when the predetermined vibration performance is not executed. (For example, the jackpot reliability according to the operation unit production pattern, etc.), the light emission mode of the light emission production accompanying the predetermined vibration production, and the timing at which the predetermined vibration production is executed. Controlled to the advantageous state. (for example, the luminescence color included in the operation part production pattern and the jackpot reliability according to the application of the operation part production pattern, etc.), the vibration production execution means performs the special vibration production in accordance with the execution of the specific production. It is executable (for example, execution of vibration effects in periods AKZ01 to AKZ05, etc.), and the vibration mode differs between the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect (for example, vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 that are different from vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44, etc. ) gaming machines.

According to such a configuration, even if the electronic parts are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the decorative pattern makes the electronic parts inconspicuous, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased. Also, the electronic parts are located away from the display means that the player pays attention to, so they are less noticeable. In addition, the game interest can be improved by making the player pay attention to the vibration mode of the vibration performance, the light emission mode of the light emission performance, and the execution timing of the vibration performance.

In other words, it is possible to increase the degree of design freedom and make the game machine look good, and at the same time, whether or not the predetermined vibration effect is executed at the execution timing of the light emission mode, the vibration effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect Since it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the special vibration performance is executed with the execution of the specific performance, the amusement of the game can be improved. That is, it is possible to provide a game machine that looks good when installed in a game arcade and easily attracts the interest of the players.

Furthermore, as an example of a form of a gaming machine capable of increasing the degree of freedom in design and improving the enjoyment of the game, a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player. (For example, pachinko game machine 1, etc.), an operation means (for example, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, etc.) that can be operated by a player, and a predetermined vibration effect (for example, an operation unit Vibration performance executing means (such as driving the vibration motor 131 by the vibration pattern included in the performance pattern) and special vibration performance (for example, driving the vibration motor 131 by the vibration control data included in the variable display performance control pattern). For example, the effect control CPU 120 for executing the effect process during variable display in step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation part effect control pattern and the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203), and the predetermined vibration effect Light-emitting effect execution means (for example, the operation determined in step AKS203) capable of executing a light-emitting effect (for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 in a light-emitting color included in the operation part effect pattern) that causes the operation means to emit light. Production control CPU 120 etc. that executes the production process during variable display in step S172 using the lamp control data of the part production control pattern) and specific production according to the progress of the game (for example SP reach A reach production, big hit confirmation notification , jackpot type lottery, etc.) (for example, the effect control CPU 120 for executing the effect process during variable display in step S172 based on the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203), When the predetermined vibration effect is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the predetermined vibration effect is not executed (for example, the jackpot reliability according to the operation part effect pattern etc. etc.), the ratio of control to the advantageous state differs depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed (for example, included in the operation unit effect pattern jackpot reliability according to the use of the light emitting color and the operation part production pattern, etc.), and the vibration production execution means can execute the special vibration production along with the execution of the specific production (for example, the vibration production in the period AKZ01 to AKZ05 , etc.), the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect have different vibration modes (for example, vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 different from the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44, etc.). Examples of the form examples of these gaming machines will be described below as other form examples.

11 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine 1. FIG. A main substrate 11 housed in a substrate case 201 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁A setting key 51 and a setting switch 52 are provided on the main board 11 . The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 , such as at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17 .

A display monitor 29 is arranged at the center of the back surface of the main substrate 11, and a display changeover switch 30 is arranged at the side of the display monitor 29. As shown in FIG. The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the gaming machine frame 3 opened.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, role ratios, and bases. The consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the total number of prize balls to the first and second big prize openings (attackers). Of the total number of prize balls, the number of prize balls won by winning the 2nd starting prize mouth (electric chew) and the number of prize balls by winning the 1st big prize mouth and the 2nd big prize mouth (attacker) account for the total number of prize balls. percentage. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1 when it is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. The display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display setting values to be changed or checked when it is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state.

The setting key 51 and the setting switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 when the game machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a security cover 500A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long square frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 500A covers the right side of the substrate case 201 including the setting keys 51 and the setting changeover switches 52 from the rear side. The security cover 500A is a substantially L-shaped member including short pieces 500Aa and long pieces 500Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 12, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S901). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S902). The initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.) register setting, and setting to make the RAM 102 accessible.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S903). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is in the OFF state, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, for example, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in an ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100 . If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S903 that the restoration condition is not established. The backup data may be stored in the RAM 102 serving as a backup RAM for game control. In step S903, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not recovery conditions can be satisfied.

If the restoration condition is satisfied (step S903; Yes), after executing the restoration process (step S904), the setting confirmation process (step S905) is executed. The work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 by the recovery processing in step S904. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state when the power supply is stopped can be restored. It is sufficient if the pattern variation can be restarted.

If the restoration condition is not satisfied (step S903; No), after executing the initialization process (step S906), the setting change process (step S907) is executed. The initialization processing in step S906 includes clear processing for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear processing.

In the setting confirmation process of step S905, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S905 is executed when the recovery condition including the clear signal being in the off state is satisfied in step S903. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process of step S905, the setting confirmation state is set in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed, and the main board 11 sets the effect control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29 . When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in a game stop state to stop the progress of the game. When the game is in the stopped state, shooting of game balls by operating the batted ball operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbols are stopped. The display device 20 may be controlled so as to stop-display a lost symbol or the like, or to perform a display corresponding to a game stop state different from the lost symbol. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

In the setting change process of step S907, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is on.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S907, the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and the setting is performed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting values are displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical values displayed on the display monitor 29 are sequentially updated and displayed. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a game hall staff member or the like, the set value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is updated. turn off the When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be put in the game stop state as in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

On the effect control board 12 side, when a setting confirmation start command or a setting change start command is received, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being checked or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 may emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17, for example. Therefore, if the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON when the power supply is started, and if the clear switch is ON, the initialization process of step S906 and step S906 are executed. The setting change process of S907 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S905 is executed together with the recovery process of step S904 to enable control to the setting confirmation state. If the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is off when the power supply is started, or if the setting key 51 is off, and if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S906 is executed. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery processing of step S904 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S908). Then, the register of CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S909), and the interrupt is permitted (step S9010 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a jackpot and the rate of winning balls are changed according to the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls are changed. For example, the setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest probability of winning the big win, and the probability of winning the big win decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 as the value decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the advantage in stages. . If the winning probability of the big win changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the winning probability of the big win is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the big win game state may change according to the set value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured so as to be able to set one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. The set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side.

FIG. 13 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table. FIG. 13(A) shows a configuration example of the first special figure display result determination table used when the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. It shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used when it is a figure. A display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 . In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbols, according to the set value. The random number MR1 is a random number for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated within the range of 0-65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In the display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), "big hit" special figure display assigned to the result. As a result, when the high probability state such as the probability variable state in which the probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, compared to the low probability state such as the normal state or the time saving state, the probability of being determined to control to the jackpot game state is increased. get higher

In the first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability of determining that the special figure display result is "small win" and controlled to the small win game state is determined to be the same value. has been assigned a value. In the second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or setting value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the first special figure display result Determination values are assigned so as to be the same values different from those in the determination table. In addition, depending on the set value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as the "small hit" may be changed. The probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small winning game state as "small hit" regardless of the variation special figure may be the same probability.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment value is set regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set, while the set value 2 to set value 6 are set. In this case, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging. When the set value is 1, by assigning 1020 to 1346 to the "jackpot", only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set, while the set value 2 to the set value In the case of 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value.

In the first special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is a small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the first special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33094 in the hit determination value is the set value Regardless, it is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is a small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination value is the set value Regardless, it is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

The set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player. The playability may be changed according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁For example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variable state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball during the jackpot game is a predetermined value provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. While controlling the game state after the end of the jackpot game to a probability variable state based on passing through the switch, the game property (so-called V variable probability type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320 and the probability of a small hit is 1/50, and the game is played during a high base (during time reduction control). A game property (a so-called one-type two-type mixed type) that controls a big hit game state based on the passage of a ball through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 may be employed. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the game performance is the same, but the big win probability and small win probability are higher than when these set values are any one of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high and the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small (for example, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6). A common switch may be used for different purposes when game characteristics are changed according to a set value. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to a production switch (for executing a predetermined production each time a game ball passes through a prescribed area). switch), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is a game switch (for controlling the game state to a variable probability state or a big hit game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the assignment of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios according to the set values based on the assignment of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined with a common ratio regardless of the set value. A set value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by having the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach differ according to a set value. Alternatively, regardless of the setting value, the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach may be common. In addition, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios according to the set values.

(Description of characteristic part regarding setting suggestion effect)
Characteristic portions relating to setting suggestion effects in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described below. In this characteristic portion, it is possible to execute a setting suggesting effect suggesting a set value in the pachinko game machine 1 at a predetermined rate during execution of the variable display.

FIG. 14-1 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S171 of the effect control process processing as the variable display start setting processing. In the variable display start setting process, a stop symbol determination process is executed (step S201). In the stop symbol determination process, a combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the variable display of the decorative symbols, such as the final stop symbol in the variable display of the decorative symbols, is determined. Following the stop symbol determination process, the advance notice effect determination process is executed (step S202). The advance notice effect determination processing makes it possible to decide the advance notice effect included in the advantageous suggesting effect.

After the announcement effect determination process is executed, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step S203). The production control pattern may include a special figure fluctuation time production control pattern, a notice production control pattern, and other control patterns for controlling various production executions. For example, corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command, select one of the prepared special figure variation production control patterns and set it as a usage pattern. Further, one of a plurality of prepared notice effect control patterns may be selected and set as a usage pattern in accordance with the determination result of the notice effect determination process in step S202. In addition, it is not limited to setting a separate production control pattern as the special figure fluctuation time production control pattern and the notice production control pattern, but one production control pattern corresponding to the combination of execution setting of each production is set. There may be.

When the production control pattern is determined by step S203, for example, corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command, the initialization of the production control process timer provided in a predetermined area (production control timer setting unit, etc.) of RAM122 A value is set (step S204). Also, a setting is made to start changing the decoration pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 (step S205). At this time, by transmitting the display control command specified by the display control data included in the production control pattern (special figure fluctuation production control pattern) determined in step S203 to the VDP of the display control unit 123, etc. The variation of the decorative design may be started in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5.

Subsequently, a pending display update setting at the start of variable display is performed (step S206). For example, in the pending display area provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the display part (leftmost display part) corresponding to the pending number "1" is erased (digested), and other pending numbers "2" to The hold display in the display portion corresponding to "4" etc. is moved (shifted) one by one to the left. As a result, the pending display is shifted. In the active display section provided on the screen of the image display device 5, active display corresponding to the erased (extinguished) pending display in the pending display area may be performed. In addition, when the number of pending memories is "0", if the variable display is started immediately based on the occurrence of the first start winning or the second starting winning, the active display area will be displayed without updating the pending display. A setting may be made to update the active display in the . After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2" corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S207), and then the variable display start setting process is terminated.

FIG. 14-2 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S201 of the variable display start setting process as the stop symbol determination process. In the stop symbol determination process, it is determined whether or not the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win is executed (step S221). Whether or not the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win is executed can be determined based on the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern specification command transmitted from the main substrate 11, for example.

When the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win is not executed (step S221; No), the final stop symbol for non-reach or normal reach is determined (step S222), and the stop symbol determination process is terminated. At the time of non-reach, the variable display result becomes "losing". The normal reach includes a case where the variable display result is "big hit" and a case where the variable display result is "loss". In the non-ready-to-win state in which the variable display mode of the decoration design does not become the ready-to-win mode, the fixed decoration design of the non-ready-to-win combination is stop-displayed as the final stop design. The final stop symbol at the time of non-reach is determined so that the "left" and "right" ornamental symbol display areas 5L and 5R are different (mismatched) ornamental symbols. At the time of normal reach when the variable display result is "losing", the determined decorative pattern of the reach-losing combination is stop-displayed as the final stop pattern at the time of reach-losing. The final stop symbol at the time of reach loss is determined so that the "left" and "right" ornamental symbol display areas 5L and 5R have the same (matching) ornamental symbol. At the time of normal reach when the variable display result is "big hit", the determined decoration pattern of the big win combination is stop-displayed as the final stop pattern at the time of the big win. The final stop symbols at the time of the big hit are determined to be the same (matching) decoration symbols in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R.

When the ready-to-win effect of super-ready-to-win is executed (step S221; Yes), the final stop symbol for super-to-win is determined (step S223). At the time of super reach, there are cases where the variable display result is "big hit" and cases where the variable display result is "loss". At the time of super reach when the variable display result is "losing", the determined decoration pattern of the reach losing combination is stop-displayed as the final stop pattern at the time of reaching losing. When the variable display result is "big win", the determined decoration pattern of the big win combination is stop-displayed as the final stop pattern at the time of the big win.

At the time of super reach, regardless of whether the variable display result is "big hit" or "losing", the same (matching) decorative design in the "left" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L and 5R is It is stopped and displayed as a fixed decoration pattern. The left and right decoration patterns that constitute such a reach-losing combination or a big-hit combination are also called reach patterns. Decorative patterns that can be determined as ready-to-win patterns may include a plurality of types of decorative patterns, such as seven types of decorative patterns corresponding to numbers 1 to 7, for example. The decoration pattern corresponding to the number may be only the effect image showing the number, or may be the effect image showing various characters in addition to the number. The ready-to-win pattern is determined as one of a plurality of decorative patterns by referring to a ready-to-win pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the ready-to-win pattern. You should do it like this. The numerical data indicating the random number for determining the ready-to-win pattern may be updated using one or both of the random counter provided in the RAM 122 and the random number circuit 124 .

In the ready-to-win pattern determination table, the number of determination values assigned to the decorative symbols to be ready-to-win symbols may differ depending on whether the variable display result is "losing" or "big win". For example, when the variable display result is "losing", the determination rate of the decoration pattern corresponding to the number 1 is the highest, the number 2, the number 3, the number 4, the number 5, and the number 6. As it becomes, the determination ratio of the decorative design becomes lower, and the determination ratio of the decorative design corresponding to the number 7 becomes the lowest. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a "big hit", the determination rate of the decoration pattern corresponding to the number 1 is the lowest, the number 2, the number 3, the number 4, the number 5, and the number 6. As the number becomes , the ratio of determining the decorative pattern increases, and the determining ratio of the decorative pattern corresponding to the number of 7 becomes the highest. With such a determination ratio setting, when the decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 is stopped and displayed as a ready-to-win pattern, the variable display result is "big win" and the ratio of being controlled to the big win game state is the highest. , 5, 4, 3, and 2, the variable display result when stopped and displayed as a ready-to-win pattern becomes "big hit", and the ratio of control to the big win game state is low. Thus, when the decoration pattern corresponding to the number 1 is stopped and displayed as a ready-to-win pattern, the variable display result becomes "big win", and the ratio of control to the big win game state becomes the lowest. In the ready-to-win pattern determination table, regardless of whether the variable display result is "losing" or "big win", the same number of determination values may be assigned to decorative patterns to be ready-to-win symbols. The number of determination values assigned to each decorative design to be a ready-to-win pattern may be different, or the number of determination values to be assigned may be the same regardless of the decorative design to be a ready-to-win design. Depending on the type of jackpot, the determination ratio of decorative symbols to be ready-to-win symbols may be different.

After step S223, it is determined whether or not the determined ready-to-win pattern is a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 (step S224). At this time, if the reach symbol is a decoration symbol corresponding to a number other than 7 (step S224; No), the stop symbol determination process is terminated. If the ready-to-win pattern is a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 (step S224; Yes), the presence or absence of setting suggestion effect is determined according to whether or not setting suggestion effect is to be executed (step S225). Whether or not the setting suggestion effect is to be executed is determined by referring to a setting suggestion effect execution decision table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the setting suggestion effect execution. You can do so. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the execution of the setting suggestion effect may be updated using one or both of the random counter provided in the RAM 122 and the random number circuit 124 . As the presence/absence of the setting suggesting effect, one of "no effect" in which the setting suggesting effect is not executed, or "with effect" in which the setting suggesting effect is executed is determined.

Based on the result of determination in step S225, it is determined whether or not it is determined to "with effect" for executing the setting suggestion effect (step S226). If it is determined that the setting suggestion effect is not to be executed, that is, "no effect" (step S226; No), the stop symbol determination process is terminated. When it is determined that "there is an effect" (step S226; Yes), the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is specified (step S227). The effect control CPU 120 may receive a setting value notification command transmitted from the main board 11 side when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, and store the notified setting value in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 . Accordingly, in step S227, the set value stored in the RAM 122 may be specified.

Following step S227, after determining the suggested setting pattern (step S228), the stop symbol determination process is terminated. The suggested setting pattern is determined by referring to a suggested setting pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating random values for determining the suggested setting pattern. It should be determined by The numerical data indicating the random number value for setting suggestion pattern determination may be updated using one or both of the random counter provided in the RAM 122 and the random number circuit 124 .

FIG. 14-3 shows a setting example regarding the setting suggestion effect execution determination table. For example, the ROM 121 pre-stores table data constituting a determination table TA01 shown in FIG. 14-3 as a setting suggestion effect execution determination table. In step S225 of the stop symbol determination process, the presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect is determined by referring to the determination table TA01. In the determination table TA01, the number of determination values assigned to the presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect differs depending on whether the variable display result is "losing" or "big win". For example, when the variable display result is "big hit", the determination ratio of "with effect" for executing the setting suggesting effect is higher than when the variable display result is "losing". In the setting of such a determination ratio, when the setting suggesting performance is executed, the variable display result becomes ``big hit'' and the ratio of being controlled to the big winning game state becomes higher than when the setting suggesting performance is not executed. In addition, in the setting suggestion effect execution determination table, the number of judgment values assigned to the presence or absence of setting suggestion effect may be the same regardless of whether the variable display result is "losing" or "big hit". .

FIG. 14-4(A) shows a configuration example of a setting suggestion pattern. In this embodiment, four patterns RE-0 to RE3 are provided as a plurality of setting suggestion patterns. These setting suggestion patterns have different suggested contents depending on whether or not the symbol display color is to be changed, and the display color when it is to be changed. The symbol display color is a display color of a decorative symbol stopped and displayed as a ready-to-win symbol, and can be changed to suggestive display colors including copper color, silver color, and gold color in addition to the normal display color red. The pattern RE-0 does not change the symbol display color, suggesting that the player has a low expectation, which is an advantageous set value. Pattern RE-1 changes the symbol display color to copper, suggesting that the set value is 2 or more. Pattern RE-2 changes the symbol display color to silver, suggesting that the player has a high degree of expectation, which is a set value that is advantageous to the player. Pattern RE-3 changes the symbol display color to gold, suggesting confirmation of 6, which is the highest setting. In this way, in the setting suggestion effect using the ready-to-win pattern, it is possible to suggest the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 according to whether or not the pattern display color has changed and the pattern display color after the change.

FIG. 14-4(B) shows a setting example regarding the setting suggestion pattern determination table. For example, the ROM 121 pre-stores table data constituting a determination table TA11 shown in FIG. 14-4(B) as a suggested setting pattern determination table. In step S228 of the stop symbol determination process, a suggested setting pattern is determined by referring to the determination table TA11. In the determination table TA11, the number of determination values assigned to the determination result of the setting suggestion pattern varies depending on the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG.

When the setting suggesting performance using the ready-to-win pattern is executed, the ready-to-win pattern becomes a decoration pattern corresponding to the number 7, so that the ratio of control to the big win game state is high. When the setting suggesting effect is executed in pattern RE-0, the degree of expectation, which is a setting value advantageous to the player, is low, and when the setting suggesting effect is executed in pattern RE-1, the set value is 2 or more. One thing is certain. In addition, when the setting suggesting performance is executed in the pattern RE-2, the degree of expectation, which is a set value advantageous to the player, is high, and when the setting suggesting performance is executed in the pattern RE-3, the set value is the highest. 6 is determined. In this way, the ready-to-win symbols when the variable display of decorative symbols is the ready-to-win mode include a symbol display mode for suggesting control of the jackpot game state, such as a decorative symbol corresponding to a number other than 7, and a symbol display mode for 7. A pattern display mode for suggesting the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 while suggesting the control of the jackpot game state such as the decoration pattern corresponding to the number is included. When the ready-to-win pattern is a decoration pattern corresponding to the number 7, the ready-to-win pattern is displayed in the normal display color to suggest control of the jackpot game state, and then the pattern display color is changed. Suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot game state are continuously made, and suggestions regarding the set values are made.

The setting-suggestion effect can be executed in different effect modes according to the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加For example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the pattern display color is not changed to copper because the pattern RE-1 is not determined as the suggested setting pattern. Thus, depending on whether or not the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 1, as a pattern display mode when the ready-to-win pattern is a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7, the pattern display color is changed to copper color or not. When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is other than 6, the pattern display color is not changed to gold because the pattern RE-3 is not determined as the suggested setting pattern. Thus, depending on whether the set value set in the pachinko game machine is 6 or not, the symbol display color is changed to gold as the symbol display mode when the ready-to-win symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7. It depends on whether or not it is changed to

The setting suggesting effect is instead of changing the symbol display color, which is the display color of the decoration symbol stopped and displayed as the ready-to-win symbol, or in addition to changing the symbol display color. Any aspect of the reach aspect, such as the shape and pattern of the decoration pattern, may be changed. Alternatively, display of a background image, an outer frame image, or any other effect image, output of sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting of decorative light emitters such as a game effect lamp 9 or a decorative LED, operation of a movable member for effect, and the like. It may be one that changes the rendering mode by any rendering device, such as a combination of some or all. Setting suggestion effects and other arbitrary effects in the pachinko game machine 1 are arbitrary data related to the effect control, arbitrary data not related to the effect control, or data combining these are predetermined for effect execution. It suffices if it can be executed when one or more conditional expressions are satisfied. The effect of changing the symbol display color is also called a change effect.

The plurality of setting suggestion patterns may include a pattern that can be determined only when the game is controlled to the big win game state, and a pattern that can be determined even when the game is not controlled to the big win game state. For example, pattern RE-0 and pattern RE-1 can be determined at a predetermined rate even when the variable display result is "loss", whereas pattern RE-2 and pattern RE-3 are variable display It may be possible to make the decision possible only when the result is a "big hit" and to make the decision impossible when the variable display result is a "loss". In this case, the pattern RE-2 is determined at a common ratio regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, whereas the pattern RE-3 is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be determined in different proportions depending on the current setting.

FIG. 14-5 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S172 of the effect control process process as the effect process during variable display. In the variable display production process, for example, based on the timer value of the production control process timer, it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation time, which is the variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, has elapsed (step S241). When it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S241; No), control is performed to execute various effects as the variable display progresses. The effect control CPU 120 creates various commands based on the control data read from the effect control pattern determined in step S203 of the variable display start setting process. This command is transmitted to the display control unit 123, the audio control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like. As a result, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, a predetermined effect sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED are turned on, off, or blinked. It is sufficient that various effects can be executed by a predetermined effect device by operating a movable member for effect such as the movable body 32, or by combining some or all of them.

In the effect processing during variable display, it is determined whether or not it is the advance notice effect period (step S242). If it is the notice effect period (step S242; Yes), control is performed to execute the notice effect (step S243). If it is not the notice effect period (step S242; No), or after performing the control of step S243, it is determined whether or not it is the ready-to-win effect period (step S244). When it is the ready-to-win effect period (step S244; Yes), control to execute the ready-to-win effect is performed (step S245). By the control of step S245, when the ready-to-win performance after changing the symbol display color is executed after the decoration pattern to be the ready-to-win pattern is stop-displayed, suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot game state are made, and the pachinko game machine 1 is operated. Suggestions regarding settings can be made.

When it is not the ready-to-win effect period (step S244; No), or after performing the control of step S245, it is determined whether or not it is the change effect period (step S246). The change effect period may be determined in advance as an effect execution period for changing the symbol display color when the setting suggestion effect using the ready-to-win pattern is executed. When it is the change effect period (step S246; Yes), control to execute the change effect is performed (step S247). If it is not a change effect period (step S246; No), after performing the control of step S247, for example, based on the setting in the effect control pattern determined corresponding to the variation pattern, etc. In addition, the variable of the decorative pattern After performing control for executing an effect during the variable display including the display operation (step S248), the effect processing during the variable display is terminated.

The change effect period may be set to different time lengths according to the effect mode of the change effect. For example, in the case of pattern RE-0, the change effect period is set to the shortest first period, and in the case of pattern RE-1, the change effect period is set to the second period longer than the first period, and the pattern RE- In the case of pattern 2, the change effect period may be set to the third period longer than the second period, and in the case of pattern RE-3, the change effect period may be set to the longest fourth period. In general, when an effect (advantageous effect) is executed, the player shoots an image or video of the effect with a portable terminal owned by the player, and sends it to SNS (Social There is a tendency to post on membership registration websites such as Networking Service and Internet video supply sites. However, if the execution period of such an advantageous effect is short, there arises a problem that an appropriate photographing time cannot be secured. On the other hand, the effect (unfavorable effect) that is often performed even in a disadvantageous situation does not arouse the desire to shoot, so if the execution period of the disadvantageous effect is long, the player will rather feel uncomfortable. There is a problem. Therefore, the execution period of advantageous effects is lengthened to secure the photographing time, and the execution period of disadvantageous effects is made shorter than that of advantageous effects to reduce discomfort. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking an effect that is advantageous to the player, and to secure the shooting time. In addition, since the photographing time can be secured, the photographed images and moving images are made public by the players on the Internet, and public interest in the pachinko game machine 1 can be heightened. In addition, in many cases, since the images including which pachinko game machine 1 in which game hall were photographed are disclosed, from the game hall side, the game hall is advertised by the player. become. In this way, by securing the photographing time when the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 is suggested, a synergistic effect is brought about not only to the player but also to the game arcade side.

When the variable display time has elapsed (step S241; Yes), it is determined whether or not a design confirmation command transmitted from the main substrate 11 has been received (step S249). If no pattern confirmation command is received (step S249; No), the effect process during variable display is terminated and the game waits. After the variable display time elapses, if a predetermined time elapses without receiving the design confirmation command, predetermined error processing is executed in response to the fact that the design confirmation command could not be received normally. You may do so. When the design determination command is received (step S249; Yes), control is performed to derive and display the final stop design (determined decoration design) which is the display result in the variable display of the decoration design (step S250). Subsequently, a certain period of time is set in advance as a wait time for receiving a command specifying the start of a big hit (step S251). Also, after updating the value of the effect process flag to "3", which is the value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step S252), the effect process during variable display is terminated.

FIG. 14-6 shows an execution example of the setting suggestion effect. FIG. 14-6(A) shows an effect execution example HD101 in which the form of the variable display of decorative symbols is the ready-to-win mode and the ready-to-win is established. When the decoration pattern corresponding to the number 7 is stopped and displayed in the "left" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L and 5R, the ready-to-win is established and the ready-to-win performance of the normal ready-to-win is executed. FIG. 14-6(B) shows an effect execution example HD102 in which the ready-to-win effect of the normal reach is advanced to the ready-to-win effect of the super ready-to-win. On the display screen of the image display device 5, the decoration pattern is displayed in a reduced size, and the effect image in the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win is displayed. FIG. 14-6(C) shows an effect execution example HD103 in which a change effect as a setting suggestion effect is executed. A performance display corresponding to the change performance is displayed superimposed on the stop-displayed ready-to-win pattern. In addition, by displaying an effect image announcing a message such as "Change the symbol display color!", a suggestion to change the symbol display color is made.

FIG. 14-6 (D1) shows an effect execution example HD111 in which the pattern display color does not change due to the pattern RE-0. FIG. 14-6 (D2) shows an effect execution example HD112 in which the pattern display color changes to copper by the pattern RE-1. FIG. 14-6 (D3) shows an effect execution example HD113 in which the symbol display color changes to silver by the pattern RE-2. FIG. 14-6 (D4) shows an effect execution example HD113 in which the symbol display color changes to gold according to the pattern RE-3. In the effect execution example HD111, the display color of the ready-to-win pattern does not change due to the pattern RE-0, and remains red, which is the normal display color. In this way, a failure effect (fake effect) in which the symbol display color is not changed is executed, suggesting that the player's expectation, which is a set value advantageous to the player, is low. In effect execution example HD112, pattern RE-1 changes the display color of the ready-to-win pattern to copper, suggesting that the set value is 2 or more. In effect execution example HD113, pattern RE-2 changes the display color of the ready-to-win pattern to silver, suggesting that the player has a high expectation, which is a set value that is advantageous to the player. In effect execution example HD114, pattern RE-3 changes the display color of the ready-to-win symbol to gold, suggesting that 6, which is the highest set value, is fixed.

The setting suggesting effect suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit by any desired effect such as a pseudo-continuous effect or a pre-reading notice effect, in addition to a change effect in which the display color of the ready-to-win pattern can be changed, and the set value of the pachinko game machine 1. You may enable it to make a suggestion about. It may be an effect in which the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be suggested after the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state is performed during execution of the variable display. In the case of executing an arbitrary performance, a case where the suggestion regarding the control of the big win game state is continuously made after making the suggestion concerning the control of the big win game state, or the suggestion concerning the control of the big win game state is continuously made and the pachinko game is performed. It may also include a case of suggesting a set value of the gaming machine 1 . In the case of executing an arbitrary performance, after making a suggestion about the control of the big win game state, when the suggestion ends, and when the suggestion about the control of the big win game state is continued and the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 is made. It may include a case of making a suggestion.

The suggestion about the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to suggesting the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and may be, for example, suggesting whether or not the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. . For example, the plurality of setting suggestion patterns may include patterns with different determination ratios depending on whether the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 have been changed. When the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed, the effect is made so that the player can recognize that the setting value has been changed by suggesting the effect mode of the pattern determined at a high rate. can be diversified to improve amusement.

During execution of the variable display, suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot game state may be made, while suggestions regarding the set values of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may not be made. After that, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the pachinko machine executes a big hit start effect (fanfare effect) and a big hit effect (such as a effect corresponding to the first round and the second round). A setting value of 1 may be suggested. There may be a case where the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is suggested without suggesting the control of the jackpot game state.

In place of part or all of the suggestion about the control of the big win game state, or together with part or all of the suggestion about the control of the big win game state, a suggestion about control of a state advantageous to the player different from the big win game state is provided. can be anything. For example, it may suggest a variable probability state to be controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state. In addition, as the advantageous state, a suggestion may be made according to whether or not control is to be performed regarding a state in which an arbitrary game value that is advantageous to the player is awarded.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 10SH)
Next, the characterizing portion 10SH of this embodiment will be described.

The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 10SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player, as described above.

The gaming machine related to the characteristic portion 10SH includes operation means that can be operated by the player. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like.

The gaming machine relating to the characteristic portion 10SH includes vibration effect executing means capable of executing a vibration effect in which the operation means vibrates. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a vibration effect in which the push button 31B vibrates.

The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 10SH includes a line-of-sight guidance effect executing means capable of executing a line-of-sight guidance effect for guiding the player's line of sight to the operation means. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a line-of-sight guidance effect that guides the player's line of sight to the push button 31B.

The game machine according to the characteristic part 10SH is expected to be controlled in an advantageous state when the vibration effect is executed rather than when the vibration effect is not executed. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 has a higher jackpot reliability when the vibration performance is executed than when the vibration performance is not executed.

The vibration effect executing means related to the characteristic portion 10SH can execute the vibration effect at the first timing and at the second timing after the first timing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 is the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started, the timing T2 when the reach is established, and the normal reach after the timing T1 and the timing T2. The vibration performance can be executed at any one of the timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-win performance and the timing T4 during execution of the super ready-to-win performance.

The vibration effect executing means related to the characteristic portion 10SH can execute the vibration effect in a common manner regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 pushes the push button 31B regardless of whether it is timing T1 or timing T2 or timing T3 or timing T4. Vibration production can be executed in a mode in which the vibration time and the luminescent color are common.

The line-of-sight guidance effect executing means related to the characteristic portion 10SH does not execute the line-of-sight guidance effect at the first timing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the line-of-sight guidance effect at the timing T1 and the timing T2.

The line-of-sight guidance effect executing means related to the characteristic portion 10SH can execute the line-of-sight guidance effect before the vibration effect is executed at the second timing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the line-of-sight guidance effect before the vibration effect is executed at the timing T3 and the timing T4.

The vibration effect executing means related to the characteristic part 10SH can execute the vibration effect when the visual guidance effect is being executed. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the vibration effect when the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed.

The game machine related to the characteristic part 10SH includes a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect different from the vibration effect and the line-of-sight guidance effect. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the reach effect of super reach.

The vibration effect executing means related to the characteristic part 10SH can execute the vibration effect when the specific effect is being executed. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the vibration effect when the reach effect of super reach is being executed.

The gaming machine related to the characteristic portion 10SH includes display means for displaying. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 includes an image display device 5 that displays various effect images.

The display of the line-of-sight guidance effect related to the characteristic portion 10SH has a lower priority than the display of the predetermined information and a higher priority than the display of information different from the predetermined information. For example, the performance image of the line-of-sight guidance effect has a lower priority than the constant small pattern, the pending number display, and various error notifications, and has a higher priority than the pending display, the active display, the background image, and the decoration pattern.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 15-1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the characteristic portion 10SH, showing the arrangement layout of the main members.

The push button 31B is made of a translucent member, and a game effect lamp 9B for game effects is provided inside the push button 31B. According to such a configuration, the push button 31B can be illuminated by turning on the game effect lamp 9B.

Further, the push button 31B is configured to vibrate by being driven by the vibration motor 131. As shown in FIG. The vibration motor 131 is composed of, for example, an eccentric motor in which a weight with a biased center of gravity is provided on the motor shaft, and is provided inside or close to the push button 31B. In addition, a plurality of vibration motors 131 may be provided in order to diversify the vibration mode of the push button 31B.

Game effect lamps 9L and 9R for game effects are provided at predetermined positions of the game machine frame 3 below the game area. The game effect lamp 9L is provided on the left side of the push button 31B and extends left and right from the center of the pachinko game machine 1 toward the outside. Similarly, the game effect lamp 9R is provided on the right side of the push button 31B and extends left and right from the center of the pachinko game machine 1 toward the outside. A plurality of LEDs are built in the game effect lamps 9L and 9R along the extending direction of the game effect lamps 9L and 9R.

(Substrate configuration)
FIG. 15-2 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like installed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the characteristic portion 10SH.

The display control unit 123 supplies a lamp signal to the lamp control board 14 in order to turn on/off the game effect lamps 9B, 9L, and 9R in synchronization with the display of the effect image. The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamps 9B, 9L and 9R. The lamps 9B, 9L, and 9R are turned on/off. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls lighting/extinguishing of the lamp. It should be noted that the lighting/extinguishing control of the lamp may be executed by the effect control CPU 120 .

The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a motor control board 130, for example. The display control unit 123 supplies a motor signal to the motor control board 130 in order to drive the vibration motor 131 in synchronization with the display of the effect image. The motor control board 130 is equipped with various circuits for driving the vibration motor 131, and drives the vibration motor 131 in a manner specified by the motor signal. The display control unit 123 controls the vibration motor 131 in this way. Note that the control of the vibration motor 131 may be executed by the effect control CPU 120 .

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 15-3 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing related to the characteristic portion 10SH. The effect control CPU 120 executes the process shown in FIG. 15-3 in the variable display start setting process of FIG.

First, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final stop symbol based on the variation pattern of the variable display to be executed from now on and the display result of the variable display to be executed from now on (step 10SHS1). A variation pattern and a display result are transmitted from the main substrate 11 at the start of the variable display and specified by the effect control command analyzed by the command analysis process. The final stop pattern is prepared in advance in the ROM 121 according to the combination of the variation pattern and the display result, and is determined by lottery or the like. Lottery here refers to a determination method based on random numbers and a table prepared in advance in the ROM 121 . As the random number value, one of random numbers for effect updated by the random number circuit 124 or random number update process for effect is used.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the vibration effect, and the execution pattern of the vibration effect when executing the vibration effect (step 10SHS2). The vibration effect is a effect in which the push button 31B vibrates. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute a vibration effect that does not interlock with the notice effect. In the process of step 10SHS2, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the vibration effect, and the execution pattern of the vibration effect when executing the vibration effect, by means of a random number and a lottery based on a table prepared in advance in the ROM 121. decide.

In the table referred to in the lottery of step 10SHS2, when the vibration performance is executed, the reliability of the big win becomes higher than when the vibration performance is not executed, and when the vibration performance is executed, the reliability of the big win depends on the execution pattern of the vibration performance. is different, the determination value to be compared with the random value may be assigned to the determination result of the presence or absence of the vibration performance and the execution pattern of the vibration performance when the vibration performance is executed.

Here, the reliability of a certain effect A is, for example, (the probability that the effect A will be executed when the display result is a “big hit”)×(the probability that the display result will be a “big hit”)/{(display result Probability that production A will be executed when is a "jackpot") x (Probability that the display result will be a "jackpot") + (Probability that production A will be executed when the display result is not a "jackpot") x ( Probability that the display result will not be a "big hit")}.

Therefore, in the table referred to in the lottery of step 10SHS2, the vibration effect of each execution pattern is displayed when the display result is "big win" so that the reliability of the big win corresponding to the execution pattern of the vibration effect becomes a predetermined value. It is sufficient if the probability of execution and the probability of execution of the vibration effect of each execution pattern when the display result is not a "big win" are defined.

(Details of vibration production and reliability of jackpot)
FIG. 15-4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the vibration effect and the reliability of the big win. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment executes patterns SE1 to SE1 in accordance with the combination of the execution timing of the vibration effect, the vibration time of the push button 31B due to the vibration effect, and the light emission color of the push button 31B due to the vibration effect. A plurality of types of vibration effects of SE10 can be executed.

The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effect at either the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started or the timing T2 when the ready-to-win state is established. That is, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the vibration effect at the timing T2 when the ready-to-win state is established, when executing the vibration effect at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. Also, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the vibration effect at the timing T2 when the ready-to-win state is established, the vibration effect is not executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effect of the execution patterns SE1 to SE3 as the vibration effect at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. Moreover, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effect of the execution pattern SE4 as the vibration effect at the timing T2 when the ready-to-win state is established.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment is, after the timing T1 and the timing T2, the timing T3 during execution of the reach effect of normal reach and the timing T4 during execution of reach effect of super reach. Vibration effect can be executed at any of the timings. That is, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the vibration effect at the timing T4 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of the super ready-to-win when executing the vibration effect at the timing T3 when the ready-to-win effect of the normal reach is being executed. Further, the performance control CPU 120 does not execute the vibration performance at timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-win performance of normal reach when executing the vibration performance at timing T4 during execution of ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win. The production control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration production of the execution patterns SE5 to SE7 as the vibration production at the timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-win production of normal reach. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effect of the execution patterns SE8 to SE10 as the vibration effect at the timing T4 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of super reach.

According to such a configuration, since the vibrating effect may be executed while the ready-to-win effect of the super reach is being executed, it is possible to improve the amusement.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment is the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started, the timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of normal reach, or the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win is being executed. , irrespective of whether it is the timing T4 or not, a vibration production in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white, and a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated and a vibrating effect in which the is illuminated in red. The production control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration productions of the execution patterns SE1, SE5, and SE8 as vibration productions in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white. is. In addition, the production control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration productions of the execution patterns SE2, SE6, and SE9 as vibration productions in which the push button 31B is vibrated for three seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red. is.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment vibrates the push button 31B for three seconds and causes the push button 31B to emit light in rainbow colors regardless of the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed. Vibration production can be executed. The production control CPU 120 of this embodiment executes the vibration production of execution patterns SE3, SE4, SE7, and SE10 as a vibration production in which the push button 31B is vibrated for three seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in rainbow colors. It is possible.

In this embodiment, the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and vibrates for 3 seconds more than when the vibration effect of vibrating the push button 31B for 1.5 seconds and causing the push button 31B to emit white light is executed. The reliability of the big hit is higher when the vibration performance is executed in which the push button 31B emits red light. Further, in this embodiment, the reliability of the vibrating effect of vibrating the push button 31B for 3 seconds and lighting the push button 31B in rainbow colors is 100%, and the display result is "big hit". to be reported deterministically.

According to such a configuration, when the push button 31B vibrates, attention can be paid to what color the push button 31B emits light and how many seconds the push button 31B vibrates.

Further, in this embodiment, when the vibration effect of vibrating the push button 31B for 1.5 seconds and causing the push button 31B to emit white light is executed, and when the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and is pushed When the vibration effect of making the button 31B emit red light is executed, the reliability of the big hit differs depending on the execution timing of the vibration effect. For example, even if the vibration effect is the same mode, it is better to execute it at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started than when it is executed at the timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of the normal reach. Highly reliable. Further, even if the vibration effect of the same mode is executed, it is executed at the timing T4 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win, rather than at the timing T1 at which the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. , The reliability of the jackpot is high.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to heighten expectations for the execution of the vibration effect at the timing T1 at which the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. Further, when the mode of variable display of decorative patterns becomes a predetermined ready-to-win mode when the vibration effect is not executed at timing T1, the ready-to-reach effect of super ready-to-win is performed instead of the ready-to-reach effect of normal reach at time T3 during execution of the ready-to-reach effect. It is possible to heighten expectations for the execution of the vibration presentation at timing T4 during execution. Then, when the vibrating performance is not actually executed at the timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-win performance of the normal reach, the expectation for the execution of the vibration performance at the timing T4 during execution of the ready-to-reach performance of the super ready-to-reach is heightened. be able to.

Incidentally, the reliability of the big hit of the vibrating effect that can be executed at the timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of the normal reach should be higher than the reliability of the normal reach. In addition, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of ready-to-win productions of normal reach, and if the reliability of the big hit differs depending on the type of ready-to-win production of normal reach, the reliability of the big hit of vibration production that can be executed at timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-win production of normal reach is , it may be higher than the hit reliability of the ready-to-win performance of the normal reach executed at that time, or higher than the hit reliability of any kind of ready-to-win performance of the normal reach.

Similarly, the reliability of the big hit of the vibrating effect that can be executed at the timing T4 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of the super-reach should be higher than the reliability of the super-ready-to-win. Further, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of ready-to-win performances of super ready-to-win, and when the reliability of the big hit differs depending on the type of ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win, the big hit of vibrating performance to be executed at timing T4 during execution of the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win. The reliability should be higher than the big win reliability of the ready-to-win performance of the super ready-to-win being executed at that time, or higher than the big-hit reliability of any kind of ready-to-win performance of the super ready-to-win.

According to such a configuration, the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of the normal reach and the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing T4 during execution of the ready-to-reach effect of the super ready-to-win can be regarded as the chance-up effect. can do.

Further, in this embodiment, when the vibration effect is executed at the timing T2 when reach is established, the vibration effect is always executed in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in rainbow colors. Then, it is definitely notified that the display result will be a "jackpot".

According to such a configuration, it is possible to heighten expectations for the execution of the vibration effect at the timing T2 when the ready-to-win state is established, not at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. Then, when the vibration performance is actually not executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started, the expectation for the execution of the vibration performance at the timing T2 when the ready-to-win is established can be further heightened.

As described above, in this embodiment, it is possible to intricately change the sense of expectation for the execution of the vibration effect as the variable display of the decoration pattern progresses.

In addition, the probability of executing the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B emits light in rainbow colors is sufficiently low compared to the probability of executing the vibration effect of other modes. By stipulating, it is possible to heighten interest when it is definitely reported that the display result will be a "big hit".

Further, in this embodiment, when the push button 31B is vibrated as a vibration effect, the push button 31B is always illuminated.

With such a configuration, it is possible to visually recognize that the push button 31B is vibrating, and increase the chances of recognizing that the push button 31B is vibrating.

Returning to the description of FIG. 15-3, after that, according to the determination result of step 10SHS2, the effect control CPU 120 controls the timing T3 during execution of the normal reach reach effect and the super reach effect in this variable display. It is determined whether or not to execute the vibration effect at the timing T4 during execution or not (step 10SHS3).

Then, when the vibration effect is executed at one of the timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of normal reach and the timing T4 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of super reach (step 10SHS3; Yes), effect The control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the line-of-sight guidance effect (step 10SHS4). The line-of-sight guidance effect is a effect for guiding the player's line of sight to the push button 31B. In the processing of step 10SHS4, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the line-of-sight guidance effect by means of a random number and a lottery based on a table prepared in the ROM 121 in advance. In the table referred to in the process of step 10SHS4, the determination ratio of presence/absence of visual guidance effect is set regardless of which mode of vibration effect is executed. In other words, the effect control CPU 120 determines presence or absence of the line-of-sight guidance effect at the same rate regardless of which mode the current vibration effect is.

Thus, in this embodiment, when the vibration effect is executed at either timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of normal reach or timing T4 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win. In addition, it is possible to execute the line-of-sight guidance effect.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the push button 31B before the vibration effect is executed, so that the excitement of the vibration effect can be sufficiently enhanced.

On the other hand, when the vibration performance is executed at one of the timing T1 at which the variable display of the decoration pattern is started and the timing T2 at which the ready-to-win state is established, the visual guidance performance is not executed.

Here, when the display result is derived and displayed, the true display result may be derived and displayed after the display result of "missing" is displayed. Therefore, even though the display result of the previous variable display is derived and displayed and the current variable display is started, when the visual guidance effect is executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started, There is a possibility of causing a misunderstanding as if a relief effect was being executed in the previous variable display. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started, such misunderstanding can be prevented.

Also, if the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed at the timing T2 at which the ready-to-win state is established, there is a possibility that it may not be possible to appropriately recognize that the state of variable display of decorative symbols has become the predetermined ready-to-win state. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed at the timing T2 when the ready-to-win state is established, it is possible to properly recognize that the state of variable display of the decoration pattern has become the predetermined ready-to-win state. .

Returning to the description of FIG. 15-3, when the vibration effect is not executed at one of the timing T3 during execution of the reach effect of normal reach and the timing T4 during execution of reach effect of super reach ( Step 10SHS3; No) or after executing the process of step 10SHS4, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not other effects such as ready-to-win effects are to be executed, and the mode of the effect to be executed (step 10SHS5). Specifically, whether or not various effects such as advance notice effects are to be executed and the mode thereof are determined by lottery. At this time, by varying the decision ratio in the lottery according to the display result of this time, the fluctuation pattern of this time, etc., the reliability of the big win can be varied according to the presence or absence of execution of the advance notice performance or the like and its mode. Also, when the current pattern designates reach, it is determined to execute the reach effect designated by the variation pattern.

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 sets the start timing of the effect determined to be executed (10SHS6). Specifically, the production control CPU120 sets the timer value corresponding to the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to this fluctuation pattern as an initial value to the production control process timer, and the type and mode of production determined to be executed. is stored in a timer value storage area of RAM 122 in association with an execution timing specific timer value that indicates the execution timing of the production by comparison with the timer value of the production control process timer. When there are a plurality of effects determined to be executed, the effect control CPU 120 stores the effect specifying data and the execution timing specific timer value in the timer value storage area for each effect.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 supplies to the display control unit 123 an instruction to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols for deriving the mode specified by the current variation pattern and the determined final stop symbol (10SHS7). The display control unit 123 receives the instruction and starts variable display of the decoration pattern. At this time, the display corresponding to the variable display may be updated.

Thereafter, after updating the value of the effect process flag to "2" (step 10SHS8), the variable display start setting process is terminated.

(Execution timing and production period of vibration production and gaze guidance production)
FIG. 15-5 is a diagram showing an example of execution timings and presentation periods of the vibration presentation and the line-of-sight guidance presentation. As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the vibration effect at either the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started or the timing T2 when the ready-to-win state is established. In addition, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 executes the vibration effect at one of the timing T3 during execution of the normal reach effect and the timing T4 during execution of the super reach effect. It is possible.

In addition, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 executes the vibration effect at one of the timing T3 during execution of the normal reach effect and the timing T4 during execution of the super reach effect. In that case, it is possible to execute the visual guidance effect before that.

The performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment starts the visual guidance performance four seconds before the timing T3 when executing the visual guidance performance before executing the vibration performance at the timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-win performance of the normal reach. , the vibration performance is started when the timing T3 comes. Similarly, the production control CPU 120 of this embodiment executes the visual guidance production before executing the vibration production at the timing T4 during execution of the ready-to-win production of super reach, four seconds before the timing T4. Performance is started, and vibration performance is started when timing T4 comes. The production period of the line-of-sight guidance production in this embodiment is 5 seconds. Therefore, the vibration effect is executed for the first second while the visual guidance effect is being executed.

According to such a configuration, since the sense of unity between the vibration effect and the line-of-sight guidance effect is generated, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

(Example of production operation)
FIGS. 15-6 and 15-7 are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of the vibration effect and the line-of-sight guidance effect. In this production operation example, an example in which the vibration production is executed at timing T4 during execution of the ready-to-win production of super reach will be described.

The effect control CPU 120 can execute a plurality of types of reach effect of super reach. The effect control CPU 120 displays a background image corresponding to the type of super reach in the reach effect of super reach. In this example, as shown in FIG. 15-6(A), a background image 10SHY of "mountain scenery" is displayed as the background image corresponding to the type of super reach.

In addition, when the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win is started, the effect control CPU 120 reduces and displays the decoration pattern that was stop-displayed when the ready-to-win was established. In this example, as shown in FIG. 15-6(A), the "left" ready-to-win decorative pattern 10SH5L is obtained by reducing the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the "left" decorative design display area 5L when the ready-to-win is established. , and a "right" ready-to-win decorative pattern 10SH5R that is reduced from the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the "right" decorative design display area 5R when the ready-to-win is established.

A small pattern display area 10SHK smaller than the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R is provided at the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5. In the small pattern display area 10SHK, variable display of small patterns is performed in synchronization with variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns. The effect image showing the small pattern is also called a notification information image. Therefore, in the small symbol display area 10SHK provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the effect image showing the small symbol as the notification information image is variably displayed, and the effect image showing the confirmed small symbol as the display result is displayed. derived.

In this manner, on the screen of the image display device 5, a variable display of a small pattern different from the decoration pattern is performed. During the period from the start of the variable display of the decoration pattern to the derivation of the fixed decoration pattern as the display result, the variable display of the small pattern is continuously performed in a fixed display mode, and the small pattern disappears from the screen or is obstructed. It is not shielded by Therefore, the small symbol display area 10SHK is configured to be always visible, and the player can always visually recognize the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display area 10SHK. The small patterns that are variably displayed in the small pattern display area 10SHK are also called constant small patterns or small patterns for performance. In the small pattern display area 10SHK, for example, in a display mode that is partially or wholly common to each of a plurality of types of decorative patterns, such as a pattern that indicates numbers in the same manner as the part that indicates numbers in the decorative pattern, a plurality of identifiable An effect image showing the type of small symbol may be variably displayed as the notification information image. It should be noted that the small symbols may be displayed only when the decorative symbols are not displayed. For example, after the variable display of decorative patterns is displayed in the reach mode, the variable display of small patterns is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. may be displayed in the lower left corner of the

In addition, a special pattern, a decorative pattern, and a fourth pattern next to the normal pattern are provided, and the variable display of the fourth pattern may be performed in synchronization with the variable display of the special pattern and the decorative pattern. The variable display of the fourth pattern is, for example, in a fourth pattern display area provided on or outside the screen of the image display device 5, and repeats display and non-display in a specific display color at regular time intervals. This is achieved by continuing display control. However, the display result of the variable display of the small symbols may be displayed in a manner that the player can easily recognize when compared with the display result of the variable display of the fourth symbol.

Also, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are, for example, as shown in FIG. are placed at a distance. Therefore, the player who pays attention to the effect by the display on the image display device 5 becomes difficult to confirm the display state of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the variable display of the special symbols progresses. It may be difficult to recognize whether it is in progress or whether the display result has been derived. On the other hand, small patterns are variably displayed in the small pattern display area 10SHK provided on the screen of the image display device 5, and by deriving the display result, it is possible to determine whether the variable display is in progress, Whether or not the display result is derived can be displayed in a manner that the player can easily recognize.

In this example, a suspended display area 10SHH for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended, and an active display area 10SHA for displaying active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. , is displayed. Incidentally, when the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win is being executed, the reservation display area 10SHH and the active display area 10SHA may not be displayed.

A pending number display area 10SHHS is provided at the left corner of the screen of the image display device 5 . In the reserved number display area 10SHHS, similarly to the reserved display area 10SHH, the reserved number of variable display of the decoration pattern corresponding to the special game is displayed so as to be identifiable. The display mode is a mode displayed in Arabic numerals.

Then, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 executes the line-of-sight guidance effect four seconds before the timing T4 during execution of the reach effect of super reach. The effect control CPU 120 executes, as the line-of-sight guidance effect, an effect of guiding the player's line of sight to the push button 31B by using a visual effect, for example.

In this example, the effect control CPU 120 first displays a character image 10SHC imitating a character holding a hammer and a button image 10SHB imitating the push button 31B, as shown in FIG. 15-6(B). do.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 changes the aspect of the character image 10SHC so that the character swings up the hammer as shown in FIGS. 15-6(B) to (D). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 turns on the LEDs built in the game effect lamps 9L and 9R, as shown in FIGS. Light so that the light spot moves from the inside to the outside.

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 changes the character image 10SHC so that the character swings down the hammer as shown in FIGS. 15-7(E) and (F). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 turns on the LEDs built in the game effect lamps 9L and 9R in accordance with the action of the character swinging down the hammer, as shown in FIGS. Light so that the light spot moves from the outside to the inside.

After that, as shown in FIG. 15-7(G), the effect control CPU 120 causes the hammer swung down by the character to hit the button image 10SHB at the timing T4, and the button image 10SHB to simulate a plurality of stars. The various images are changed so that the "star" effect image 10SHS is scattered. In addition, as shown in FIG. 15-7 (G), the effect control CPU 120 starts the vibration effect at the timing T4, vibrates the push button 31B, and is built in the push button 31B. The game effect lamp 9B and the game effect lamps 9L and 9R are turned on.

Then, one second after the timing T4, the effect control CPU 120 ends the line-of-sight guidance effect, as shown in FIG. 15-7(H). After that, when the vibration time of the push button 31B by the vibration effect has passed, the effect control CPU 120 ends the vibration effect, stops the vibration of the push button 31B, and the game effect lamp built in the push button 31B. 9B and the game effect lamps 9L and 9R are turned off.

Here, the push button 31B is provided at a position away from the display screen of the image display device 5, for example, below the game area of the pachinko game machine 1, as shown in FIG. 15-1. Therefore, it becomes difficult for a player who pays attention to the display effect on the image display device 5 to check the state of the push button 31B. It can be difficult to recognize whether On the other hand, by executing the line-of-sight guidance effect on the screen of the image display device 5 before the vibration effect is executed, it is possible to make the user pay attention to the push button 31B before the push button 31B vibrates. The vibration of the button 31B can be favorably recognized, and the interest of the vibration presentation can be sufficiently enhanced.

In addition, the priority of the display of the line-of-sight guidance effect is always set lower than the small pattern and the display of the number of reservations. This priority setting can be realized by displaying a line-of-sight guidance effect in a layer on the back side of the layer that always displays the small patterns and the display of the number of reservations among the plurality of layers.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 15-7(G), the "star" effect image 10SHS is always displayed on the back side of the small pattern displayed in the small pattern display area 10SHK. It can be said that the effect image 10SHS of the "star", which is the display of , always has a lower priority than the small pattern.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 15-7 (G), the effect image 10SHS of the "star" is displayed on the back side from the display of the number of reservations displayed in the number of reservations display area 10SHHS, and the line of sight It can be said that the effect image 10SHS of the "star", which is the display of the induction effect, has a lower priority than the display of the number of reservations.

On the other hand, the priority of the visual guidance effect display is set higher than the pending display, the active display, the background image, and the decoration pattern. This priority setting can be realized by displaying a line-of-sight guidance effect in a layer on the front side of a layer that displays a background image or a decorative pattern among a plurality of layers.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 15-6(B) to 15-7(G), the character image 10SHC and the button image 10SHB are displayed in front of the background image 10SHY of "mountain scenery". It can be said that the character image 10SHC and the button image 10SHB, which are displays for the visual guidance effect, have a higher priority than the background image 10SHY of the "mountain scenery".

In this example, as shown in FIG. 15-6(D), the hammer of the character image 10SHC is displayed in front of the "left" reach decoration pattern 10SH5L and the "right" reach decoration pattern 10SH5R. It can be said that the character image 10SHC, which is the display of the line-of-sight guidance effect, has a higher priority than the "left" ready-to-win decoration symbol 10SH5L and the "right" ready-to-win decoration symbol 10SH5R.

Also, in this example, as shown in FIG. 15-6(D), a "star" effect image 10SHS is displayed in front of the "left" reach decoration pattern 10SH5L and the "right" reach decoration pattern 10SH5R. Therefore, it can be said that the effect image 10SHS of the "star", which is the display of the line-of-sight guidance effect, has a higher priority than the "left" reach decoration pattern 10SH5L and the "right" reach decoration pattern 10SH5R.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 15-6(G), the "star" effect image 10SHS is displayed on the front side of the suspension display displayed in the suspension display area 10SHH, and the line of sight guidance effect It can be said that the effect image 10SHS of the "star", which is the display of , has a higher priority than the reserved display.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 15-6(G), the effect image 10SHS of "star" is displayed in front of the active display displayed in the active display area 10SHA, and the line of sight guidance effect is displayed. It can be said that the effect image 10SHS of the "star", which is the display of , has a higher priority than the active display.

According to such a configuration, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed, the visibility of the line-of-sight guidance effect can be made conspicuous while always suitably ensuring the visibility of the small pattern and the display of the number of reservations.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 15-6(B) to 15-7(G), when the visual guidance effect is being executed, the Also, the display of small patterns and the number of pending items, which have high priority, are displayed brightly, and the other displays are displayed darkly.

According to such a configuration, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed, the visibility of the line-of-sight guidance effect can be made more conspicuous while always ensuring the visibility of the small pattern and the display of the number of reservations more preferably. .

(Modified example of characteristic portion 10SH)
The invention relating to the characteristic portion 10SH is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the invention.

For example, in the table referred to in the process of step 10SHS4 in FIG. 15-3, the determination ratio of presence/absence of visual guidance effect may be set according to which mode of vibration effect is to be executed. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the current vibration effect is a vibrating effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white, or the push button 31B is held for 3 seconds. Depending on whether the vibration effect is a mode in which the push button 31B is vibrated for three seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red, or the vibration effect is a mode in which the push button 31B is vibrated for three seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in rainbow colors. The presence or absence of the line-of-sight guidance effect may be determined at different ratios. Here, when the vibrating effect is executed in which the push button 31B is vibrated for three seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red, it is easy to execute the visual guidance effect. Also, when the vibration effect of vibrating the push button 31B for 3 seconds and causing the push button 31B to emit light in rainbow colors is executed, the visual guidance effect is always executed. In other words, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed, the execution ratio of the vibration effect with a higher jackpot reliability is higher than when it is not executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the sense of expectation for the execution of the vibration effect with the higher reliability of the big win by executing the visual guidance effect.

The effect control CPU 120 may be configured to be able to execute a vibration effect interlocking with the advance notice effect. In this case, as the vibration effect interlocked with the notice effect, a plurality of types are available according to the combination of the interlocking notice effect, the vibration time of the push button 31B due to the vibration effect, and the emission color of the push button 31B due to the vibration effect. may be executable. The performance control CPU 120 can execute a performance foretelling the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed, depending on the operation mode of the movable body 32 . Then, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a vibration effect interlocking with the highly reliable character object announcement effect. This vibration effect is a effect of vibrating the push button 31B in synchronism with the movement of the movable body 32 and causing the push button 31B to emit white light. Incidentally, in this case, the reliability of the big hit of the vibration production should be higher than the reliability of the big win of the interlocking character product announcement production. According to such a configuration, the vibration effect can be used as a chance-up effect in the character object announcement effect.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 may be capable of executing a vibration effect interlocking with another highly reliable advance notice effect. This vibration effect is a effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated in synchronization with the image displayed in the advance notice effect, and the push button 31B emits white light. In this case, the reliability of the vibration performance should be higher than the reliability of the announcement performance to be linked. According to such a configuration, the vibration effect can be a chance-up effect in the advance notice effect.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, after the finalized decoration pattern that becomes the jackpot combination is derived, the game balls pass through a specific area provided in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as a specific passage gate or winning opening. By doing so, a big hit game state may be started. In that case, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a round lottery effect for notifying the upper limit number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot game state when a game ball passing through a specific area is detected. The effect control CPU 120 may be capable of executing a vibration effect interlocking with the round lottery effect. This vibration performance is a mode of vibrating the push button 31B for 3 seconds and lighting the push button 31B in white when the upper limit number of rounds is notified in the round lottery performance, and is executed in the jackpot game state. It notifies that the upper limit number of rounds to be played is not the minimum number of rounds among the multiple options. Alternatively, as the vibration performance, when the upper limit number of rounds is notified in the round lottery performance, the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in rainbow colors to achieve a big hit. The upper limit number of rounds to be executed in the gaming state may be definitely notified that the number of rounds is the highest among the plurality of options. According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase attention to the vibration effect linked with the round lottery effect.

The effect control CPU 120 may be capable of executing error notification processing. In the error notification process, when an error command notifying the occurrence of an error is received from the main board 11 or when an error is detected in the performance control board 12, error notification corresponding to the error is executed. In the error notification process, when an error is detected, a process of displaying an error notification image corresponding to the error on the image display device 5 and a process of outputting an error notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R may be executed. The effect control CPU 120 can display an error notification image corresponding to an error on the image display device 5 while executing the line-of-sight guidance effect. In that case, the display of the line-of-sight guidance effect should have a lower priority than the display of the error notification image. According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably secure the visibility of the error notification image even when the visual guidance effect is being executed when the error notification image is displayed.

The vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be different between when the visual guidance effect is executed and when the visual guidance effect is not executed. For example, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed, if the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect is longer than when the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed, the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed and the vibration effect is executed. You can improve your interest when you play. Further, for example, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed, if the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect is set to be longer than when the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed, even if the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed. , it is easy for the user to recognize that the push button 31B is vibrating.

The vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration performance may be different between the timing before the reference timing and the timing after the reference timing with reference to a certain timing. For example, the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect is set to 1.5 seconds at the timing T1 at which the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, which is the timing before the timing T2, based on the timing T2 at which the ready-to-win state is established. , 3 seconds at timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-win production of normal reach, which is the timing after timing T2, and timing T4 during execution of ready-to-win production of super ready-to-win, which is the timing after timing T2. The vibration time at the timing after the reference timing should be longer than the vibration time at the timing before the timing. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the vibration presentation is executed after the reference timing.

Depending on the strength of the vibration of the push button 31B, the reliability of the big hit of the vibration presentation may differ. For example, there are times when the push button 31B is vibrated with a first strength and when it is vibrated with a second strength that is greater than the first strength, and the push button 31B is vibrated with the second strength. When the push button 31B is vibrated with the first strength, the reliability of the big hit of the vibration presentation should be made higher than that when the push button 31B is vibrated with the first strength. With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the intensity of vibration when the push button 31B vibrates.

The execution pattern of the vibration performance and the reliability of the big win may be common between the pachinko game machine 1 of the first model and the pachinko game machine 1 of the second model different from the first model. According to such a configuration, in the first model pachinko game machine 1 and the second model pachinko game machine 1, it is possible to eliminate variations in the execution pattern of the vibration performance and the reliability of the big win. , it is possible to prevent the player from feeling discomfort.

A vibrating effect may be executed as a pre-reading foretelling effect for foretelling the reliability of the big hit in the variable display before execution. According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the chances of executing the vibration effect.

In addition to this, when the vibration effect is executed as the pre-reading notice effect, the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect as the pre-reading notice effect is the first mode and the second mode. , the big hit reliability in the variable display before execution to be the target of the pre-reading notice may be different. For example, when the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect as the anticipatory notice effect is a mode in which the vibration continues for a predetermined period of time, and a mode in which the vibration is repeatedly turned on and off for a predetermined period of time, Reliability levels of big hits are made different in variable display before execution to be the target of pre-reading notice. According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase attention to the vibration effect as the pre-reading preview effect.

Alternatively, when the vibration effect is executed as the pre-reading notice effect, the execution timing of the vibration effect as the pre-reading notice effect is a plurality of vibration effects that can be executed as the notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit in the variable display being executed. may be executed only at one of the timings of . For example, the vibration effect as the pre-reading notice effect can be executed only at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. According to such a configuration, when the vibration performance is executed at a timing different from the timing at which the vibration performance as the foreseeing notice can be executed, the vibration performance is the foretelling performance for foretelling the reliability of the big hit in the variable display being executed. has been executed.

At the timing at which the vibration performance as the advance notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit in the variable display during execution can be executed, the reliability of the big hit in the variable display under execution is announced when the vibration effect is executed as the foreseeing advance notice effect. The vibration time and vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect as the advance notice effect may be different from the vibration time and vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect as the anticipation effect. For example, when it is possible to execute a vibration effect as a pre-reading notice effect at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started, the push button 31B in the vibration effect as a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit in the variable display being executed. is 3 seconds, and the vibration time of the push button 31B is 1.5 seconds in the vibration effect as the pre-reading notice effect. Alternatively, the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance as the notice performance for notifying the reliability of the big hit in the variable display during execution is set to vibrate continuously for a predetermined time, and the push button 31B in the vibration performance as the look-ahead notice performance. The vibration mode of is a mode in which the vibration is repeatedly turned on and off for a predetermined period of time. According to such a configuration, at the timing at which the vibration production as the advance notice production for notifying the reliability of the big hit in the variable display being executed can be executed, when the vibration production as the foreseeing advance notice production can be executed, any It is possible to easily recognize whether or not the vibration presentation has been executed.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first model and the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second model different from the first model share the execution pattern of the vibration performance and the reliability of the big win, the performance is executed at a specific timing. Regarding the vibration performance, even if the mode of the vibration performance executed by the pachinko game machine 1 of the first model and the mode of the vibration performance executed by the pachinko game machine 1 of the second model are different, the jackpot is won. The reliability may be common. For example, regarding the vibration effect executed at the timing T2 when the reach is established, the light emission mode of the push button 31B in the specific effect executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first model and the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second model Even if the light emitting mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance to be executed is different, the reliability of the big win is 100%. According to such a configuration, even if the model of the pachinko game machine 1 is different, it is possible to heighten the sense of anticipation for the execution of the vibration performance at the specific timing.

The vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be adjusted so as to match the image of the effect executed at that time, for example, when the visual guidance effect is not executed. For example, in the case of executing a notification effect for notifying that a ready-to-win situation has been established at the timing T2 when the ready-to-win situation is established, the vibrating effect is performed by vibrating the push button 31B during the period when the image of the notification effect is displayed. According to such a configuration, even when the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed, a sense of unity between the vibration effect and the effect being executed at that time is generated, so the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

When the pachinko game machine 1 of the first model and the pachinko game machine 1 of the second model different from the first model share the execution pattern of the vibration performance and the reliability of the big win, vibration of the same execution pattern. As for the effect, only the lower limit of the reliability of the big win may be guaranteed. According to such a configuration, for example, when the vibration performance is executed as a chance-up performance of another performance, the reliability of the big hit of the vibration performance can be flexibly set in relation to the reliability of the big win of the other performance. While adjusting, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable.

The vibration effect may be executed at timings different from the timings T1 to T4. For example, the CPU 120 for performance control temporarily stops and displays the decorative symbols of a predetermined ready-to-win combination that is not a big-win combination after the variable display mode of the decorative symbols becomes the ready-to-win mode, and then the reliability of the big win is higher than that of the ready-to-win mode. It is possible to execute an incendiary production to incite the development to the reach mode. After the fanning performance is executed, there are a case where the ready-to-win state with high reliability of big win is developed and a case where the display result becomes "lost" without developing into a ready-to-win state with high reliability of big win. In the case of developing into a ready-to-win mode with high reliability of big win, the CPU 120 for performance control executes a success performance for informing that the ready-to-win mode with high reliability of big win is developed as a result of the performance of the performance of inciting performance. On the other hand, when the display result is ``lost'' without developing into a ready-to-win mode with high reliability of big win, the CPU 120 for performance control notifies that the ready-to-reach mode with high reliability of big win is not developed as a performance result of the fanning performance. Execute the instigation failure performance. In executing such a fanning effect, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a vibration effect at the timing of executing the fanning success effect. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest when the inciting success effect is executed.

The vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibrating effect that can be executed at the timing of executing the successful fanning effect may be adjusted so as to match the image of the successful fanning effect. According to such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest when the inciting success effect is executed.

The luminescent color of the push button 31B in the vibration performance executable at the timing of executing the fanning success performance is the vibration of the execution pattern with the lowest jackpot reliability among the vibration performances of a plurality of types of execution patterns executable at other timings. The push button 31B in the presentation may have the same luminous color as the luminous color. According to such a configuration, when the inciting success effect is executed, there is a possibility that the display result will be "lost" even if it develops into a ready-to-win mode with high reliability of the big win, but the reliability of the big win is excessively increased. You can prevent it from rising.

In addition, when the display result is a "big hit", the effect control CPU 120 can execute the vibration effect at the timing immediately before stopping and displaying the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern. According to such a configuration, it is possible not only to improve the amusement at the timing immediately before the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, but also to heighten expectations for the vibration performance itself, and to perform the vibration performance at other timings as well. You can improve your interest when you play.

When the pachinko game machine 1 of the first model and the pachinko game machine 1 of the second model different from the first model share the execution pattern of the vibration performance and the reliability of the big win, the advantage to the player is obtained. Even in the case of a "jackpot" of a jackpot type different from the jackpot type with the highest degree of advantage among a plurality of types of different jackpot types, the emission color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect can be "rainbow color". do. According to such a configuration, when the luminescent color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect becomes "rainbow color", it is possible to avoid misunderstanding that it is a "jackpot" of the jackpot type with the highest degree of advantage. can be

If there are only two types of advantages for the player depending on the type of jackpot, the execution pattern in which the light emission color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect is "rainbow" may not be provided. According to such a configuration, even though the push button 31B emits light in the "rainbow color" in the vibration effect, it is possible to prevent the "big win" of the big win type having a low advantage for the player. It is possible to prevent the feeling of expectation for the vibration performance from being spoiled.

The performance control CPU 120 may guide the player's line of sight to the push button 31B using an auditory performance effect as the visual direction guidance performance. For example, the production control CPU 120 outputs a specific sound effect when the vibration production is being executed, and then gradually increases the volume of the specific sound effect from a small volume to a large volume as the visual guidance production. Output to change. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player who has difficulty in recognizing the line-of-sight guidance performance using the visual performance effect pay attention to the operation means before the operation means vibrates.

When the winning probability of the big win is changed according to the set value, the first set value and the second set value different from the first set value can be used even in the same execution pattern of the vibration performance. The reliability of the big hit of the vibration performance of the execution pattern may differ from one time to another. For example, even in the vibration performance of the same execution pattern, when the set value is "6", the reliability of the big hit of the vibration performance of the execution pattern should be higher than when the set value is "1". . According to such a configuration, when the vibration effect is executed and the display result is a "big hit", it is possible to increase the expectation that the set value is highly advantageous.

When the winning probability of the big win is changed according to the set value, the push button 31B in the vibration performance is changed between the first set value and the second set value different from the first set value. may differ in vibration time and emission color. According to such a configuration, the set value can be suggested by the vibration effect. For example, when the set value is one of "1" to "3" and when the set value is one of "4" to "6", the push button 31B in the vibration effect It suffices if the vibration time and the emission color are different. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest whether or not the high setting, which may be the set value "6", which is the most advantageous for the player, is set by the vibration effect. Further, for example, the vibration time and the light emission color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be different between when the set value is an odd number and when the set value is an even number. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest whether or not it is an even set value that may be the set value "6", which is the most advantageous set value for the player, by the vibration effect.

At the timing T2 when the reach is established, the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white, and the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red. It may be possible to execute a vibration effect in which the light is emitted. According to such a configuration, even at the timing T2 when the ready-to-win state is established, not only the execution of the vibration effect but also the mode when the vibration effect is executed can be noticed.

At the timing T2 when the reach is established, the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white, and the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red. In the case where it is possible to execute the vibration effect in which the light is emitted, the vibration effect is executed at both the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started and the timing T2 when the ready-to-win state is established. There may be In this case, even if the vibration effect of vibrating the push button 31B for 3 seconds and causing the push button 31B to emit rainbow colors is not executed at either timing T1 or timing T2, the vibration at the timing T1 is performed. A specific combination of the execution pattern of the performance and the execution pattern of the vibration performance at the timing T2 may deterministically notify that the display result will be a "big hit". According to such a configuration, when the vibration effect is executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started, the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in rainbow colors. Even if the vibration performance is not executed, it is possible not only to heighten the expectation for the execution of the vibration performance at the timing T2 when the ready-to-win is established, but also to increase the attention to the mode of the vibration performance at the timing T2. .

The vibration effect may be executed at either timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of normal reach and timing T4 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win. In that case, even if the vibration effect of vibrating the push button 31B for three seconds and causing the push button 31B to emit light in rainbow colors is not executed at either timing T3 or timing T4, the vibration at the timing T3 is performed. A specific combination of the execution pattern of the performance and the execution pattern of the vibration performance at the timing T4 may deterministically notify that the display result will be a "big hit". According to such a configuration, when the vibration effect is executed at the timing T3 during execution of the normal reach effect, the push button 31B is vibrated for three seconds and the push button 31B is vibrated in rainbow colors. Even if the performance is not executed, not only can the sense of expectation for the execution of the vibration performance at the timing T4 during the execution of the ready-to-win performance of the super ready-to-win be enhanced, but also the mode of the vibration performance at the timing T4 can be more focused. can be enhanced.

The vibration duration and vibration mode of the push button 31B in the mode of vibration performance for deterministically notifying that the display result will be a "big hit" are those that do not deterministically notify that the display result will be a "big hit". The vibration time and vibration mode of the push button 31B in 1 may be different. For example, the vibration time of the push button 31B in the mode of vibrating the display result of a "big hit" is changed to the vibration time of the vibration mode of the mode not informing the display result of the "big hit". The vibration time is set to be longer than the vibration time of the push button 31B. Alternatively, while the vibration mode of the push button 31B is monotonous in the mode of vibration performance that does not deterministically notify that the display result will be a "big hit", it will definitely notify that the display result will be a "big hit". In the vibration effect of the mode, the push button 31B is vibrated in accordance with a predetermined beat. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the vibration effect in the form of deterministically informing that the display result will be a "big hit" is a special vibration effect.

When the vibrating effect is executed at the timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-reach effect of normal reach or the timing T4 during execution of the ready-to-reach effect of super reach, the line-of-sight guidance effect may be executed without fail. According to such a configuration, the expectation that the display result will be a "big hit" due to the execution of the ready-to-win effect is favorably increased by favorably recognizing the vibration of the operating means. be able to.

A timing T3 during execution of a ready-to-win performance of a normal ready-to-win when a vibrating performance is to be executed at one of the timing T1 at which the variable display of decorative patterns is started and the timing T2 at which the ready-to-win is established; The vibrating effect may be executed at either timing T4 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of super reach. In that case, the vibration duration and luminescence color of the push button 31B in the vibration presentation performed at the timing T3 and the timing T4 are lower than the vibration duration and luminescence color of the push button 31B in the vibration presentation performed at the timing T1 and the timing T2. In other words, the timing T3 is such that the reliability of the vibration performance executed at the timing T3 or the timing T4 does not fall below the reliability of the vibration performance executed at the timing T1 or the timing T2. Alternatively, the execution pattern of the vibrating effect that can be executed at the timing T4 may be restricted. For example, when the vibration effect of execution pattern SE2 is executed at timing T1, the vibration effect of execution pattern SE5 is executed at time T3, the vibration effect of execution pattern SE8 is executed at time T4, limit. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the credibility of the big win reliability from being lowered when the vibration effect is executed a plurality of times in one variable display.

When the vibration performance interlocking with the foretelling performance is executable, the mode of the vibration performance interlocking with the foretelling performance and the mode of the vibration performance not interlocking with the foretelling performance may be different. For example, in the vibration effect interlocked with the advance notice effect, the push button 31B is vibrated in time with the music played in the interlocked advance notice effect. Further, for example, in the vibration effect linked to the character object announcement effect, the push button 31B is vibrated in accordance with the effect sound when the character object moves. Further, for example, in the vibration effect interlocked with the advance notice effect, the push button 31B is caused to emit light in a color different from the emission color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect not interlocked with the advance notice effect. According to such a configuration, when the vibration performance is executed, it is possible to make it easy to recognize whether the vibration performance is linked to the advance notice performance or not linked to the notice performance. .

A present box presentation may be made executable. In that case, when the present box is opened, a character holding a hammer may pop out from the opened present box as shown in FIG. According to such a configuration, it is possible to heighten expectations for execution of the visual guidance effect and the vibration effect due to the execution of the present box effect.

When it is possible to execute an operation effect for operating the push button 31B, in this operation effect, in order to notify that the operation of the push button 31B is valid during the operation valid period during which the operation of the push button 31B is valid, The push button 31B may be illuminated. In that case, the push button 31B is lit in a mode different from the lighting mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect. For example, when the push button 31B is lit in the vibration effect, the lighting mode for the vibration effect may be controlled so that the push button 31B emits red light continuously for three seconds during which the push button 31B is vibrated. . On the other hand, when the push button 31B is lit in the operation presentation, the button operation switches the push button 31B between red light emission (lighting) and non-light emission (light off) every 150 milliseconds during the operation valid period. You may control so that it may become the lighting mode for a suggestion. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably notify that the operation of the push button 31B is effective. Note that the operation lever of the stick controller 31A may be illuminated in order to notify that the operation of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A is valid during the lever operation valid period in which the operation of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A is valid. In this case, control may be performed so that the lighting mode for suggesting lever operation, in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A emits light during the valid period of lever operation, is obtained. The lighting mode for suggesting lever operation may be the same lighting mode as the lighting mode for suggesting button operation, or may be a lighting mode different from the lighting mode for suggesting button operation.

For example, when the special game or the like is not being executed, the push button 31B or the like is operated by the player to set the volume of the effect to be executed, the type of music or background to be output, and the image display. Settings related to effects, such as brightness settings of the device 5 and brightness settings of various lamps such as the game effect lamp 9, may be changeable. It should be noted that, for example, it may be possible to select which effect setting is to be changed from the menu screen, or a different operation is performed corresponding to the change item desired by the player, and the setting corresponding to the operation is changed. You may do so. Further, when the special game or the like is not being executed, the push button 31B may be lighted in order to notify that the setting regarding the effect can be changed. In that case, the push button 31B is lit in a mode different from the lighting mode of the push button 31B in the vibration presentation and the lighting mode of the push button 31B in the operation presentation. According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately notify that the setting regarding the effect can be changed.

(Description of means related to characteristic portion 10SH)
In relation to the characteristic portion 10SH, there has been proposed a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player and that can execute a vibration effect in which an operation means that the player can operate vibrates (for example, Japanese Laid-Open Patent Application 2019-051075).

In general, a player plays a game while looking at display means on which variable displays and various effects are displayed. Therefore, when the operation means is out of sight of the player, there is a possibility that the player cannot recognize that the operation means is vibrating even if the vibration effect is executed. In that case, it is not possible to sufficiently enhance the interest of the vibration presentation.

Therefore, in order to make the game means pay attention before the vibration effect is executed and to sufficiently enhance the interest of the vibration effect, the game machine of the means 1 related to the characteristic part 10SH is a game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player. A machine (for example, the pachinko machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player), an operation means that can be operated by the player (for example, the pachinko machine 1 can be controlled by the player is provided with a push button 31B capable of performing a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation, etc.), and a vibration effect execution means capable of executing a vibration effect in which the operation means vibrates is capable of executing a vibration effect that vibrates), and a line-of-sight guidance effect execution means that can execute a line-of-sight guidance effect that guides the player's line of sight to the operation means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is the player's (e.g., it is possible to execute a line-of-sight guidance effect that guides the line of sight to the push button 31B), and the advantageous state is controlled when the vibration effect is executed rather than when the vibration effect is not executed. (For example, the pachinko game machine 1 has a higher jackpot reliability when the vibration performance is executed than when the vibration performance is not executed), and the vibration performance executing means , at the first timing and at the second timing after the first timing, the vibration effect can be executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the variable display of the decoration pattern at the timing T1 and the second timing after the first timing). , a timing T2 at which the reach is established, a timing T3 after the timings T1 and T2, during which the ready-to-win performance of the normal reach is being executed, and a timing during the execution of the ready-to-reach performance of the super ready-to-win. (e.g., at any one of T4 and T4, the vibration effect can be executed), regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing, the vibration effect is performed in a common manner. (For example, the effect control CPU 120 is either timing T1 or T2, or either timing T3 or T4, regardless of (e.g., the vibrating effect can be executed in a manner in which the vibration time and the light emitting color of the push button 31B are the same), the line-of-sight guidance effect executing means does not execute the line-of-sight guidance effect at the first timing ( For example, the production control CPU 120 does not execute the visual guidance production at the timing T1 and the timing T2, etc.), and can execute the visual guidance production before the vibration production is executed at the second timing (for example, , the effect control CPU 120 can execute the line-of-sight guidance effect before the vibration effect is executed at the timing T3 and the timing T4, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the operation means before the vibration effect is executed, and to sufficiently enhance the interest of the vibration effect.

The game machine of the means 2 related to the characteristic part 10SH is the game machine of the means 1, wherein the vibration effect execution means can execute the vibration effect when the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed (for example, effect control For example, the CPU 120 may be able to execute the vibration effect when the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed.

According to such a configuration, since the sense of unity between the vibration effect and the line-of-sight guidance effect is generated, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The game machine of means 3 related to the characteristic part 10SH is a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect different from the vibration effect and the visual guidance effect in the game machine of the means 1 or 2 (for example, the effect control CPU 120 , being able to execute a reach effect of super reach, etc.), and the vibration effect executing means is capable of executing the vibration effect when the specific effect is being executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 , the vibrating effect can be executed when the reach effect of super reach is being executed, etc.).

According to such a configuration, since the vibration effect may be executed while the specific effect is being executed, the interest can be improved.

The game machine of means 4 relating to the characteristic part 10SH is a display means for displaying in any of the game machines of means 1 to 3 (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 has an image display device 5 that displays various effect images. and the like), and the display of the line-of-sight guidance effect has a lower priority than the display of the predetermined information and has a higher priority than the display of information different from the predetermined information (for example, the display of the line-of-sight guidance effect image has lower priority than constant small patterns, pending number display, and various error notifications, and has higher priority than pending display, active display, background image, decorative pattern, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the visibility of the line-of-sight guidance effect stand out while suitably ensuring the visibility of the predetermined information when the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed.

The game machine of the means 5 related to the characteristic part 10SH is the game machine of any one of the means 1 to 4, wherein the vibration performance execution means is the vibration performance of the first mode and the advantageous state more than the first mode. (For example, the production control CPU 120 vibrates the push button 31B for 1.5 seconds and vibrates the push button 31B for 1.5 seconds. and a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for three seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red. When the vibration effect of vibrating the push button 31B for 3 seconds and causing the push button 31B to emit red light is executed than when the vibration effect of vibrating the push button 31B and causing the push button 31B to emit white light is executed. ), when the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed, the vibration effect of the second mode is more likely to be executed than the vibration effect of the first mode (for example, pachinko game In the machine 1, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed, the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds rather than vibrating the push button 31B for 1.5 seconds and lighting the push button 31B in white. At the same time, the vibration effect of making the push button 31B emit red light is easier to execute, etc.).

According to such a configuration, by executing the line-of-sight guidance effect, it is possible to improve the sense of expectation for the execution of the vibration effect of the second mode.

(Explanation related to association of characteristic parts)
Each configuration related to the characteristic portion 10SH may be appropriately combined with part or all of each configuration related to another characteristic portion. Features that are combined in this way or individual features that are not combined may be appropriately combined with part or all of each configuration related to other features.

(Description of characteristic portions 48AK to 50AK)
FIG. 16-1 shows a configuration example of a rendering device relating to characteristic portions 48AK to 50AK. In this configuration example, a movable body 32 for presentation serving as a movable presentation device is provided in front of the lower end, which is the lower edge on the front side overlapping the display screen of the image display device 5 . The movable body 32 may be connected to an operation motor via a link mechanism, for example. The movable body 32 can be changed between an initial position and a position different from the initial position on the front side of the image display device 5 by transmitting power from the operation motor. The movable body 32 may be capable of changing its position by power from, for example, an operating solenoid or other general actuator.

The movable body 32 has a frame and a window. The frame portion of the movable body 32 is configured using a decorative member, and has a configuration that can be covered so that the display screen of the image display device 5 cannot be visually recognized by the player. The window portion of the movable body 32 is made of transparent glass or synthetic resin, or formed as a simple opening, and has a see-through structure so that the player can visually recognize the display screen of the image display device 5. ing.

The game effect lamp 9 may include a plurality of LEDs forming the upper frame lamp 9C, a plurality of LEDs forming the left frame lamp 9M, and a plurality of LEDs forming the right frame lamp 9N. The upper frame lamp 9C is provided at a predetermined position above the game area in the gaming machine frame 3 . The left frame lamp 9M is provided at a predetermined position on the left side of the game area in the gaming machine frame 3 . The right frame lamp 9N is provided at a predetermined position on the right side of the game area in the gaming machine frame 3 .

The game effect lamp 9 may include a plurality of LEDs forming the lever lamp 9B1 and a plurality of LEDs forming the button lamp 9B2. The lever lamp 9B1 is composed of a plurality of LEDs incorporated in the operating rod (operating lever) of the stick controller 31A. The button lamp 9B2 is composed of a plurality of LEDs provided inside the push button 31B. Part or all of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B may be made of a translucent member. As a result, the operating lever of the stick controller 31A can be illuminated by lighting the lever lamp 9B1. Also, the push button 31B can be illuminated by turning on the button lamp 9B2.

For example, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are integrally formed, and the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are vibrated by driving the vibration motor 131. FIG. The vibration motor 131 may be provided inside or near the push button 31B, may be built in the operation lever of the stick controller 31A, or may be provided at the base position of the operation lever. A plurality of vibration motors 131 may be provided in order to diversify the vibration mode of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B.

In the pachinko game machine 1, as a suggestive performance suggesting that the variable display result becomes "big hit" at a predetermined rate and controlled to a big win game state, an operation part performance including a light emission performance accompanying the vibration performance can be executed. In the vibration effect included in the operation part effect, the vibration motor 131 is driven to vibrate the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B in a vibration mode corresponding to the vibration pattern. In the light emission effect included in the operation part effect, the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are caused to emit light along with the vibration effect by lighting the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2. In the light emitting effect included in the operation part effect, lighting of one of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 causes one of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B to emit light along with the vibration effect. good too. For example, by turning on only the button lamp 9B2, only the push button 31B may emit light along with the vibration effect.

FIG. 16-2(A) shows a setting example of an operation part effect pattern used for executing an operation part effect. In this setting example, operation unit effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03, AKC11 to ACK13, AKC21, AKC22, AKC31, AKC32, and AKC41 are prepared in advance as a plurality of operation unit effect patterns. Emission color, vibration pattern, jackpot reliability, and application are set for each operation part production pattern. The light emission color corresponding to the operation part effect pattern indicates the light emission mode when the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are caused to emit light in the light emission effect included in the operation part effect. A vibration pattern corresponding to the operation part effect pattern indicates a vibration mode when the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B vibrate in the vibration effect included in the operation part effect. The big win reliability corresponding to the operation part performance pattern indicates the rate of control to the big win game state with the variable display result becoming "big win" when the operation part performance corresponding to the operation part performance pattern is executed. The application corresponding to the operation part effect pattern indicates the timing at which the operation part effect is executed for each operation part effect pattern.

The operation part effect can be executed at a plurality of timings associated with the progress of the variable display, such as, for example, when the pre-variation starts, when the target variation starts, when the reach is established, when the reach develops, and when the winner is announced. The preliminary change start time is the timing corresponding to the start of the variable display that is executed before the variable display to be suggested by the operation unit presentation. The target variation start time is the timing corresponding to the start of the variable display that is the target of the suggestion by the operation unit presentation. When the ready-to-win state is established, the timing corresponds to the case where the variable display is in the ready-to-win mode. The ready-to-win development time is a timing corresponding to the case where the developing effect is executed along with the ready-to-reach effect of the super reach. The development effect is a effect for notifying that the ready-to-reach effect of super reach is executed after the ready-to-reach effect of normal reach is executed (development of reach). The winning/failure notification fanning time is a timing corresponding to the fanning performance prior to the winning/failure reporting performance for informing whether or not the variable display result becomes a ``jackpot'' during execution of the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win.

In the setting example shown in FIG. 16-2(A), a plurality of operating part effect patterns that can be used for executing operating part effects corresponding to a plurality of timings are prepared in advance. Further, it is set so that different operation part effect patterns can be used according to a plurality of timings at which the operation part effects can be executed.

When the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win is executed, the reliability of big win is higher than when only the ready-to-win performance of normal ready-to-win is executed and the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win is not executed. Depending on whether or not the ready-to-win performance of super-reach is executed to derive the determined decoration pattern of the big-hit combination, it is possible to inform whether or not to be controlled to the big-hit game state. As for the reach performance of the super reach, a plurality of reach performances including, for example, the SP reach A may be prepared in advance. Each ready-to-win effect may include effects having different effects from each other. Each ready-to-win effect may include effects having a common effect mode. The decision ratio when the variable display result is "jackpot" and the decision ratio when the variable display result is not "jackpot" are set so that the reliability of the jackpot is according to each reach production. Just do it. Using a random value for determining the variation pattern, depending on the variation pattern determined by referring to the variation pattern determination table, presence or absence of reach production, presence or absence of reach production of super reach, production mode in reach production, etc. It would be nice if it could be set.

Regardless of the specific effects that can be executed according to the progress of the game including the variable display, such as the ready-to-win effect, the operation part effect is executed at a predetermined rate depending on whether the variable display result is a "big hit" or not. It is possible to determine the presence or absence of An operation part effect that can be executed regardless of such a specific effect is also called a single operation part effect. On the other hand, in some cases, an effect is executed in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are illuminated or vibrated in association with the specific effect. The production by light emission or vibration associated with such a specific production is also called a specific interlocking production.

FIG. 16-2(B) shows a setting example when executing a specific interlocking effect. In this setting example, when executing a specific interlocking effect with a plurality of specific effects such as movable body operation, image display, music playback, or jackpot confirmation notification, jackpot type lottery CH1, CH2 in the reach effect of SP reach A Emission color and vibration pattern are set. The emission color in the specific interlocking effect is set according to the content of the specific effect, and it is sufficient that the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A can be made to emit light as part of the specific effect. The vibration pattern in the specific interlocking effect is set according to the content of the specific effect, and it is sufficient that the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be vibrated as part of the specific effect. Thus, since the specific interlocking performance can be executed as a part of the specific performance, the big win reliability is common to the specific performance, and the unique big win reliability is not set. The vibration of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B in the specific interlocking effect is included in the special vibration effect that can be executed along with execution of the specific effect. The operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the light emission of the push button 31B in the specific interlocking effect are included in the specific light emitting effect that can be executed along with the execution of the specific effect.

The reach performance of the SP reach A may be, for example, about 40% of the jackpot reliability. The jackpot type lottery CH1 may be a drawing effect that can be executed when the jackpot type is different from the first jackpot type with the minimum number of rounds (for example, 4 rounds). The jackpot type lottery CH2 may be a lottery effect that can be executed when the number of rounds is the second jackpot type with the maximum number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds). Incidentally, the jackpot type lotteries CH1 and CH2 may be a lottery performance related to the jackpot type according to the presence or absence of time reduction control and variable probability control after the jackpot game state is finished, and the end condition, or may be previously notified in the jackpot game state. A lottery effect relating to the presence or absence of a rank-up and the amount of increase in which the number of rounds is greater than the number of rounds may be used. As jackpot type lotteries CH1 and CH2, based on the game ball that has entered the V prize opening of the V prize attacker, when it is possible to control the probability variable state after the jackpot game state is over, whether or not the V prize attacker is opened and the opening time. , The number of times of opening, or depending on the termination conditions of the variable probability control, etc., it may be possible to execute a lottery effect related to the jackpot gaming state with different advantages. When it is possible to control from a small winning game state to a big winning game state based on the occurrence of V winning by the game ball entering the V winning attacker, whether or not the V winning attacker is opened, the opening time, the number of times of opening, or Depending on the number of rounds of the big win game state controlled after the occurrence of the V prize, it may be possible to execute a lottery performance relating to the small win game state and the big win game state with different degrees of advantage.

Until a game state in which the V winning attacker can be released is started, control is performed in a weak vibration monitoring state, and after that, from the start of the game state in which the V winning attacker can be released, the V by entering the game ball into the V winning attacker. During the period until a prize is won, the strong vibration monitoring state may be set, and the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B may be controlled so as not to vibrate. Then, when a V prize is generated, control may be performed to the weak vibration monitoring state, and an effect including vibration of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B may be executed. The strong vibration monitoring state is a state in which it is easy to detect a vibration error, and the weak vibration monitoring state is a state in which it is more difficult to detect a vibration error than in the strong vibration monitoring state. During a period when there is a high possibility of fraud due to the generation of vibration by a player, control is performed to a strong vibration monitoring state. On the other hand, during a period in which there is little risk of cheating due to the player generating vibration, control is performed to the weak vibration monitoring state. When a vibration error is detected, the control of the production control CPU 120, etc., displays the warning image, outputs the warning sound, turns on the warning lamp, outputs the warning signal, or a combination of some or all of these, It is sufficient if the control for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality can be executed. When a vibration error is detected, the game control microcomputer 100 may control the CPU 103 of the pachinko game machine 1 to stop the game. As a result, it is possible to appropriately monitor the vibration and suppress the decrease in the interest in the game due to the notification of the vibration error or the game stop state due to the inappropriate abnormality determination.

FIG. 16-3 shows the setting contents of the vibration pattern. A plurality of vibration patterns are prepared in advance according to the vibration mode of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. FIG. 16-3(A) shows vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03, AKV11, AKV12, AKV21, AKV22, and AKV31 used for executing vibration effects included in the operation part effects. FIG. 16-3(B) shows vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44 used for executing the special vibration effect included in the specific interlocked effect.

The vibration pattern AKV01 is a vibration mode in which the ON period and the OFF period are alternately repeated three times every 300 milliseconds. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV01 is included in the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC01 that can be executed at the start of the preliminary fluctuation. On the other hand, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV01 is not included in the operation part effect that can be executed at a timing different from the time of starting the preliminary fluctuation. In the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC01, the emission color in the light emission effect in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B emit light becomes white along with the vibration effect.

The vibration pattern AKV02 is a vibration mode in which the ON period continues for 1500 milliseconds. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 is included in the operation part effects by the operation part effect patterns AKC02 and AKC03 that can be executed at the start of the preliminary fluctuation. Also, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 is included in the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC11 that can be executed at the start of the target variation. On the other hand, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 is not included in the operation part effects that can be executed at timings different from the start of the preliminary variation and the start of the target variation. In the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC02, the emission color in the light emission effect in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B emit light along with the vibration effect becomes red. In the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC03, the light emission color in the light emission effect in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B emit light along with the vibration effect becomes rainbow. In the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC11, the emission color in the light emission effect in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B emit light in accordance with the vibration effect becomes white.

The vibration pattern AKV03 is a vibration mode in which the ON period continues for 3000 milliseconds. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV03 is included in the operation part effects by the operation part effect patterns AKC12 and AKC13 that can be executed at the start of the target variation. On the other hand, the operation part presentation by the vibration pattern AKV03 is not included in the operation part presentation that can be executed at a timing different from the target variation start time. In the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC12, the emission color in the light emission effect in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B emit light along with the vibration effect becomes red. In the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC13, the light emission color in the light emission effect in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B emit light along with the vibration effect becomes rainbow.

In the vibration pattern AKV11, it becomes a vibration mode of the ON period in accordance with the effect AKR1 when the ready-to-win state is established. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV11 is included in the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC21 that can be executed when the reach is established. On the other hand, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV11 is not included in the operation part effects that can be executed at a timing different from when the ready-to-win state is established. In the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC21, the light emission color in the light emission effect in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B emit light along with the vibration effect becomes pink.

In the vibration pattern AKV12, it becomes a vibration mode of the ON period in accordance with the effect AKR2 when the ready-to-win state is established. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV12 is included in the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC22 that can be executed when the reach is established. On the other hand, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV12 is not included in the operation part effect that can be executed at a timing different from when the ready-to-win state is established. In the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC22, the emission color in the light emission effect in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B emit light along with the vibration effect becomes orange.

As the vibration effect included in the operation part effect when the ready-to-win state is established, the vibration effect included in the operation part effect that can be executed at a timing different from the time when the ready-to-win state is established and the effect by a common vibration pattern may be executed. For example, as the vibration effect included in the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC21 executable when ready-to-win is established, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 may be executable. Further, as the vibration effect included in the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC22 executable when ready-to-win is established, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV03 may be executable. In these cases, there is a case where the vibration mode of the vibration presentation is common between the operation section presentation executed when the ready-to-win state is established and the operation section presentation executed at the time of the start of the preliminary fluctuation or the start of the target fluctuation. . In this way, when the timings for executing the operation section effects are different, the vibration mode of the vibration effects is common, so that the increase in the control load of the effects and the control data may be prevented.

In the vibration pattern AKV21, it becomes a vibration mode of the on period in accordance with the production AKS1 at the time of reach development. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV21 is included in the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC31 that can be executed at the time of reach development. On the other hand, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV21 is not included in the operation part effects that can be executed at a timing different from the reach development time. In the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC31, the emission color in the light emission effect in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B emit light in accordance with the vibration effect becomes white.

In the vibration pattern AKV22, it becomes a vibration mode of the on period in accordance with the production AKS2 at the time of reach development. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV22 is included in the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC32 that can be executed at the time of reach development. On the other hand, the vibration presentation by the vibration pattern AKV22 is not included in the operation section presentation that can be executed at a timing different from the reach development time. In the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC32, the light emission color in the light emission effect in which the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B emit light with the vibration effect becomes white.

As the vibration effect included in the operation part effect at the time of reach development, the vibration effect included in the operation part effect that can be executed at a timing different from that at the time of reach development and the effect with a common vibration pattern may be executed. For example, as the vibration effect included in the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC31 that can be executed when the reach develops, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 may be executable. Further, as the vibration effect included in the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC32 that can be executed at the time of reach development, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV03 may be executable. In these cases, there is a case where the vibration mode of the vibration effect is common between the operation part effect executed when the reach develops and the operation part effect executed when the pre-variation starts or when the target change starts. . In this way, when the timings for executing the operation section effects are different, the vibration mode of the vibration effects is common, so that the increase in the control load of the effects and the control data may be prevented.

The vibration pattern AKV31 is a vibration mode in which the ON period continues for 1500 milliseconds or longer. For example, after the ON period continues for 1500 milliseconds, the ON period continues until the player's action that operates the operation lever of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is detected in the effective detection period. I wish I could. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV31 is included in the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC41 that can be executed at the time of winning/failure notification. On the other hand, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV31 is not included in the operation part effect that can be executed at a timing different from the timing of the success/failure notification. In the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC41, the luminescence color in the light emission effect in which the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B emit light with the vibration effect becomes gold.

It should be noted that whether or not to provide an effective detection period when the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV31 is executed may be changed according to the type of effect to be executed with the variable display, such as the type of ready-to-win effect. good. When providing an effective detection period, the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are switched between gold light emission (lighting) and non-light emission (lighting out) every 150 milliseconds so that the light emission mode is for suggesting operation. may be controlled. If the effective detection period is not provided, control may be performed so that the operation lever of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is continuously illuminated in gold for a period of time during which the operation lever or the push button 31B is vibrated, so that the light emission mode for vibration effect is performed. On the other hand, when providing an effective detection period, it is suggested to switch the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B between emitting (lighting) and non-emitting (turning off) a red color different from gold every 150 milliseconds. You may control so that it may become the light emission mode for. By executing a light emission effect in a light emission mode that switches between light emission and non-light emission every 150 milliseconds, it is possible to confirm that the operation of operating the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B is effective while executing the vibration effect. , can be suggested to the player. Alternatively, a plurality of lamp layers in which lamp control data can be set may be used to differentiate the priority of light emission control. For example, in the first lamp layer, as a lighting mode for suggesting normal operation, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are switched between red lighting (lighting) and non-lighting (lighting out) every 150 milliseconds. Set the lamp control data to In the second lamp layer, as a light emission mode for suggesting a special operation, lamp control data is set in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are continuously illuminated in gold for an effective detection period of 5000 milliseconds. do. Then, the light emission control of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 based on the lamp control data set in the second lamp layer is performed rather than the light emission control of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 based on the lamp control data set in the first lamp layer. Prioritize execution. As a result, the light emission mode for suggesting a special operation may be controlled to have a higher priority than the light emission mode for suggesting a normal operation.

A plurality of ready-to-win performances to be super ready-to-win may include a strong SP ready-to-win with a relatively high jackpot reliability and a weak SP ready-to-win with a relatively low big-hit reliability. In the ready-to-win effect of the strong SP reach, the hit/fail notification effect is executed after the action detection effect is executed by detecting the action of the player operating the operation lever of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. When the vibration effect corresponding to the reach effect of such a strong SP reach is executed, it is turned on until the player's action to operate the operation lever of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is detected during the effective detection period. It is sufficient if the vibration mode is such that the period continues. In the ready-to-win effect of the weak SP reach, the win/fail notification effect is executed without executing the motion detection effect. When the vibrating effect corresponding to the ready-to-reach effect of such a weak SP reach is executed, the vibrating mode according to the vibration pattern AKV31 may be set 1500 milliseconds or more before the win/fail notification effect. A case may be provided in which the vibration mode of the vibration presentation is different between the operating part presentation when the ready-to-reach presentation of the strong SP reach is executed and the operation presentation when the ready-to-reach presentation of the weak SP reach is executed. For example, as a vibration effect included in the operation part effect when the reach effect of strong SP reach is executed, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are vibrated continuously for 5000 milliseconds, which is the effective detection period. You may control to the vibration mode used as a period. Alternatively, as a vibration effect included in the operation part effect when the reach effect of strong SP reach is executed, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are vibrated every 150 milliseconds during the effective detection period. The vibration mode may be controlled to switch between a period and an OFF period in which vibration is not performed. On the other hand, as the vibration effect included in the operation part effect when the weak SP reach effect is executed, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are continuously vibrated for 2000 milliseconds. You may control to a vibration mode. A case may be provided in which the lighting mode of the lighting effect is different between the operating part effect when the ready-to-win effect of the strong SP reach is executed and the operation effect when the ready-to-reach effect of the weak SP reach is executed. For example, as a light emission effect included in the operation part effect when the reach effect of strong SP reach is executed, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are illuminated in gold every 150 milliseconds during the effective detection period. It may be controlled so that the light emission mode is switched between (lighting) and non-lighting (extinguishing). On the other hand, as a light emission effect included in the operation part effect when the low SP reach effect is executed, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are vibrated continuously for 2000 milliseconds. The control lever and the push button 31B may be controlled to emit gold light.

In the vibration pattern AKV41, it becomes a vibration mode of the ON period interlocked with the movable body operation in the reach effect of the SP reach A. In the vibration pattern AKV42, it becomes a vibration mode of the ON period interlocked with the screen display in the SP reach A reach performance. In the vibration pattern AKV43, it becomes a vibration mode of the ON period interlocked with the music reproduction in the SP reach A reach effect. The vibration pattern AKV44 is a vibration mode in which the ON period continues for 3000 milliseconds or longer.

The vibration by the vibration pattern AKV41 is a special vibration effect included in the specific interlocking effect executed together with the movable body motion in the reach effect of SP reach A. In the specific interlocking effect executed together with the movable body motion in the reach effect of the SP reach A, the emission color in the specific light emitting effect becomes blue as the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B vibrate. The vibration by the vibration pattern AKV42 is a special vibration effect included in the specific interlocking effect executed together with the image display in the SP reach A reach effect. In the specific interlocking effect executed together with the image display in the reach effect of the SP reach A, the light emission color in the specific light emitting effect becomes gold as the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B vibrate. The vibration by the vibration pattern AKV43 is a special vibration effect included in the specific interlocking effect executed together with the music reproduction in the SP reach A reach effect. In the specific interlocking effect executed together with the music reproduction in the reach effect of the SP reach A, the emission color in the specific light emitting effect changes from blue through red to gold as the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B vibrate.

Vibration by the vibration pattern AKV44 is a special vibration performance included in the specific interlocking performance executed together with the announcement of the confirmation of the big hit, and a special vibration performance included in the specific interlocking performance executed together with the jackpot type lottery CH1, CH2. There are cases and cases. In the specific interlocking effect that is executed together with the announcement of the confirmation of the big hit, the emission color in the specific light emitting effect becomes rainbow as the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B vibrate. In the specific interlocking effect executed together with the jackpot type lottery CH1, the emission color in the specific light emitting effect becomes white as the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B vibrate. In the specific interlocking effect executed together with the jackpot type lottery CH2, the light emission color in the specific light emitting effect becomes rainbow as the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B vibrate.

FIG. 16-4 shows an execution example of an effect by vibrating and emitting light on the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. Here, a plurality of effect execution examples AKA01 to AKA07 are shown according to the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the emission color of the push button 31B. It should be noted that the lever lamp 9B1 provided on the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the button lamp 9B2 provided on the push button 31B are in the normal light emission state with the light emission brightness set to be low, and the color of the light emitted. It suffices if the light is emitted so as to be white. Alternatively, in the normal light emission state, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may be set to non-light emission.

Effect execution example AKA01 is a case of executing a lighting effect in which the operation lever of stick controller 31A and push button 31B emit white light. In the case of executing the operation part presentation by any one of the operation part presentation patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32, the emission color becomes white. The operation part effect pattern AKC01 can be used when the operation part effect is executed at the start of the pre-variation. The operation part effect pattern AKC11 can be used when executing the operation part effect at the start of the target change. Both of the operation part effect patterns AKC31 and AKC32 can be used when executing the operation part effect at the time of reach development. The operation part effects by the operation part effect patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31 and AKC32 all have a jackpot reliability of 50% or more. The operation part presentation by the operation part presentation pattern AKC01 includes the vibration presentation by the vibration pattern AKV01. The operation part presentation by the operation part presentation pattern AKC11 includes the vibration presentation by the vibration pattern AKV02. The operation part production by the operation part production pattern AKC31 includes the vibration production by the vibration pattern AKV21. The operation part production by the operation part production pattern AKC32 includes the vibration production by the vibration pattern AKV22. Also when the jackpot type lottery CH1 is executed as the specific effect, the light emission color is white.

Effect execution example AKA02 is a case of executing a light-emitting effect in which the operation lever of stick controller 31A and push button 31B emit red light. In the case of executing the operation part effect by either the operation part effect pattern AKC02 or AKC12, the light emission color becomes red. The operation part effect pattern AKC02 can be used when the operation part effect is executed at the start of the advance variation. The operation part effect pattern AKC12 can be used when executing the operation part effect at the start of the target change. The operation part effects by the operation part effect patterns AKC02 and AKC12 all have a jackpot reliability of 70% or more. The operation part presentation by the operation part presentation pattern AKC02 includes the vibration presentation by the vibration pattern AKV02. The operation part presentation by the operation part pattern AKC12 includes the vibration presentation by the vibration pattern AKV03. Even when the music reproduction of the SP reach A is executed as the specific effect, the effect period in which the light emitting color is red is included.

Effect execution example AKA03 is a case of executing a lighting effect in which the operating lever of stick controller 31A and push button 31B emit light in rainbow colors. In the case of executing the operation part presentation by either of the operation part presentation patterns AKC03 and AKC13, the light emission color becomes rainbow. The operation part effect pattern AKC03 can be used when executing the operation part effect at the start of the advance variation. The operation part effect pattern AKC13 can be used when executing the operation part effect at the start of the target change. The operation part effects by the operation part effect patterns AKC03 and AKC13 all have a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation part presentation by the operation part presentation pattern AKC03 includes the vibration presentation by the vibration pattern AKV02. The operation part production by the operation part production pattern AKC13 includes the vibration production by the vibration pattern AKV03. Also when executing the jackpot decision notification or the jackpot type lottery CH2 as the specific effect, the light emission color becomes rainbow.

Effect execution example AKA04 is a case of executing a luminescence effect in which the operation lever of stick controller 31A and push button 31B emit pink light. In the case of executing the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC21, the light emission color becomes pink. The operation part effect pattern AKC21 can be used when the operation part effect is executed when the reach is developed. The operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC21 has a big hit reliability of 100%. The operation part production by the operation part production pattern AKC21 includes the vibration production by the vibration pattern AKV11.

Effect execution example AKA05 is a case of executing a light-emitting effect in which the operating lever of stick controller 31A and push button 31B emit orange light. In the case of executing the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC22, the light emission color becomes orange. The operation part effect pattern AKC22 can be used when executing the operation part effect when the reach is developed. The operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC22 has a big hit reliability of 100%. The operation part production by the operation part production pattern AKC22 includes the vibration production by the vibration pattern AKV12.

Effect execution example AKV06 is a case of executing a light emission effect in which the operating lever of stick controller 31A and push button 31B emit blue light. When executing the operation section effect, the emission color never turns blue. When executing the movable body action of SP reach A as the specific effect, the light emission color becomes blue. In addition, even when the music reproduction of SP reach A is executed as the specific effect, the effect period during which the light emitting color is blue is included.

Effect execution example AKV07 is a case of executing a light-emitting effect in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are illuminated in gold. When executing the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC41, the light emission color becomes gold. The operation part effect pattern AKC41 can be used when the operation part effect is executed at the time of winning/failure notification. The operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC41 has a big hit reliability of 100%. The operation part production by the operation part production pattern AKC41 includes the vibration production by the vibration pattern AKV31. When the image display of SP reach A is executed as the specific effect, the light emission color becomes gold. In addition, even when the music reproduction of SP reach A is executed as the specific effect, the effect period in which the luminous color is gold is included.

As described above, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the light emitting color of the push button 31B may differ or may be common depending on the execution timing of the operation section effect, the reliability of the big win, and the vibration mode in the vibration effect. In addition to the light emission color, for example, the light emission time, the number of light emission (blinking number), the light emission period (blinking period), the light emission brightness, etc., can be used to determine the execution timing of the operation part production, the reliability of the jackpot, and the vibration in the vibration production. Depending on the mode, they may be different or common.

The operation section effect can be executed as a pre-reading forewarning effect or a continuous forewarning effect when it is executed at the start of the preliminary fluctuation. The pre-reading advance notice effect suggests whether or not the variable display result will be a "jackpot" before the variable display to be suggested. The continuous advance notice effect continuously indicates whether or not the result of the variable display will be a "jackpot" over a plurality of variable displays executed before the variable display to be suggested. A continuous advance notice effect can be executed using a continuous effect pattern for each number of pending memories. The number of reserved memories here may be the number of special figure reserved memories at the time of starting winning. As the continuous effect pattern for each number of reserved memories, a plurality of continuous effect patterns are prepared in advance according to the effect mode for each remaining number of times. The remaining number of times is set to the special figure reservation memory number at the time of starting winning, and is subtracted by 1 each time the variable display is executed. Then, when the variable display to be suggested is executed, the remaining number of times becomes "0".

FIG. 16-5 shows a setting example of a continuous effect pattern used for executing the continuous advance notice effect. For the continuous effect pattern, for example, using a random number for determining the continuous effect pattern, referring to the continuous effect pattern determination table according to the number of pending memories, and according to the winning determination result, the determined value that matches the random value is assigned. It may be determined by judging the determination result that is given.

FIG. 16-5(A) shows continuous effect patterns AKD01 to AKD06 that can be used when the reserved storage number is "2". In the continuous advance notice effect by the continuous effect pattern AKD01, the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC01 is executed when the remaining number of times is "1", and the operation by the operation part effect pattern AKC11 is executed when the remaining number of times is "0". A part production is executed. In the continuous announcement effect by the continuous effect pattern AKD02, the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC01 is executed when the remaining number of times is "1", and the operation by the operation part effect pattern AKC12 is executed when the remaining number of times is "0". A part production is executed. In the continuous advance notice effect by the continuous effect pattern AKD03, the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC02 is executed when the remaining number of times is "1", and the operation by the operation part effect pattern AKC12 is executed when the remaining number of times is "0". A part production is executed. In the continuous advance notice effect by the continuous effect pattern AKD04, the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC01 is executed when the remaining number of times is "1", and the operation by the operation part effect pattern AKC13 is executed when the remaining number of times is "0". A part production is executed. In the continuous advance notice effect by the continuous effect pattern AKD05, the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC02 is executed when the remaining number of times is "1", and the operation by the operation part effect pattern AKC13 is executed when the remaining number of times is "0". A part production is executed. In the continuous advance notice effect by the continuous effect pattern AKD06, the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC03 is executed when the remaining number of times is "1", and the operation by the operation part effect pattern AKC13 is executed when the remaining number of times is "0". A part production is executed.

FIG. 16-5(B) shows continuous effect patterns AKD11 to AKD16 that can be used when the reserved storage number is "3". In the continuous advance notice effect by the continuous effect patterns AKD11 to AKD16, when the remaining number of times is "2" or "1", the operation section effect is executed by one of the continuous effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03, and the remaining number of times is "0". When , an operation section effect is executed by any one of the continuous effect patterns AKC11 to AKC13.

FIG. 16-5(C) shows continuous effect patterns AKD21 to AKD26 that can be used when the reserved storage number is "4". In the continuous advance notice effect by the continuous effect patterns AKD21 to AKD26, when the remaining number of times is any one of "1" to "3", the operation part effect by any of the continuous effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03 is executed, and the remaining number of times is When it is "0", the operation part effect by any one of the continuous effect patterns AKC11 to AKC13 is executed.

FIG. 16-6 is a flow chart showing an example of processing that can be executed in step S161 of FIG. 9 as the pre-reading notice setting processing. In the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 16-6, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the pre-reading notice condition is satisfied (step AKS101). The pre-reading notice condition may be set in advance as a condition for enabling the execution of the pre-reading notice effect, which is a continuous notice effect. In step AKS101, it is determined whether or not the effect control command (starting entrance winning designation command, pending memory number notification command, winning determination result command) transmitted at the time of starting winning has been received. If no command is received, it is determined that the pre-reading notice condition is not satisfied. When there is a command reception, the content of notification by the received command is specified, and for example, the result of judgment at the time of winning is specified as the content of notification by the judgment result command at the time of winning.

The determination result at the time of winning determines whether or not the variable display result is determined to be a "jackpot" and whether or not the variation pattern is determined to be a specific variation pattern, using the game random numbers extracted at the start of the winning. , The result determined by the starting winning determination process executed in step S101 of the special symbol process process may be used. As the judgment result at the time of winning, for example, any one of the big win, determination of super reach at the time of loss, determination of reach at the time of loss, and general at the time of loss may be indicated. The determination result at the time of winning a big hit is a determination result corresponding to the case of being controlled to the big win game state corresponding to the case where the random number for determining the display result is within the big win determination range. Winning judgment result of super reach determination at the time of loss is included in the judgment result corresponding to the case where it is not controlled to the jackpot game state, and corresponds to the case where the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the range of super reach determination at the time of loss This is the judgment result. Winning determination result of reach determination at the time of loss is included in the determination result corresponding to the case where it is not controlled to the jackpot game state, and the determination result corresponding to the case where the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the reach determination range at the time of loss is. If the judgment result at the time of general winning at the time of loss is included in the judgment result corresponding to the case where it is not controlled to the jackpot game state, and the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern is neither within the confirmation range of super reach nor within the confirmation range of reach at the time of loss is a determination result corresponding to

It suffices if the pre-reading notice condition can be satisfied when the result of determination at the time of winning is either a big hit or determination of super reach at the time of loss. In addition, if the judgment result at the time of winning this time is either a big hit or a super reach determination at the time of loss, and the judgment results at the time of winning up to the previous time corresponding to the pending memory are all general at the time of loss, the pre-reading notice condition can be established. In addition, in the case where the execution of the pre-reading notice effect, which is a continuous notice effect, has already been set to start, the pre-reading notice condition may be restricted so as not to be satisfied.

If the pre-reading notice condition is not satisfied (step AKS101; No), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. If the pre-reading notice condition is satisfied (step AKS101; Yes), it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice (step AKS102). For example, by extracting numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the execution of pre-reading notice, and referring to a pre-reading notice execution determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 according to the result of determination at the time of winning, Whether or not to execute the advance notice effect may be determined as the presence or absence of the advance notice execution. At step AKS102, it is determined to be either "not executed" when the pre-reading advance notice effect is not executed, or "executed" when the pre-reading notice effect is executed. Regarding the determination result at this time, it is determined whether or not it is determined to be "executed" (step AKS103).

If it is determined that the pre-reading advance notice effect is not to be executed (step AKS103; No), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. If it is determined that the pre-reading advance notice effect is to be executed (step AKS103; Yes), the remaining number of times is set (step AKS104). At step AKS104, the number of pending memories may be set as the remaining number of times. Subsequently, a continuous effect pattern is determined (step AKS105). For example, by extracting numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a continuous effect pattern, and referring to a continuous effect pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 according to the winning judgment result, a continuous effect pattern can be generated. is determined to be one of a plurality of patterns.

After the continuous effect pattern is determined in step AKS105, setting during pre-reading notice is performed (step AKS106), and the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. In step AKS106, for example, a pre-reading notice in-progress flag provided in a predetermined area of RAM 122 (effect control flag setting section, etc.) may be set to ON state.

In such pre-reading notice setting processing, when the judgment result at the time of winning is either a big win or a super reach at the time of losing, the pre-reading notice condition in step AKS101 can be satisfied, and the pre-reading notice execution in step AKS102 is possible. It becomes possible to determine the presence or absence of a continuous effect pattern by step AKS105. When the judgment result at the time of winning is a big hit, even if it is decided to "execute" to execute the pre-reading notice effect by step AKS 102 at a higher rate than in the case where the judgment result at the time of winning is determination of super reach at the time of loss. good. In addition, in step AKS105, when the judgment result at the time of winning is a big hit, the continuous effect pattern may be determined at a rate different from the case where the judgment result at the time of winning is determination of super reach at the time of loss. In this way, it is only necessary to be able to execute the continuous announcement effect, which is the prefetch announcement effect, based on the winning determination result, which is the prefetch determination result.

FIG. 16-7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing that can be executed in step S171 of FIG. 9 as the variable display start setting processing. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 16-7, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final stop design, etc., which will be the final decorative design as the variable display result of the decorative design (step AKS201). The effect control CPU 120 determines the final stop pattern based on the variable display contents such as the variable display result indicated by the variable display result notification command and the variable pattern indicated by the variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main substrate 11. You just have to decide. When the variation pattern setting process is executed in step S111 of the special symbol process process, the variation pattern designation command and the display result notification command are set to send the command at the start of the variation of the special symbol. It is transmitted from the board 11 to the performance control board 12 . The variation pattern specification command is an effect control command that specifies the variation pattern determined as the usage pattern. The variable display result notification command is an effect control command that specifies the variable display result determined using the random number value for special figure display result determination. As an example, the variable display contents according to the combination of the variation pattern and the variable display result include "non-reach (losing)", "reach (losing)", "non-probability (big hit)", and "probability (big hit)". I wish I had.

If the variable display content is "non-reach (losing)", the variable display state of the decorative pattern will not be in the ready-to-win state, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination will be stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display will be It becomes a "failure". When the variable display content is "ready (losing)", after the variable display state of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win state, the determined decorative pattern of the ready-to-lose combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display is "losing". becomes. When the variable display content is "non-probability variation (big win)", the display result of the variable display becomes "big win", and the game state after the big win game state ends becomes a time saving state. When the variable display content is "variable probability (big win)", the display result of the variable display becomes "big win", and the game state after the end of the big win game state becomes the variable probability state.

In step AKS201, for example, when the variable display content is "non-probability variation (big hit)", a combination of the same even-numbered definite decorative symbols is determined as the final stop symbol. In addition, when the variable display content is "probability variation (big hit)", it is sufficient if a combination of fixed decorative symbols of the same odd-numbered symbols can be determined as the final stop symbol. When the variable display content is "reach (loss)", a combination of fixed decoration symbols that will be a combination of reach loss as the final stop symbol is determined. When the variable display content is "non-reach (losing)", a combination of fixed decorative symbols that is a non-reach losing combination is determined as the final stop symbol. When determining the combination of fixed decoration patterns, for example, numerical data that is a random number value for design determination is extracted, and according to the variable display content, by referring to a pattern determination table that is stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared. What is necessary is just to determine the stop design of the decoration design.

After determining the final stop pattern, etc., the operation part presentation is determined (step AKS202). At step AKS202, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading announcement effect is being executed. For example, when the pre-reading notice flag is ON, it may be determined that the pre-reading notice effect is being executed. When the pre-reading advance notice effect is being executed, the remaining number of times is subtracted by 1, and the operating part effect pattern is determined according to the remaining number of times after the subtraction and the continuous effect pattern. The continuous effect pattern determined in step AKS105 of the pre-reading notice setting process may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM122. If the remaining number of times after the subtraction is "0", the pre-reading notice in-progress flag should be cleared and turned off.

In step AKS202, if it is determined that the pre-reading announcement effect is not being executed, the presence or absence of the operation part effect and the operation part effect pattern corresponding to the variable display of this time may be determined at a predetermined ratio. For example, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the operation part effect is extracted, and depending on whether or not the variable display result is a "jackpot", a prepared operation part effect determination table stored in advance in the RAM 121 is referred to. It is sufficient if it is possible to determine the presence or absence of operation part effects, that is, whether or not to execute the operation part effects, and the operation part effect pattern used when executing the operation part effects. The operation part effect corresponding to the variable display this time becomes executable when it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect is not being executed, and it becomes unexecutable when it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect is being executed. . Therefore, the operation part effect corresponding to this variable display is limited so that it cannot be executed during the execution of the variable display within the range of the variable display in which the operation part effect included in the pre-reading preview effect is executed. There is a limit set.

In step AKS202, when a specific interlocking effect including a special vibration effect is executed along with the specific effect based on the variation pattern, execution of the operation part effect may be restricted. For example, when the ready-to-reach effect of SP reach A is executed, execution of the operation part effect may be restricted by determining not to execute the operation part effect at any timing. In this case, within the range of the variable display in which the ready-to-win effect of the SP reach A is executed, a limitation is provided as a limit so that all the operation part effects cannot be executed while the variable display is being executed. Alternatively, when the reach performance of SP reach A is executed, it is possible to decide to execute the operation part performance at a predetermined ratio at the timing corresponding to the start of target fluctuation or the establishment of reach, while at the time of development of reach or Execution of the operation part presentation may be restricted by determining not to perform the operation part presentation at the timing corresponding to the winning/failure notification. In this case, within the range of the variable display in which the SP reach A ready-to-reach effect is executed, a limitation is provided so that some operation part effects cannot be executed during the execution of the variable display. . In addition, in the range of variable display in which a specific effect is executed, a limit may be provided so that part or all of the operation section effect is difficult to execute while the variable display is being executed. Thus, the effect control CPU 120 that determines the operation part effect in step AKS202 can limit the execution of the operation part effect including the vibration effect when the special vibration effect is executed.

Note that, in the case where the operation section effect is determined in step AKS202, when a special effect different from the specific effect is executed based on the variation pattern or the result of determination at the time of winning, more than when the special effect is not executed. A determination ratio of the operation part effects may be set so that part or all of the operation part effects are likely to be executed during execution of the variable display.

After determining the operation part effect, one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance is determined as the effect control pattern (step AKS203). For example, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (variable display effect control pattern) corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command, and sets it as the usage pattern. . In addition, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (operation part effect control pattern) corresponding to the operation part effect determined in step AKS202, and sets it as a usage pattern. good. Also, for example, the initial value of the production control process timer provided in a predetermined area (production control timer setting section, etc.) of the RAM 122 is set (step AKS204). Then, the variation of the decoration pattern or the like is started on the screen of the image display device 5 (step AKS205). At this time, for example, by transmitting the display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern (variable display effect control pattern) determined in step AKS203 to the VDP of the display control unit 123, the image The variation of the decorative design may be started in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the screen of the display device 5.

After setting the start of the variable display, settings are made for updating the pending display and the like in response to the start of the variable display (step AKS206). After updating the pending display, etc., the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2" corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step AKS207), and then the variable display start setting process is terminated.

FIG. 16-8 shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern. The production control pattern includes a variable display production control pattern shown in FIG. 16-8(A) and an operation unit production control pattern shown in FIG. 16-8(B). The variable display effect control pattern shown in FIG. 16-8 (A) executes various effects from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern in response to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command. contains control data used to control the The operation part effect control pattern shown in FIG. 16-8(B) includes control data used for controlling the execution of the operation part effect.

The variable display effect control pattern is composed of process data including, for example, effect control process timer judgment value, display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, vibration control data, end code, etc. . The production control process timer judgment value is a value (judgment value) that is compared with the production control process timer value, which is the stored value of the production control process timer, and is a judgment value corresponding to the execution time (production time) of each production operation. is preset. In place of the production control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined production control command is received from the main board 11, or a prescribed process is executed as a process for controlling the production operation in the production control CPU 120. Data indicating switching timing of effect control, etc., may be set corresponding to predetermined control contents and processing contents.

The display control data includes data indicating the display mode of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5, such as data indicating the variation mode of each decorative pattern during variable display of the decorative pattern. That is, the display control data is data that designates the display operation of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 . The audio control data includes data indicating the output mode of sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, such as data indicating the output mode of sound effects linked to the variable display of decorative patterns. That is, the audio control data is data that designates audio output operations from the speakers 8L and 8R. The lamp control data of the variable display effect control pattern includes, for example, data indicating the light emission driving mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern for light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED. That is, the lamp control data of the variable display effect control pattern is data that designates the light emission mode of the light emitter during the variable display of the decoration pattern.

The operation detection control data includes, for example, an effective detection period for effectively detecting a player's operation, such as a tilting operation on the operation lever of the stick controller 31A, an instruction operation on a trigger button, or a pressing operation on the push button 31B, and each operation. Data indicating the effect operation mode according to the detection of the player's motion, such as data designating the control contents of the effect operation when is effectively detected, is included. The vibration control data of the variable display effect control pattern includes, for example, data indicating the ON period and driving mode of the vibration motor 131 during the variable display of the decoration pattern. That is, the vibration control data of the variable display effect control pattern is data specifying the vibration mode of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B during the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the variation pattern.

It should be noted that these control data are not necessarily included in all the production control patterns, but production control patterns that include some control data according to the content of the production operation by each production control pattern. There may be Further, in the plurality of types of process data included in the production control pattern, the types of control data forming each process data may differ according to the content of the production operation executed at each timing. That is, some process data includes all of display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, and vibration control data, while other process data includes some of these data. you can Furthermore, various other control data such as movable body control data indicating the operation mode of the movable body 32 may be included.

In the production process during variable display in step S172 of the production control process process, each time the production control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches with any of the production control process timer determination values, and if it matches controls performance operations according to various corresponding control data. Thus, the effect control CPU120, according to the contents of the process data #1 ~ process data #n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the effect control pattern, the effect device (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9, light emitters such as decorative LEDs, vibration motor 131, movable body 32, etc.) are progressed. In each process data #1 to process data #n, display control data #1 to display control data #n, voice control data #1 to voice control, which are associated with effect control process timer determination values #1 to #n Data #n, lamp control data #1 to lamp control data #n, operation detection control data #1 to operation detection control data #n, and vibration control data #1 to vibration control data #n control the performance operation of the performance device. Effect control execution data #1 to effect control execution data #n that indicate the contents and specify the execution of effect control are configured.

The operation section effect control pattern is composed of process data including, for example, effect control process timer determination value, lamp control data, vibration control data, and the like. The lamp control data of the operation part effect control pattern includes data indicating the lighting operation mode of the light emitters in the operation part effect, such as the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2. That is, the lamp control data of the operation part effect control pattern is data specifying the lighting mode when the operation lever of the stick controller 31B and the push button 31B are to emit light in the light emission effect included in the operation part effect. The vibration control data of the operation part effect control pattern includes data indicating the ON period and driving mode of the vibration generator in the operation part effect, such as driving the vibration motor 131 . That is, the vibration control data of the operation part effect control pattern is data specifying the vibration mode when vibrating the operation lever of the stick controller 31B and the push button 31B in the vibration effect included in the operation part effect.

FIG. 16-9 shows a setting example of the timing at which the operation section effect can be executed in the vibration effect execution example AKE01. Timings AKT01 to AKT03 correspond to the start of the variable display of decorative symbols as the preliminary variation, and are timings at which the operation section presentation at the start of the preliminary variation can be executed. For example, when the continuous effect pattern is determined in step AKS105 of the pre-reading notice setting process, depending on the remaining number of times, the operation part effect is executed at some or all of the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at which the advance fluctuation starts. be able to. For example, when the remaining number of times is "3", the operation section effect can be executed at the timing AKT01, and when the remaining number of times is "2", the operation section effect can be executed at the timing AKT02, and the remaining number of times can be executed. is "1", it is possible to execute the operation section effect at the timing AKT03.

Timing AKT11 shown in FIG. 16-9 corresponds to the start of the variable display of the ornamental pattern as the target variation, and is the timing at which the operation section effect at the start of the target variation can be executed. For example, when the continuous effect pattern is determined in step AKS105 of the pre-reading notice setting process, the operation part by the operation part effect pattern according to the remaining number of times in part or all of the timings AKT01 to AKT03 that are the timing of the advance fluctuation start At the timing AKT11 when the target variation starts after the execution of the effect, the operation part effect according to the operation part effect pattern corresponding to the remaining number of times "0" can be executed. Also, at the timing AKT11, which is the time when the target variation starts, there is a case where the operation part effect can be executed. Specifically, when any one of the operation part effect patterns AKC11 to AKC13 is determined in step AKS202, the operation part effect by the determined operation part effect pattern is executed at the timing AKT11, which is the target variation start time. be able to.

Timings corresponding to the start of the variable display of decorative patterns, such as timings AKT01 to AKT03 or timing AKT11, may be capable of executing the operation section effect at the same time as the variable display of decorative patterns is started. , it may be possible to execute the operation section effect when a certain period of time has passed since the variable display of the decoration pattern was started. In this way, the timing corresponding to the start of the variable display of the decorative design may be any timing that can be reached by the start of the variable display of the decorative design.

Timings AKT12 to AKT14 shown in FIG. 16-9 are the operation part effects corresponding to the variable display this time, including the operation part effects when the reach is established, the operation part effects when the reach develops, and the operation part effects when the success/failure notification is swayed. It is the timing when each can be executed. For example, according to the operation part effect pattern determined in step AKS202 of the variable display start setting process, the operation part effect can be executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established, and the operation part effect can be executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach is developed. can be executed, and there are cases where the operation section effect can be executed at the timing AKT14, which is the timing of the success/fail notification. Specifically, in step AKS202, when one of the operation part production patterns AKC21 and AKC22 is determined, at timing AKT12 when reach is established, the operation part production pattern is executed according to the determined operation part production pattern. can be done. Further, when either of the operation part effect patterns AKC31 and AKC32 is determined in step AKS202, the operation part effect by the determined operation part effect pattern can be executed at the timing AKT13 when the ready-to-win situation develops. Alternatively, when the operation part effect pattern AKC41 is determined in step ASK202, the operation part effect pattern can be executed at the timing AKT14, which is the timing of the success/failure notification.

FIG. 16-10 shows a control example of the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC01. The operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC01 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes white shown in FIG. 16-10(A) and a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV01 shown in FIG. It can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the timings when the pre-variation starts. As shown in FIG. 16-10(B), the vibration presentation by the vibration pattern AKV01 is a vibration mode in which the on period and the off period are alternately repeated three times every 300 milliseconds. As shown in FIG. 16-10(A), the light emission effect associated with this vibration effect is such that the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit white light in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect. In the off period of the vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 are turned off and extinguished. The light emission effect that changes the light emission color to white according to the ON period of the vibration effect is, for example, a first luminance with a high white light emission luminance and a second luminance with a low light emission luminance every 30 milliseconds during an on period of 300 milliseconds. may be alternately repeated to periodically change the luminance of the white light.

FIG. 16-11 shows a control example of the operation part presentation by the operation part presentation patterns AKC02 and AKC03. The operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC02 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes red shown in FIG. 16-11(A) and a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 shown in FIG. It can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the timings when the pre-variation starts. The operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC03 includes the light emission effect in which the emission color becomes rainbow color shown in FIG. 16-11(A) and the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 shown in FIG. 16-11(B). , at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start times of the pre-variation. The vibration presentation by the vibration pattern AKV02 is a vibration mode in which the ON period of 1500 milliseconds continues, as shown in FIG. 16-11(B). As shown in FIG. 16-11(A), the light emitting effect associated with this vibration effect is such that the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 are continuously red in the operation part effect pattern AKC02 in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect. If it is the operating section effect pattern AKC03, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in rainbow colors. For example, the plurality of LEDs that make up the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light with red, reddish purple, bluish purple, blue, green, yellow, and orange transitions according to the elapsed time and the light emitting position. , the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 should emit rainbow colors. As for the light emitting positions of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2, it is possible to specify a plurality of sections, for example, the upper and lower portions of the lever lamp 9B1 and the entire button lamp 9B2. All or part of the luminance can be set.

FIG. 16-12 shows a control example of the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC11. The operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC11 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes white shown in FIG. 16-12(A) and a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 shown in FIG. It can be executed at the timing AKT11 when the target variation starts. The vibration presentation by the vibration pattern AKV02 is a vibration mode in which the ON period of 1500 milliseconds continues, as shown in FIG. 16-12(B). As shown in FIG. 16-12(A), the light emission effect associated with this vibration effect is such that the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit white light in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect. The light emission effect in which the light emission color changes to white according to the on period of the vibration effect is, for example, a first luminance with a high light emission luminance and a second luminance with a low light emission luminance every 30 milliseconds during an on period of 1500 milliseconds. may be alternately repeated to periodically change the luminance of the white light.

FIGS. 16-13 show control examples of the operation part presentation by the operation part presentation patterns AKC12 and AKC13. The operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC12 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes red shown in FIG. 16-13(A) and a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV03 shown in FIG. It can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the time when the target variation starts. The operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC13 includes the light emission effect in which the emission color becomes rainbow color shown in FIG. 16-13(A) and the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV03 shown in FIG. 16-13(B). , can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the time when the target variation starts. The vibration presentation by the vibration pattern AKV03 is a vibration mode in which the ON period of 3000 milliseconds continues, as shown in FIG. 16-13(B). As shown in FIG. 16-13(A), the light emitting effect associated with this vibration effect is intermittent with the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 in red if the operating part effect pattern AKC12 is matched with the ON period of the vibration effect. , and if it is the operating section rendering pattern AKC13, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit rainbow colors. For example, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 alternately repeat a first luminance with a high red emission luminance and a second luminance with a low emission luminance every 20 milliseconds during the ON period of the vibration effect, thereby emitting red light. The brightness may change periodically. In this case, the light emission effect included in the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC12 changes the light emission brightness at a shorter cycle than the light emission effect included in the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC11. becomes. As described above, as a rendering mode of the lighting rendering, not only the lighting color but also the lighting period may be changed so as to indicate the reliability of the big win. Note that red light may be emitted intermittently by alternately repeating red light emission and non-light emission every 20 milliseconds during the ON period of the vibration effect. As an effect mode of the light emission effect, while the light emission cycle is common, the light emission color may be made different to indicate the reliability of the big win. In this way, for example, when the luminescent colors in the luminous effect are different, it is sufficient to reduce the control burden of the luminous effect by standardizing the luminescence cycle.

FIGS. 16-14 show an example of control of the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC21. The operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC21 can be executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established, corresponding to the effect AKR1 which becomes the effect when the reach is established shown in FIG. 16-14(C) includes a light emission effect in which the light emission color becomes pink, and a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV11 shown in FIG. 16-14(C). The effect AKR1, which is the effect when the reach is established, may be, for example, a effect of displaying a effect image showing the reach line on the display screen of the image display device 5, or an effect of displaying a background image corresponding to the establishment of the reach. In addition, any production associated with establishment of reach may be used. As shown in FIG. 16-14(C), the vibration presentation by the vibration pattern AKV11 is a vibration mode in which the ON period and the OFF period are alternately repeated multiple times every predetermined time (for example, 100 milliseconds). As shown in FIG. 16-14(B), the light emission effect accompanying this vibration effect is such that the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit pink light in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect. In the OFF period of the vibration presentation, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 are turned off and extinguished.

FIGS. 16-15 show control examples of operation part effects by the operation part effect pattern AKC22. The operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC22 can be executed in response to the effect AKR2 which becomes the effect when the ready-to-win state is established shown in FIG. 16-15(C) includes a light emission effect in which the emission color is orange, and a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV12 shown in FIG. 16-15(C). The effect AKR2, which is the effect when ready-to-win is established, may be, for example, a effect of displaying an effect image showing the reach line on the display screen of the image display device 5, or an effect of displaying a background image corresponding to the establishment of ready-to-win. In addition, any production associated with establishment of reach may be used. It is sufficient that the effects AKR1 and AKR2, which are effects at the time of establishment of ready-to-win state, have different effects. As shown in FIG. 16-15(C), the vibration performance by the vibration pattern AKV12 is an ON period of the first vibration ON time (eg 100 milliseconds) and an OFF period of the first vibration OFF time (eg 100 milliseconds). After two alternating repetitions, a vibrating mode comprising an on period of a second vibrating on time (eg, 250 ms) and an on period of a third vibrating on time (eg, 500 ms). As shown in FIG. 16-15(B), the light-emitting effect associated with this vibration effect causes the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 to emit orange light in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect. In the off period of the vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 are turned off and extinguished. In addition, when the ON period of the vibration effect is different from the vibration ON time, the light emission pattern of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may be changed. For example, during the ON period of the first vibration ON time, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 continuously emit orange light. On the other hand, during the ON periods of the second vibration ON time and the third vibration ON time, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 intermittently emit orange light. The lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 intermittently emit orange light by alternately repeating orange light emission and non-light emission every 20 milliseconds during the ON period of the second vibration ON time and the third vibration ON time. do it.

The operation part effects by the operation part effect patterns AKC31 and AKC32 can be executed corresponding to the effects AKS1 and AKS2 which are the effects when the reach develops at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops, and the light emission color becomes white. , and a vibration performance by the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22. In the case of the operation part production pattern AKC31, the vibration production by the vibration pattern AKV21 becomes a vibration mode of the ON period corresponding to the production AKS1. In the case of the operation part production pattern AKC32, the vibration production by the vibration pattern AKV22 becomes a vibration mode of the ON period according to the production AKS2. As for the light emission effect associated with these vibration effects, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit white light in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect in any of the operation part effect patterns AKC31 and AKC32.

The operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC41 can be executed corresponding to the win/fail effect at the timing AKT14 when the win/fail notification effect is performed. ,including. The vibration presentation by the vibration pattern AKV31 is a vibration mode in which the ON period is 1500 milliseconds or more. In the light emitting effect associated with this vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit gold light in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect.

As shown in FIGS. 16-12 and 16-13, among the operation section effects that can be executed at the timing AKT11 when the target variation starts, the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect has a white emission color. , and when the emission color is red or iridescent, which is different from white, and when the emission color is white, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 is executed, and the emission color becomes red or iridescent. In this case, a vibration effect is executed with a vibration pattern AKV03 different from the vibration pattern AKV02. Therefore, the vibration mode of the vibration effect differs between when the luminescent color is white and when the luminescent color is red or rainbow. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation part effect is common, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different according to the light emission mode of the light emission effect, so that the operation member such as the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B can be used. To improve amusement in a game by properly diversifying performances. It should be noted that, in both the case where the luminescent color is red and the case where the luminescent color is iridescent, the common vibration pattern AKV03 is used for vibration presentation. In other words, the vibration mode of the vibration presentation is common between the case where the luminescent color is red and the case where the luminescent color is rainbow. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation section effect is common, the vibration mode of the vibration effect may be common regardless of the light emission mode of the light emission effect.

The operation part effects that can be executed at the timing AKT11, which is the start time of the target variation, include the operation part effects with the operation part effect pattern AKC11, and the execution of the light emission effect in which the emission color becomes white with the vibration effect with the vibration pattern AKV02. I'm in. Operation part effects that can be executed at timing AKT13 when reach develops include operation part effects using operation part effects patterns AKC31 and AKC32. contains something In this way, the operation part effect executed at the timing AKT11 when the target variation starts and the operation part effect executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops become white, which is the common emission color, and the vibration effect are different. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation part effect is different, the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is common, whereas the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different, so that the operation member such as the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is used. To improve amusement in a game by properly diversifying performances. Note that the operation part effects that can be executed at the timing AKT11, which is the start time of the target variation, include the operation part effects that use the operation part effects patterns AKC12 and AKC13, and the lighting effects that emit light in red or rainbow colors. there is As in this case, the operation part effect executed at the timing AKT11 when the target variation starts and the operation part effect executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops are different in the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the vibration effect may also have different vibration modes. As in the case where the light emission color becomes white, the operation part effect executed at the timing AKT11 when the target variation starts is different from the operation part effect executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops. Including what they have in common. Further, as in the case where the light emission color becomes red or rainbow, the operating part effect executed at the timing AKT11 when the target variation starts is the operating part effect executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops. The effects may include different lighting modes. The operating part effect executed at the timing AKT13 when the ready-to-win situation develops does not have to include the lighting mode of the lighting effect different from the operating part effect executed at the timing AKT11 when the object variation starts.

At the timing AKT12 when reach is established, the operation part effects that can be executed are the operation part effects with the operation part effects patterns AKC21 and AKC22, and the light emission effects that change the light emission color to pink or orange with the vibration effects of the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12. Contains what to do. All of these operation part effects have a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation part effects that can be executed at the timing AKT14, which is the timing of the winning/failure notification, include the operation part effects with the operation part effect pattern AKC41, and the light emission effects that change the light emission color to gold along with the vibration effect with the vibration pattern AKV31. I'm in. This operating part effect has a jackpot reliability of 100%. In this way, the operation part performance executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established and the operation part performance executed at the timing AKT14 when the success/failure notification is inflated, the reliability of the big hit is 100% in common, and the vibration performance are different. In addition, the operation part effect executed at timing AKT12 when the ready-to-win state is established and the operation part effect executed at timing AKT14 when the win/fail notification is inflicted have different emission colors and different vibration modes of the vibration effects. In this way, when the timings for executing the operation part effects are different, the reliability of the big hit is common, but the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different, or the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different, so that the stick controller 31A , and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified to enhance the amusement of the game.

The operation part effects that can be executed at the timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation, are the operation part effects by the operation part effect patterns AKC11 to AKC13. Includes those that perform lighting effects. At the timing AKT12 when reach is established, the operation part effects that can be executed are the operation part effects with the operation part effects patterns AKC21 and AKC22, and the light emission effects that change the light emission color to pink or orange with the vibration effects of the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12. Contains what to do. In this way, the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different between the operation part effect executed at the timing AKT11 when the target variation starts and the operation part effect executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established, and the vibration of the vibration effect. A case where the mode is different is provided. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation part effect is different, the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is different, and the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different, so that the effects using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are appropriately diversified. It is possible to improve the game interest.

At the timing AKT12 when reach is established, the operation part effects that can be executed are the operation part effects with the operation part effects patterns AKC21 and AKC22, and the light emission effects that change the light emission color to pink or orange with the vibration effects of the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12. Contains what to do. The operation part effects that can be executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops include the operation part effects with the operation part effects patterns AKC31 and AKC32, and the light emission effects that change the emission color to white with the vibration effects with the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22. contains things. In this way, the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is different between the operating part effect executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established and the operating part effect performed at the timing AKT13 when the ready reach develops, and the vibration mode of the vibration effect. There are different cases. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation part production is different, the lighting mode of the lighting production is different, or the vibration mode of the vibration production is different. Appropriate diversification can improve game interest. Note that the operation section effects that can be executed at the timing AKT12 when the ready-to-win state is established may include execution of a light emission effect in which the light emission color becomes white. Also, the operation section effects that can be executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach is developed may include execution of a light emission effect in which the light emission color becomes pink or orange. As a result, when the timing of executing the operation part production is different, even if the light emission mode of the light emission production is the same, the vibration mode of the vibration production is different, so that the production using the operation member such as the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B can be performed. Appropriate diversification can improve game interest.

The jackpot reliability when the operation part performance is executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 which are the timings of the start of the advance fluctuation is 50% or more, 70% or more, or 100% depending on the operation part performance pattern. The jackpot reliability when the operation part performance is executed at the timing AKT11 which is the target variation start time is any one of 50% or more, 70% or more, or 100% according to the operation part performance pattern. The reliability of the big hit when the operation part performance is executed at the timing AKT12 when the ready-to-win state is established becomes 100% regardless of the operation part performance pattern. The reliability of the jackpot when the operation part performance is executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach is developed is 50% or more regardless of the operation part performance pattern. The reliability of the big hit becomes 100% when the operation part presentation is executed at the timing AKT14 which is the timing of the success/failure notification. Therefore, the jackpot reliability when the operation section effect is executed may differ depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect and the timing when the vibration effect is executed. Further, the vibration mode of the vibration effect may differ depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect. Note that the vibration mode of the vibration presentation includes the duration of the vibration corresponding to the length of the ON period, the vibration intensity by driving the vibration motor 131, the combination of the ON period and the OFF period, the combination of strong vibration and weak vibration in the vibration intensity, and others. , the operation lever of the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B, and other arbitrary vibration patterns for vibrating the operation members.

A plurality of specific effects that can be executed according to the progress of the game include movable body motion, image display, music reproduction, big win determination notification, and big win type lotteries CH1 and CH2 in the reach performance of SP reach A. The reach effect of the SP reach A has, for example, a jackpot reliability of about 40%. Therefore, when the vibration performance by the operation part performance is executed, the reliability of the big win becomes higher than when the reach performance of the SP reach A is executed, and the ratio of being controlled to the big win game state when it is executed is high. Become. Movable body motion, image display, and music reproduction in the ready-to-win effect of SP reach-A are all executed as a part of the ready-to-win effect, so they do not have the reliability of big hits individually. Also, the big hit decision notification is an effect for definitely notifying that the variable display result will be a "big hit". The jackpot type lotteries CH1 and CH2 are jackpot type lottery effects corresponding to the number of rounds, etc., corresponding to the case of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state. The jackpot confirmation notification and jackpot type lottery CH1, CH2 are similar to the reach performance of SP reach A in that the player can recognize without a doubt that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the game state is controlled to the jackpot. It is different from the production having a big hit reliability. As described above, among a plurality of specific performances, the reliability of the big win is higher when the vibration performance by the performance of the operating part is executed than when the specific performance having the reliability of the big win is executed. It should be set as follows. Further, the reliability of the big hit is set to be higher when the vibration performance by the operation part performance is executed than when the vibration performance by the operation part performance is not executed.

FIGS. 16-16 show an execution example of an effect by lighting the game effect lamp 9. FIG. The game effect lamps 9 include an upper frame lamp 9C, a left frame lamp 9M and a right frame lamp 9N which are different from the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2. Here, a plurality of production execution examples AKF01 to AKF04 are shown according to the execution mode of the production by light emission.

In the effect execution example AKF01, when the background display of the image display device 5 is a white display color, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are caused to emit white light in accordance with the background display. , the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are illuminated in red by the light emission effect in the operation part effect. For example, the operation part effect by either the operation part effect patterns AKC02 or AKC12 includes a light emission effect in which the light emission color changes to red along with the vibration effect.

In the effect execution example AKF02, when the background display of the image display device 5 is a red display color, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are caused to emit red light corresponding to the background display. , the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are illuminated in rainbow colors by the light emission effect in the operation part effect. For example, the operation part effect by either the operation part effect pattern AKC03 or AKC13 includes a light emission effect in which the light emission color becomes rainbow with the vibration effect.

In effect execution example AKF03, when the background display of image display device 5 changes from black to white from left to right, upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N are displayed in the background display. While emitting light so as to change from black to white according to the color, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are illuminated in white by the light emission effect in the operation part effect. For example, the operation part effect by any one of the operation part effect patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes white with the vibration effect.

In the effect execution example AKF04, when the character display on the image display device 5 is displayed in blue, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are caused to emit blue light in accordance with the character display. , the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are illuminated in white by the light emission effect in the operation part effect. For example, the operation part effect by any one of the operation part effect patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes white with the vibration effect.

For example, the background display and character display of the image display device 5, and other predetermined effects by displaying an arbitrary effect image can be executed according to the progress of the game including the variable display of decorative symbols. In the effect process during variable display executed in step S172 of the effect control process process, the control data read from the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203 of the variable display start setting process is used to perform variable display, etc. Control is performed to execute a predetermined effect in accordance with the progress of the game. This control data includes display control data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, and lamp control data for controlling the light emission of the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N. there is During execution of such a predetermined effect, when the operation part effect is executed, the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are operated by the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2, and the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect in the operation part effect is performed. can emit light in the following light emission mode. In the variable display effect process executed in step S172 of the effect control process process, the control data read from the operation part effect control pattern determined in step AKS203 of the variable display start setting process is used to control the operation part effect. Execution control is performed. The control data includes lamp control data for controlling the light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2, and vibration control data for controlling the vibration of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B by driving the vibration motor 131. It is included. In response to the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect in such an operation part effect, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N can emit light in a light emission mode different from the light emission effect of the operation part effect according to the predetermined effect. is. In this way, the operating members such as the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B and the other light emitting members such as the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M and the right frame lamp 9N are made to emit light in different manners. It is possible to appropriately diversify the production by and improve the game interest.

In addition to the screen display of the image display device 5, or instead of the screen display of the image display device 5, the predetermined effect may be executed by audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In this case, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are caused to emit light in an emission color that matches the sound output such as BGM, while the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are operated. Light may be emitted in the light emission color of the light emission effect in the part effect. For example, when the speaker 8L, 8R outputs a message that gives the player an impression of red color, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are caused to emit red light corresponding to the sound output. On the other hand, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B may be illuminated in white by the light emission effect in the operation part effect. Even in this way, the operation members such as the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B and the other light emitting members such as the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N can be made to emit light differently. , it is possible to appropriately diversify the production by light emission and improve the amusement of the game. The predetermined effect is to darken the screen display of the image display device 5, stop the audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and turn off the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, the right frame lamp 9N, etc. may be When this predetermined effect is executed, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B may be vibrated by the vibration effect in the operation part effect. By executing the operation part effect during execution of such a predetermined effect, the player's attention is further increased to the vibration effect of vibrating the operation member such as the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

FIGS. 16-17 show setting examples of the performance period in which the specific interlocking performance can be executed in the vibration performance execution example AKE02. The period AKZ01 is a period during which a specific interlocking effect including a special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV41 can be executed in accordance with the action of the movable body in the reach effect of the SP reach A. The specific interlocking effect that can be executed in the period AKZ01 includes a specific light emitting effect in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B emit blue light accompanying the special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV41. The period AKZ02 is a period during which a specific interlocking effect including a special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV42 can be executed along with the image display in the reach effect of the SP reach A. The specific interlocking effect that can be executed in the period AKZ02 includes a specific light emitting effect in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B emit gold in accordance with the special vibration effect of the vibration pattern AKV42. The period AKZ03 is a period during which a specific interlocking effect including a special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV43 can be executed along with the music reproduction in the reach effect of the SP reach A. The specific interlocking effect that can be executed during the period AKZ03 includes a specific light emitting effect in which the color of light emitted from the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B changes from blue through red to gold in accordance with the special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV43. .

The period AKZ04 is a period during which a specific interlocking effect including a special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV44 can be executed along with the notification of the determination of the big hit. The specific interlocking effect that can be executed in the period AKZ04 includes a specific light emitting effect in which the control lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B emit rainbow colors in accordance with the special vibration effect of the vibration pattern AKV44. The notification of the confirmation of the big hit includes stopping display of the confirmed decorative pattern which is the display result of the decorative pattern, display of a scene in which the friend character wins the battle with the enemy character in the ready-to-win effect, the speaker 8L, By outputting a notification sound indicating the confirmation of the big win by 8R, lighting the notification lamp of the confirmation of the big win included in the game effect lamp 9, or by combining some or all of these, the player can arbitrarily recognize the big win. It is sufficient if it is a case of executing the notification of.

It should be noted that, following the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC41 executed at the timing AKT14 which is the time of winning notification, the specific interlocking effect in the period AKZ04 associated with the notification of the determination of the big hit may be executed. In this case, the impression of the performance can be enhanced and the amusement of the game can be improved by executing the specific interlocking performance accompanying the announcement of the determination of the big win while the expectation of the player is heightened by the performance of the operation part. When the specific interlocking effect is executed following such an operation part effect, the vibration mode of the vibration effect or the special vibration effect is changed between the operation part effect and the specific interlocking effect, or the light emission effect or the specific light emission effect is changed. The light emission modes may be varied. For example, the vibration intensity may be different between the vibration effect and the special vibration effect. The light emission luminance may be different between the light emission effect and the specific light emission effect. To make it possible to easily recognize the distinction between the operation part performance and the specific interlocking performance by making the vibration mode and the light emission mode different to give a sharpness to the performance, appropriately diversify the performance, and improve the amusement of the game. can be done.

The period AKZ05 is a period during which a specific interlocking effect including a special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV44 can be executed in association with the jackpot type lotteries CH1 and CH2. The specific interlocking effect that can be executed in the period AKZ05 is a specific emission in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B emit white light in accordance with the special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV44 when the jackpot type lottery CH1 is executed. Includes performances. The specific interlocking effect that can be executed in the period AKZ05 is that when the big win type lottery CH2 is executed, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the emission color of the push button 31B become rainbow colors in accordance with the special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV44. Includes lighting effects.

FIGS. 16-18 to 16-20 show the case where SP reach A reach effect is executed. FIGS. 16-18 show production execution examples AKG01 to AKG03 when movable body motions in SP reach A reach production are executed. FIGS. 16-19 show production execution examples AKG11 to AKG13 when image display is executed in the SP reach A reach production. FIG. 16-20 shows production execution examples AKG21 to AKG23 when music reproduction is executed in the SP reach A reach production.

The position of the movable body 32 is not changed from the initial position when the variable display of the decoration pattern becomes the ready-to-win state and the ready-to-win performance of the normal ready-to-win is executed. The initial position of the movable body 32 may be any position that is in front of the lower end of the display screen of the image display device 5 . Subsequently, when the ready-to-win effect of the SP reach-A is started due to the reach development, the position of the movable body 32 is changed from the initial position as in the effect execution example AKG01, and the movable body action is performed. At this time, the position of the movable body 32 is changed by upward linear movement or parallel movement from the initial position. An effect image showing a message such as “Reach A” is displayed. Thereafter, as the position of the movable body 32 continues to be changed, the position of the movable body 32 passes through the vicinity of the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 as in the effect execution example AKG02. At this time, at the display position of the image display device 5 corresponding to the window portion of the movable body 32, an effect image showing a message such as "This change is..." is displayed.

Along with the position change of the movable body 32 that becomes the movable body motion as in the performance execution examples AKG01 and AKG02, a specific interlocking performance is executed, and the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate and emit light. The specific interlocking effect that is executed together with the movable body motion in the reach effect of SP reach A includes a special vibration effect with vibration pattern AKV41 and a specific light emission effect that emits blue light during the period AKZ01 shown in FIGS. 16-17. , contains Further, when the position of the movable body 32 continues to be changed and the position of the movable body 32 reaches the front of the upper end of the display screen of the image display device 5 as in the example of execution of the effect AKG03, the specific interlocking effect in the period AKZ01 ends. do. For example, the period AKZ01 corresponding to the time when the position of the movable body 32 reaches from the front of the lower end to the front of the upper end of the display screen, which is the initial position, is 2500 milliseconds. A special vibration effect may be executed in a vibration mode in which the lever or the push button 31B is vibrated during the ON period. Alternatively, during the period AKZ01, the special vibration effect may be executed in a vibration mode that switches between an ON period in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B vibrate every 250 milliseconds and an OFF period in which they do not vibrate. Further, the specific light emission effect may be executed in a light emission mode in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is caused to emit blue light continuously over the period AKZ01. Alternatively, during the period AKZ01, a specific light emission effect is executed in a light emission mode in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is switched between blue light emission (lighting) and non-light emission (extinguishing) every 250 milliseconds. good too.

When the movable body motion in the reach effect of SP reach A such as the effect execution examples AKG01 to AKG03 is executed, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N, for example, the position of the movable body 32 is changed. Light may be emitted in a light emission pattern in which the light emission color and light emission luminance gradually change from the lower side to the upper side as the light is emitted. For example, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N emit blue light when the position of the movable body 32 is changed, and the light emission luminance changes in a wave-like manner according to height and time. It is sufficient to emit light in such a manner as to

After the movable body motion is completed as in the effect execution example AKG03, the effect image is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 as in the effect execution example AKG11 as the image display in the reach effect of the SP reach A. At this time, for example, the character display indicating the message "Extremely Hot" is displayed in gold color. In addition, as in effect execution example AKG12, an effect image can be added around the character display and displayed.

Along with the display of the effect image that becomes the image display such as the effect execution examples AKG11 and AKG12, the specific interlocking effect is executed, and the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are caused to vibrate and emit light. The specific interlocking effect that is executed together with the image display in the reach effect of SP reach A is, during the period AKZ02 shown in FIGS. contains. When the character display indicating the message ends and the display of the effect image in the ready-to-win effect different from the character display is started as in the effect execution example AKG13, the specific interlocking effect in the period AKZ02 ends. Note that, for example, the period AKZ02 corresponding to the character display indicating the message "Super hot" is 1000 milliseconds, and the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are vibrated continuously over this period AKZ02, which is the ON period. You may perform special vibration production in a mode. Further, during the period AKZ02, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are operated in a light emission mode that alternately repeats a first brightness with a high gold emission brightness and a second brightness with a low emission brightness every 10 milliseconds. A specific light emission effect may be executed.

When the image display in the reach effect of the SP reach A such as the effect execution examples AKG11 to AKG13 is executed, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, for example. The light emission color should be gold in accordance with the image display and the light emission color of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. For example, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N emit gold in accordance with the display of the effect image that becomes an image display such as the effect execution examples AKG11 and AKG12, and the light emission color becomes gold, as in the effect execution example AKG13. When the display of the effect image is started, light may be emitted in a color different from gold.

After the display of the effect image as in the effect execution example AKG13 is started, the sound of the music phrase PH01 is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as in the effect execution example AKG21 as music reproduction in the reach effect of SP reach A. Subsequently, as in the effect execution example AKG22, the sound of the music phrase PH02 is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. After that, as in production execution example AKG23, the sound of music phrase PH03 is output from speakers 8L and 8R. In this way, by sequentially outputting the sounds of a plurality of music phrases PH01 to PH03 in accordance with the progress of the production, it is sufficient that the entire musical composition can be reproduced in the SP reach A reach production.

Along with the output of the sound for music reproduction, such as the production execution examples AKG21 to AKG23, a specific interlocking production is executed, and the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are caused to vibrate and emit light. The specific interlocking effect that is executed along with the music reproduction in the reach effect of SP reach A is, during the period AKZ03 shown in FIGS. and a specific lighting effect that changes from red to gold. In the effect execution example AKG21, a specific light emission effect in which the light emission color becomes blue is executed in response to the sound output of the music phrase PH01. In the effect execution example AKG22, a specific light emission effect is executed in which the light emission color becomes red in response to the sound output of the music phrase PH02. In the effect execution example AKG23, a specific light emission effect is executed in which the light emission color becomes gold in response to the sound output of the music phrase PH03. In this way, it is only necessary to execute a specific light emission effect in which the light emission color changes to a plurality of colors as the sounds of a plurality of music phrases PH01 to PH03 are sequentially output according to the progress of the effect.

FIG. 16-21 shows a case where the musical scale changes in order as the performance progresses as a music reproduction execution example AKH01. In this case, as shown for example in FIG. Sounds corresponding to the scale are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Here, the scale of do that is output last may be one octave higher than the scale of do that is output first.

Such a specific interlocking effect associated with music playback includes a specific lighting effect in which the light emission color changes as shown in FIG. and a vibration effect that is a vibration effect, and can be executed in a period AKZ03 corresponding to music reproduction. The vibration effect shown in FIG. 16-21(C) is a vibration mode in which ON periods and OFF periods are alternately repeated multiple times in accordance with the output period of the sound corresponding to each scale. As shown in FIG. 16-21(B), the specific light emission effect associated with this special vibration effect is generated by adjusting the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 according to the output period of the sound corresponding to each scale and the ON period of the special vibration effect. The color of the emitted light changes in order between blue, red, and gold. The lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 do not emit light and are extinguished during the stop period of the sound output and the OFF period of the special vibration effect. It should be noted that, in the output period of the sound corresponding to each scale, the lighting mode of the specific lighting effect may be changed for each scale. For example, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are caused to emit blue light continuously for a period corresponding to the scale of Do, which is output first. Next, during the period corresponding to the scale of re, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are caused to emit light in a light emission mode that alternately repeats a first luminance with a high red emission luminance and a second luminance with a low emission luminance. After that, during the period corresponding to the mi scale, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are caused to emit light in a light emission mode that switches between gold light emission (lighting) and non-light emission (extinguishing). In this way, by adopting a light emission mode in which the light emission amount differs for each light emission color corresponding to each musical scale, it is possible to appropriately diversify the presentation and improve the amusement of the game.

The reach effect of SP reach A is controlled to be executable by using the control data read from the variable display effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command. The variable display effect control pattern shown in FIG. 16-8 (A) is based on lamp control data and vibration control data, and is accompanied by specific effects such as movable body operation, image display, and music playback in the reach effect of SP reach A. It is set to be able to execute a specific interlocking effect. In the specific interlocking effect, a special vibration effect can be executed by any one of the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44. The special vibration effect by any of these vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44 and the vibration effect by the vibration pattern in the operation part effect are different in vibration mode. In this way, the vibration mode is different between the vibration effect in the operation section effect that can be executed regardless of the specific effect and the special vibration effect in the specific interlocking effect that can be executed in accordance with the execution of the specific effect. It is possible to appropriately diversify the performance using the operation member such as the push button 31B, thereby improving the game interest.

When executing the operation part effect, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are illuminated using the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 in accordance with the vibration effect of vibrating the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. A light emission effect is executed. When executing the specific interlocking effect, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are operated using the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 along with the special vibration effect that vibrates the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. A specific light emission effect that emits light is executed. By executing an effect including vibration and light emission of operation members such as the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, the player who has been paying attention to the image display on the display screen of the image display device 5, for example, can now enjoy the image display and the image display. By recognizing the vibration and light emission of different operation members, the unexpectedness of the production is enhanced.

In the period AKZ01 shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the movement of the movable body 32, which is the movement of the movable object in the reach performance of the SP reach A, makes it possible to execute the specific interlocking performance including the special vibration performance by the vibration pattern AKV41. In this way, by executing the special vibration effect during the operation period of the movable body 32, it is possible to appropriately diversify the effects using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In the period AKZ04 shown in FIGS. 16-17, along with the notification of the confirmation of the big hit, it becomes possible to execute the specific interlocking performance including the special vibration performance by the vibration pattern AKV44. In this way, the special vibration performance can be executed along with the notification of the control to the jackpot game state, thereby appropriately diversifying the performance using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, thereby improving the game interest. be able to.

The specific interlocking effect includes a specific light emission effect by emitting light from the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 along with the special vibration effect by any of the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44. A light emission mode such as a light emission color differs between the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect in the operation part effect and the specific light emission effect accompanying the special vibration effect in the specific interlocking effect. In this way, by differentiating the light emitting mode according to the operation part performance and the specific interlocking performance, the performance using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B is appropriately diversified, and the game interest is improved. can be done.

As shown in FIGS. 16-10 and 16-11, among the operation unit effects that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 that are the start times of the preliminary fluctuation, the light emission mode of the light emission effect associated with the vibration effect is white. , and the case where the emission color becomes red or rainbow color different from white, and when the emission color becomes white, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV01 is executed, and the emission color becomes red or rainbow color. In that case, a vibration effect is executed according to the vibration pattern AKV02. As shown in FIGS. 16-12 and 16-13, among the operation section effects that can be executed at the timing AKT11 when the target variation starts, the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect has a white emission color. and cases where the emission color is red or iridescent, which is different from white, and when the emission color becomes white, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 is executed, and when the emission color becomes red or iridescent. , the vibration effect is executed by the vibration pattern AKV03. Therefore, the vibration effect of the operation part effect that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 that is the start of the preliminary fluctuation and the vibration effect of the operation part effect that can be executed at the timing AKT11 that is the start of the target fluctuation. As well as being different, the vibration mode is also different. In addition, the vibration effect of the operation part effect that can be executed at the timing AKT01 that is the start time of the preliminary fluctuation and the vibration effect of the operation part effect that can be executed at the timing AKT11 that is the time of the start of the target fluctuation, and the light emission color is white and red. By becoming one of the rainbow colors, the light emission mode of the light emission effect is common. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation section effect is different, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different, while the light emission mode of the light emission effect is common. It is possible to appropriately diversify the performance using the member and improve the game interest.

Vibration effects of operation part effects that can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start times of advance fluctuations, are executed at timing AKT11, which is the start time of target fluctuations, based on the result of winning judgment, which is the result of pre-reading judgment. Executed in the variable presentation prior to the variable presentation to be executed. In this way, by varying the timing at which the operation part effects are executed, the effects using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push buttons 31B can be appropriately diversified, and the game interest can be improved.

As shown in FIGS. 16-10 and 16-11, among the operation unit effects that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 that are the start times of the preliminary fluctuation, the light emission mode of the light emission effect associated with the vibration effect is white. , and the case where the emission color becomes red or rainbow color different from white, and when the emission color becomes white, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV01 is executed, and the emission color becomes red or rainbow color. In that case, a vibration effect is executed by the vibration pattern AKV02. Therefore, the vibration mode of the vibration effect differs between when the luminescent color is white and when the luminescent color is red or rainbow. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation part effect is common, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different according to the light emission mode of the light emission effect, so that the operation member such as the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B can be used. To improve amusement in a game by properly diversifying performances. It should be noted that, in both the case where the luminescent color is red and the case where the luminescent color is iridescent, the vibration effect by the common vibration pattern AKV02 is executed. Therefore, the vibration mode of the vibration presentation is common between the case where the luminescent color is red and the case where the luminescent color is rainbow. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation section effect is common, the vibration mode of the vibration effect may be common regardless of the light emission mode of the light emission effect.

The continuous effect pattern used for executing the continuous advance notice effect is an operation part effect pattern in which the light emission color in the light emission effect differs depending on whether the remaining number of times is other than '0' or when the remaining number of times is '0'. There are things that contain For example, the continuous effect pattern AKD02 shown in FIG. 16-5(A) includes an operating part effect pattern AKC01 when the remaining number of times is "1" and an operating part effect pattern AKC12 when the remaining number of times is "0". , contains The operation part presentation by the operation part presentation pattern AKC01 includes a light emission presentation in which the emission color is white. The operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC12 includes a light emission effect in which the light emission color becomes red. Therefore, the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect of the operation part effect that can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03 that is the start of the preliminary fluctuation, and the light emission effect that is accompanied by the vibration effect of the operation part effect that can be executed at the timing AKT11 that is the start of the target fluctuation , the light emission mode is different. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation part effect is different, the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is different. A game interest can be improved.

In the continuous performance pattern used for executing the continuous advance notice performance, the reliability of the big hit of the operation part performance pattern corresponding to the small number of remaining times is higher than the reliability of the big win of the operation part performance pattern corresponding to the large number of remaining times. is set to prevent it from becoming degraded. For example, in the continuous effect pattern shown in FIG. 16-5(A), if the operating part effect pattern AKC02 when the remaining number of times is "1", the operating part effect pattern when the remaining number of times is "0" , so as to prevent the operation unit effect pattern AKC11. If it is the operation part effect pattern AKC03 when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation part effect pattern AKC11 or the operation part effect pattern AKC12 is assumed as the operation part effect pattern when the remaining number of times is "0". configured to prevent As a result, even though the operating part performance with high reliability of the big win is executed first at the start of the advance fluctuation, the performance of the operating part with low reliability of the big win is prevented from being executed later at the start of the target fluctuation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in the game without lowering the player's expectations.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 16-10 and 16-11, among the operation section effects that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 that are the start times of the pre-variation, the light-emitting mode of the light-emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect is the light-emitting color. When the light emission color becomes white, and when the light emission color becomes red or rainbow color different from white, when the light emission color becomes white, it emits light according to the ON period and OFF period of the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV01. and non-light emission are repeated, and when the light emission color becomes red, light is continuously emitted in accordance with the ON period of the vibration presentation by the vibration pattern AKV02. As shown in FIGS. 16-12 and 16-13, among the operation section effects that can be executed at the timing AKT11 when the target variation starts, the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect has a white emission color. When the luminous color is white, it emits light according to the ON period of the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02, and the luminous color changes to red. In this case, light is emitted intermittently according to the ON period of the vibration presentation by the vibration pattern AKV03. Since the setting of the ON period is different between the vibration effects by the vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03, the light emission mode such as the light emission period in the light emission effect is different. Even in this way, it is sufficient if the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is different when the timing of executing the operation part effect is different.

(Modified example of characteristic portions 48AK to 50AK)
Regarding the operation section effects, the timing to be executed, the vibration mode of vibration effects, the light emission mode of light emission effects, and the reliability of big wins can be arbitrarily set according to the specifications of the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. Regarding the specific interlocking effect, the execution timing, the vibration mode of the special vibration effect, the light emission mode of the specific light emission effect, and the jackpot reliability can be arbitrarily set according to the specifications of the pachinko game machine 1 or the like.

With respect to the performance of the operation part, the timing to be executed, the vibration mode of the vibration performance, the light emission mode of the light emission performance, and the reliability of the big win may be changed according to the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1, or the settings of the pachinko game machine 1. It may be determined in different proportions depending on the value. Regarding the specific interlocking performance, the execution timing, the vibration mode of the special vibration performance, the light emission mode of the specific light emission performance, and the jackpot reliability may be changed according to the set values of the pachinko game machine 1, or the pachinko game machine 1. may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value of . In addition, regarding the operation part effects, the timing to be executed, the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the reliability of the big win may be varied according to an arbitrary degree of advantage regarding the game in the pachinko game machine 1, Different ratios may be determined according to such advantages. Regarding the specific interlocking effect, the timing to be executed, the vibration mode of the special vibration effect, the light emission mode of the specific light emission effect, and the reliability of the big win may be changed according to the arbitrary advantage of the game in the pachinko game machine 1, Different ratios may be determined according to such advantages.

When the timing of executing the operation part production is different and common, when the vibration mode of the vibration production is different and common, and when the light emission mode of the light emission production is different and common, the reliability of the big hit is increased. The combination of each case, such as the case of being different and the case of being common, can be arbitrarily set according to the specifications of the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. When the execution timing is different or common between the operation part production and the specific interlocking production, When the vibration mode of the vibration production and the special vibration production is different and common, When the light emission production and the specific light emission production The combination of each case, such as the case of different and the case of being common, can be arbitrarily set according to the specifications of the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. In addition, when the vibration mode of vibration production|presentation differs, the light emission mode of light emission production|presentation should just be made common, and the control burden of light emission production|presentation can be reduced. When the light emitting modes of the light emitting effects are different, it is sufficient if the control burden of the vibration effect can be reduced by standardizing the vibration mode of the vibration effect. When a part of the vibration mode in the vibration performance is different, it is sufficient if the control burden of the vibration performance can be reduced by sharing the other vibration modes in the vibration performance. For example, when vibration intensities in the vibration presentation are different, the vibration period in the vibration presentation may be made common, thereby reducing the control burden of the vibration presentation. When part of the light emission mode in the light emission effect is different, it is sufficient if the control burden of the light emission effect can be reduced by standardizing the other light emission modes in the light emission effect. For example, when the luminescent colors in the luminous effect are different, it is sufficient to reduce the control burden of the luminous effect by standardizing the luminescence period in the luminous effect. As for the vibration mode of the special vibration effect and the light emission mode of the specific light emission effect, it is sufficient if the control load can be reduced by similar commonality.

In addition to the execution of the variable display, or instead of the execution of the variable display, when it is controlled to an arbitrary game state such as a small winning game state or a big winning game state, an operation part performance or a specific interlocking performance is executed. It may be possible. For example, when it is controlled in a small winning game state, a predetermined ratio is determined according to whether or not the V winning attacker is opened, the opening time, the number of times it is opened, or the number of rounds of the big winning game state controlled after the occurrence of the V winning. It may be possible to execute the operation section effect with . When it is controlled to the jackpot game state, the presence or absence of time reduction control and probability variable control after the jackpot game state is finished, the end condition, and the number of rounds increased from the number of rounds previously notified in the jackpot game state. Depending on the presence or absence, the amount of increase, or the like, it may be possible to execute the operation section effect at a predetermined ratio. It may be possible to execute a specific interlocking effect along with a specific effect such as movable object operation, image display, and music reproduction in the small winning game state or the big winning game state.

The specific effect capable of executing the specific interlocking effect may be any effect that can be executed according to the execution of the variable display, or any effect that can be executed regardless of the execution of the variable display. For example, unlike the ready-to-win effect, when the display result of the variable display becomes a "big hit" at a predetermined rate and a suggestive effect is executed to suggest that the game state is controlled to a big win, a specific effect is specified in part or all of the effect period It may be possible to execute an interlocking effect.

When controlled to an arbitrary production state, it may be possible to execute the operation section production or the specific interlocking production. For example, when it is controlled to a production state that is a special production mode, the operating part production and specific interlocking production are executed at a higher rate than when it is controlled to a production state that is a production mode different from the special production mode. It may be possible.

The operation member capable of executing the effect by vibration or light emission may be any motion detection member configured to be capable of detecting the motion of the player. For example, it may be a sensor that detects an operation on a jog dial that can be rotated, or a sensor that detects a touch operation or a press operation on a touch panel. Also, a sensor capable of detecting a predetermined action by the player, such as an infrared sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor, may be used. A predetermined camera may be used to photograph the player's hands, etc., and the results may be analyzed (video motion capture) to detect the actions of the player. In addition, any configuration that can mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically detect a predetermined action by a player may be used. Along with such an action detection member, a contact member that a player can contact with a hand or the like may be provided, and the contact member may vibrate or emit light together with the action detection member or separately from the action detection member. .

The vibration effects included in the operation part effect can correspond to the vibration effect in the characteristic portion 48AK, the predetermined vibration effect in the characteristic portion 49AK, and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect in the characteristic portion 50AK. Of the vibration effects included in the operation part effects, the vibration effects included in the operation part effects that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at which the pre-fluctuation starts can correspond to the first vibration effects in the feature part 50AK. Of the vibration effects included in the operation part effects, the vibration effect included in the operation part effects that can be executed at the timing AKT11 at which the target variation starts can correspond to the second vibration effect in the characteristic part 50AK. The light emission effects included in the operation part effect are the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect in the characteristic portion 48AK, the light emission effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect in the characteristic portion 49AK, and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect in the characteristic portion 50AK. It can correspond to light emission production. Of the light emission effects included in the operation part effects, the light emission effects associated with the vibration effects included in the operation part effects that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at which the preliminary fluctuation starts are the light emission associated with the first vibration effects in the feature part 50AK. Able to handle performances. Among the light-emitting effects included in the operation part effects, the light-emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect included in the operation part effect that can be executed at the timing AKT11 when the target variation starts is the light-emitting effect accompanying the second vibration effect in the characteristic part 50AK. can cope. The special vibration effect included in the specific interlocking effect can correspond to the special vibration effect in the characteristic portion 49AK.

In addition, in each characteristic part and modification described above, regarding the transition to the time saving state (high base state), there is a form to shift via the big hit state or small hit state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is always operated. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, when a time saving pattern is derived and displayed as a special pattern, the time saving state (high base state) is displayed without operating the special variable winning ball device 7 ).

In addition, as the above-described time-saving symbols, these time-saving symbols may be used as part of the winning symbols or may be used as part of the small winning symbols.

In addition, when performing the lottery processing related to the derivation display of the time saving pattern, the lottery may be executed using a special random number for the time saving pattern lottery in these lottery processing, or the lottery random number of the lost pattern and the big hit pattern The lottery may be performed using random numbers for other lotteries such as lottery random numbers for small winning symbols, random numbers for judging big win lottery, and lottery random numbers for falling lottery.

Further, these time-saving patterns may be a plurality of types of patterns, and may be used together with a combination of patterns displayed as other patterns, such as a small winning pattern or a losing pattern. In addition, in this case, whether or not to transition to the time saving state may be determined according to the small winning symbol to be used together. However, when the time-saving pattern is won, the lottery for the presence or absence of transition to the time-saving state is not performed by lottery, and the number of times of time-saving is not drawn.

In addition, in the case of performing the lottery of the time-saving design, if the setting value can be changed, the lottery probability of the time-saving design does not change according to the setting value, that is, the lottery probability of the time-saving design in all the setting values are the same, but the lottery probabilities of these time-saving symbols may be different probabilities between the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Also, regarding the timing of random number acquisition when drawing time-saving symbols, even when using a dedicated random number or when using another random number, the start opening (first start winning opening, 2nd starting prize opening) is acceptable.

In addition, regarding the winning of the time-saving design lottery, when using a special random number (time-saving lottery random number), the lottery result by the dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is used as the winning value, and the lottery of the time-saving design is a small hit design. When a random number is used, a specific small hit pattern random number is used as the winning value, and when the random number for the falling lottery judgment value is used for the lottery of the time saving pattern, the random number for the falling lottery judgment value can be used as the winning value. For example, a time-saving area may be provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7, and the time-saving design may be won when the game ball passes through the time-saving area.

In addition, when the lottery of the time saving pattern is performed using a structure, when the small hit pattern uses the time saving pattern in combination, the variable display number of the time saving state (the number of time saving) does not change depending on whether the time saving area passes to

In addition, regarding the winning in the case of lottery of time-saving patterns, if random numbers are used for the lottery of time-saving patterns, a specific random number will be used as the winning value, and if random numbers are used for the lottery of time-saving patterns, it will be specified. A jackpot pattern random number value can be used as a winning value. However, if these random numbers are used as winning values, performances other than the big hit probability differ depending on the setting, so it is possible only if the setting value cannot be changed.

Further, the judgment timing of the lottery result of the time saving pattern may be executed at the timing after the big hit judgment. In addition, the time-saving pattern lottery is executed only in the low-probability low-base state, without executing it in the time-saving state (high base) or high probability, regardless of which random value is used for the lottery. . However, when the time-saving pattern is derived and displayed in the state of the time-saving state, even if the number of times of time-saving is reset or the lottery is not performed, it may be determined for each game machine.

In addition, as for the number of times of time saving when the time saving pattern is derived and displayed, it is possible to have a plurality of predetermined times of time saving according to the winning value (symbol) and each game state. Moreover, it is also possible to make the condition for providing time saving different for each time saving pattern.

Moreover, when the number of times of shortening of working hours differs according to the shortening of working hours pattern, it is possible to change the sorting lottery of the shortening of working hours pattern between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.例文帳に追加

Further, even when the same time saving pattern is derived and displayed, the number of times of time saving given may differ according to the game state at that time. However, it is required that it is predetermined for the game state.

In addition, the lottery result of "zero number of times of time saving" can be included as the lottery result of the time saving pattern in the low-probability low base state.

Also, a derivation lottery for time saving end patterns (time saving end lottery) may be executed, and the number of times of time saving may be the number of times until the time saving end patterns are derived and displayed after the start of time saving or until the big win patterns are derived and displayed. In other words, without setting the number of times of time saving, in principle, it may be unlimited.

In addition, the number of times of time saving and the provision conditions may be different between the time saving state controlled by the time saving pattern and the time saving state controlled by the occurrence of the big hit.

Further, when the time saving pattern is derived and displayed, the timing to be controlled to the time saving state is the time when the pattern fixing time of the time saving pattern has passed. However, when a small winning pattern random number is used for the lottery for the time saving pattern, and when the small winning is won and shifts to the time saving state, the timing of controlling to the time saving state is the end of the small winning operation.

In addition, in the case of lottery using structures, the timing of control to the time saving state is the timing of the end of the operation of the structure in the game state (for example, small win state) in which the structure is operated.

In addition, in the case of a game machine controlled to a high probability low base state over a predetermined variable display number after a big hit (so-called specified number of times probability variable machine (ST machine)), a high probability low base state at the opening of the game hall , and after the high-probability low-base state is executed a specified number of times of variable display and ends, control may be performed to the time-saving state.

In addition, when the time saving pattern is derived and displayed when the time saving limiter function is installed, the number of times of the time saving limiter is updated.

Also, the design fixing time of the time saving pattern may be different from the design fixing time of the other patterns.

(Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 48AK)
A game machine capable of being controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player, comprising an operation means operable by the player, a vibration performance executing means capable of executing a vibration performance in which the operation means vibrates, and an operation means accompanied by the vibration performance. and a light emitting effect executing means capable of executing a light emitting effect to emit light, and when the vibration effect is executed, the ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher than when the vibration effect is not executed, and the vibration effect Depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect and the timing at which the vibration effect is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is different, and the vibration of the vibration effect is generated according to the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect. The mode is different. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. The operating means may be, for example, the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B, or the like. The vibration effect may be, for example, driving the vibration motor 131 according to the vibration pattern included in the operation part effect pattern. The vibration effect executing means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the effect process during variable display in step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The light emission effect may be, for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 in a light emission color included in the operation part effect pattern. The light emission effect execution means may be the effect control CPU 120 or the like that executes the effect process during variable display in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation part effect control pattern determined in step AKS203, for example. The fact that the ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher when the vibration effect is executed may be, for example, the reliability of the big hit according to the pattern of the operation part effect. The fact that the ratio of control to an advantageous state differs according to the light emission mode of the light emission effect and the timing at which the vibration effect is executed means that, for example, the light emission color included in the operation part effect pattern and the big hit according to the use of the operation part effect pattern. Reliability, etc. may be used. The vibration mode of the vibration effect may be different depending on the light emission mode of the light effect, for example, if the emission colors and vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 included in the operation part effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03 and AKC11 to AKC13 are used.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game by making the player pay attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing the vibration effect at the timing when the variable display is started. Here, the timing at which the variable display is started may be, for example, timings AKT01 to AKT03, AKT11, or the like.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timings at which the vibration effect can be executed, thereby improving the game interest.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing the vibration effect at the timing when the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode. Here, the timing at which the variable display changes to the reach mode may be timing AKT12, for example.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timings at which the vibration effect can be executed, thereby improving the game interest.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing the vibration effect at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the ready-to-win mode. Here, the timing at which the development effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT13.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timings at which the vibration effect can be executed, thereby improving the game interest.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing the vibration effect at the timing at which the notification effect for informing whether or not the control is to be performed in an advantageous state is executed. Here, the timing at which the notification effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT14.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timings at which the vibration effect can be executed, thereby improving the game interest.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing when the variable display is started includes a first light emitting mode and a second light emitting mode different from the first light emitting mode, and the light emitting effect is the first light emitting. The vibration mode of the vibration effect may be different between the case where the light emission effect is executed in the second light emission mode and the case where the light emission effect is executed in the second light emission mode. Here, the first light emission mode may be, for example, a case where the light emission color is white. The second emission mode may be, for example, a case where the emission color is red or iridescent. The difference in the vibration mode may be, for example, the case of the vibration pattern AKV02 different from the vibration pattern AKV03.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

The vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display is started and the vibration effect executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode have a common light emission mode of the light emission effect, Vibration modes may be different. Here, the common light emission mode may be, for example, a case where the light emission color is white. The different vibration mode may be, for example, the vibration pattern AKV02 different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration presentation according to the timing, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode and the vibration effect executed at the timing when the notification effect is executed have a common ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state when executed. Aspects may vary. Here, the fact that the rate of being controlled to be in an advantageous state is common may be, for example, the case where the reliability of the big hit is 100%. The different vibration modes may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 different from the vibration pattern AKV31.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration presentation according to the timing, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect may be different between the vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display is started and the vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display is in the ready-to-reach mode, and the vibration mode may be different. Here, the difference in light emission mode may be, for example, white, red, or rainbow colors, which are different from pink or orange colors. The different vibration modes may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 different from the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect in accordance with the timing, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

The vibration mode may be different between the vibration performance executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the ready-to-win state and the vibration performance executed at the timing for executing the development performance after the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach state. Here, the different vibration modes may be, for example, the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration presentation according to the timing, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The game machine comprises a first light emitting means for causing the operation means to emit light, a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means, and a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game, and the predetermined effect is being executed. When the vibration effect is executed at the time, the first light emitting means can emit light in a light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect, and the second light emitting means can emit light in a light emitting mode different from the light emitting effect according to the predetermined effect. There may be. Here, the first light emitting means may be, for example, a lever lamp 9B1, a button lamp 9B2, or the like. The second light emitting means may be, for example, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, the right frame lamp 9N, or the like. The predetermined effect may be display of a background image or a character image, for example. The predetermined effect executing means may be, for example, the image display device 5 or the like. The light emission mode corresponding to the vibration effect may be, for example, a light emission color included in the operation part effect pattern. The light emission mode according to the predetermined effect may be, for example, a light emission mode according to the lamp control data included in the variable display effect control pattern.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the lighting modes of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

A line-of-sight guidance effect execution means capable of executing a line-of-sight guidance effect for guiding the player's line of sight to the operation means is provided, and the vibration effect execution means performs the vibration effect at a first timing and a second timing after the first timing. , the vibration effect can be executed, and regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing, the vibration effect can be executed in a common vibration mode, and the line of sight guidance effect executing means is capable of executing the line of sight at the first timing It may be possible to execute the line-of-sight guidance effect before the vibration effect is executed at the second timing without executing the guidance effect. Here, the line-of-sight guidance effect executing means may be, for example, the game effect lamps 9L and 9R. The first timing may be, for example, timings T1 and T2. The second timing may be, for example, timings T3 and T4. A common vibration mode may be, for example, a vibration time of 1.5 seconds or 3 seconds. If the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed at the first timing, for example, at timings T1 and T2 in step 10SHS3. If the visual guidance effect can be executed at the second timing, for example, at timings T3 and T4 in step 10SHS3.
With such a configuration, the vibration of the operation means can be appropriately recognized, and the interest of the vibration presentation can be sufficiently enhanced.

(Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 49AK)
A game machine capable of being controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player, comprising an operation means operable by the player and a vibration performance capable of executing a predetermined vibration performance and a special vibration performance as vibration performance in which the operation means vibrates. Execution means, light emitting effect executing means capable of executing light emitting effect of causing operation means to emit light according to predetermined vibration effect, and specific effect executing means capable of executing specific effect according to the progress of a game, wherein the predetermined vibration effect is provided. The ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher when the predetermined vibration performance is executed than when is not executed, and the light emission mode of the light emission performance accompanying the predetermined vibration performance and the timing when the predetermined vibration performance is executed The ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state differs according to, the vibration performance executing means can execute the special vibration performance with the execution of the specific performance, and the vibration mode differs between the predetermined vibration performance and the special vibration performance. . Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. The operating means may be, for example, the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B, or the like. The predetermined vibration effect may be, for example, driving the vibration motor 131 according to a vibration pattern included in the operation part effect pattern. The special vibration effect may be, for example, driving the vibration motor 131 by vibration control data included in the variable display effect control pattern. The vibration effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the effect process during variable display in step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation part effect control pattern or the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. Just do it. The light emission effect may be, for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 according to the light emission color included in the operation part effect pattern. The light emission effect execution means may be the effect control CPU 120 or the like that executes the effect process during variable display in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation part effect control pattern determined in step AKS203, for example. The specific effect may be, for example, reach effect of SP reach A, big hit determination notification, big hit type lottery, and the like. The specific effect executing means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the effect process during variable display in step S172 based on the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The fact that the ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher when the predetermined vibration effect is executed may be, for example, the reliability of the big hit according to the pattern of the operation part effect. The fact that the ratio of control to the advantageous state differs according to the light emission mode of the light emission effect and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed is, for example, based on the light emission color included in the operation part effect pattern and the use of the operation part effect pattern. It may be a big hit reliability or the like. The fact that the special vibration effect can be executed may be, for example, the execution of the vibration effect during periods AKZ01 to AKZ05. Vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 that are different from the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44 may be used for the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect, for example.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game by making the player pay attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect at the timing when the variable display is started. Here, the timing at which the variable display is started may be, for example, timings AKT01 to AKT03, AKT11, or the like.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timings at which the vibration effect can be executed, thereby improving the game interest.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect at the timing when the variable display becomes the ready-to-win mode. Here, the timing at which the variable display changes to the reach mode may be timing AKT12, for example.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timings at which the vibration effect can be executed, thereby improving the game interest.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the ready-to-win state. Here, the timing at which the development effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT13.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timings at which the vibration effect can be executed, thereby improving the game interest.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect at the timing at which the notification effect for informing whether or not the control is to be performed in an advantageous state is executed. Here, the timing at which the notification effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT14.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timings at which the vibration effect can be executed, thereby improving the game interest.

The light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect that can be executed at the timing when the variable display is started includes a first light emission mode and a second light emission mode different from the first light emission mode, and the light emission effect is the first light emission mode. The vibration mode of the predetermined vibration effect may be different between when it is performed in the light emission mode and when the light emission effect is performed in the second light emission mode. Here, the first light emission mode may be, for example, a case where the light emission color is white. The second emission mode may be, for example, a case where the emission color is red or iridescent. The different vibration mode may be, for example, a vibration pattern AKV02 different from the vibration pattern AKV03.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

The predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display is started and the predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode have a common light emission mode of the light emission effect. Yes, and the vibration mode may be different. Here, the common light emission mode may be, for example, a case where the light emission color is white. The different vibration mode may be, for example, the vibration pattern AKV02 different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration presentation according to the timing, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode and the predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the notification effect is executed have the same ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state when executed. , the vibration mode may be different. Here, the fact that the rate of being controlled to be in an advantageous state is common may be, for example, the case where the reliability of the big win is 100%. The different vibration modes may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 different from the vibration pattern AKV31.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration presentation according to the timing, and to improve the amusement of the game.

A predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display is started and a predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode may differ in the light emission mode of the light emission performance and in the vibration mode. Here, the difference in light emission mode may be, for example, white, red, or rainbow colors, which are different from pink or orange colors. The different vibration modes may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 different from the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect according to the timing, thereby improving the game interest.

The vibration mode may be different between the predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display changes to the ready-to-reach mode and the predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing to execute the development effect after the variable display changes to the ready-to-reach mode. . Here, the different vibration modes may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 that are different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration presentation according to the timing, and to improve the amusement of the game.

It comprises a first light emitting means for causing the operation means to emit light, a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means, and a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game, and the predetermined effect is being executed. When the predetermined vibration effect is executed at the time, the first light emitting means can emit light in a light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect, and the second light emitting means can emit light in a light emitting mode different from the light emitting effect according to the predetermined effect. It may be possible. Here, the first light emitting means may be, for example, a lever lamp 9B1, a button lamp 9B2, or the like. The second light emitting means may be, for example, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, the right frame lamp 9N, or the like. The predetermined effect may be display of a background image or a character image, for example. The predetermined effect executing means may be, for example, the image display device 5 or the like. The light emission mode corresponding to the vibration effect may be, for example, a light emission color included in the operation part effect pattern. The light emission mode according to the predetermined effect may be, for example, a light emission mode according to the lamp control data included in the variable display effect control pattern.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the light emitting modes of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

A line-of-sight guidance effect execution means capable of executing a line-of-sight guidance effect for guiding the player's line of sight to the operation means is provided, and the vibration effect execution means performs at a first timing and a second timing after the first timing. , a predetermined vibration effect can be executed, regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing, the predetermined vibration effect can be executed in a common vibration mode, and the visual guidance effect execution means is capable of executing the predetermined vibration effect at the first timing , the visual guidance effect may be executed before the predetermined vibration effect is executed at the second timing without executing the visual guidance effect. Here, the line-of-sight guidance effect executing means may be, for example, the game effect lamps 9L and 9R. The first timing may be, for example, timings T1 and T2. The second timing may be, for example, timings T3 and T4. A common vibration mode may be, for example, a vibration time of 1.5 seconds or 3 seconds. If the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed at the first timing, for example, at timings T1 and T2 in step 10SHS3. If the visual guidance effect can be executed at the second timing, for example, at timings T3 and T4 in step 10SHS3.
With such a configuration, the vibration of the operation means can be appropriately recognized, and the interest of the vibration presentation can be sufficiently enhanced.

The ratio of control to an advantageous state may be higher when the predetermined vibration effect is executed than when the specific effect is executed. Here, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot expectation level of 50% or more, which is higher than when the SP reach A reach performance is executed.
With such a configuration, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation for the predetermined vibration effect and improve the game interest.

The specific effect executing means can execute the effect of operating the movable member as the specific effect, and the vibration effect executing means can execute the special vibration effect during the operation period of the movable member. Here, the effects for operating the movable member may be, for example, the effects execution examples AKG01 to AKG03. The special vibration effect during the operation period of the movable member may be, for example, a vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV41.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration effects and improve the amusement of the game.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing a special vibration effect in response to notification of being controlled in an advantageous state. Here, the notification of being controlled in an advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot determination notification or the like. The special vibration effect that accompanies this notification may be, for example, a vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV44.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration effects and improve the amusement of the game.

The light emitting effect execution means is capable of executing a specific light emitting effect of causing the operating means to emit light in conjunction with the special vibration effect, and the light emitting effect associated with the predetermined vibration effect and the specific light emitting effect associated with the special vibration effect differ in light emission mode. good too. Here, the specific light emission effect may be, for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 based on the lamp control data included in the variable display effect control pattern. The different luminescence mode may be, for example, a case where the luminescence color is white, red, or iridescent, rather than a case where the luminescence color changes from blue, gold, or blue to gold via red.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect and improve the game interest.

A limiting means may be provided for limiting the execution of the predetermined vibration effect when the special vibration effect is executed. Here, the restricting means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 when determining the operation part effect in step AKS202.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the vibration effect and improve the game interest.

(Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 50AK)
A game machine capable of being controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player, and capable of executing a first vibration performance and a second vibration performance as a vibration performance in which an operation means operable by the player and the operation means vibrates. A vibration performance execution means and a light emission performance execution means capable of executing a light emission performance for causing the operation means to emit light in accordance with the vibration performance are provided, and when the vibration performance is executed, the vibration performance is more effective than when the vibration performance is not executed. The ratio of control to an advantageous state is high, and the ratio of control to an advantageous state differs according to the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect, and the timing of execution between the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect. are different, the vibration mode is also different, and the light emission mode of the light emission performance is common between the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. The operating means may be, for example, the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B, or the like. The first vibration effect may be driving the vibration motor 131 by the vibration patterns AKV01 and AKV02 included in the operation unit effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03, for example. The second vibration effect may be driving the drive motor 131 by the vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 included in the operation part effect patterns AKC11 to AKC13, for example. The vibration effect executing means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the effect process during variable display in step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The light emission effect may be, for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 in a light emission color included in the operation part effect pattern. The light emission effect execution means may be the effect control CPU 120 or the like that executes the effect process during variable display in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation part effect control pattern determined in step AKS203, for example. The fact that the ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher when the vibration effect is executed may be, for example, the reliability of the big hit according to the pattern of the operation part effect. The difference in the rate of being controlled to an advantageous state according to the light emission mode of the light emission effect associated with the vibration effect may be, for example, the reliability of the big hit according to the light emission color included in the operation part effect pattern. The difference in the timing of execution between the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect may be, for example, pre-variation start timings AKT01 to AKT03 different from the target variation start timing AKT11. The difference in vibration mode between the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect may be, for example, vibration pattern AKV01 different from vibration pattern AKV03. The light emission mode of the light emission effect is common between the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect, for example, when the light emission colors included in the operation unit effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03 and AKC11 to AKC13 are white, red, and rainbow colors. etc.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game by making the player pay attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing the second vibration effect at the timing when the variable display is started. Here, the timing at which the variable display is started may be, for example, the target variation start timing AKT11.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timings at which the vibration effect can be executed, thereby improving the game interest.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing the second vibration effect at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode. Here, the timing at which the variable display changes to the reach mode may be timing AKT12, for example.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timings at which the vibration effect can be executed, thereby improving the game interest.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing the second vibration effect at the timing at which the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the ready-to-win mode. Here, the timing at which the development effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT13.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timings at which the vibration effect can be executed, thereby improving the game interest.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing the second vibration effect at the timing at which the notification effect for informing whether or not the control is to be performed in the advantageous state is executed. Here, the timing at which the notification effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT14.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timings at which the vibration effect can be executed, thereby improving the game interest.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the second vibration effect that can be executed at the timing when the variable display is started includes a first light emitting mode and a second light emitting mode different from the first light emitting mode, and the light emitting mode is the second light emitting mode. The vibration mode of the second vibration effect may be different between the case where the light emission mode is executed in the first light emission mode and the case where the light emission effect is executed in the second light emission mode. Here, the first light emission mode may be, for example, a case where the light emission color is white. The second emission mode may be, for example, a case where the emission color is red or iridescent. The difference in the vibration mode may be, for example, the case of the vibration pattern AKV02 different from the vibration pattern AKV03.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display is started and the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode. They are common, and the vibration mode may be different. Here, the common light emission mode may be, for example, a case where the light emission color is white. The different vibration mode may be, for example, the vibration pattern AKV02 different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration presentation according to the timing, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The second vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the ready-to-win mode and the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the notification effect is executed have the same ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state when executed. , and the vibration mode may be different. Here, the fact that the rate of being controlled to be in an advantageous state is common may be, for example, the case where the reliability of the big hit is 100%. The different vibration modes may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 different from the vibration pattern AKV31.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration presentation according to the timing, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The second vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display starts and the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode are different in the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and even if the vibration mode is different. good. Here, the difference in light emission mode may be, for example, white, red, or rainbow colors, which are different from pink or orange colors. The different vibration modes may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 different from the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect in accordance with the timing, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

The second vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display changes to the ready-to-reach mode and the second vibration effect executed at the timing to execute the development effect after the variable display changes to the ready-to-reach mode have different vibration modes. good too. Here, the different vibration modes may be, for example, the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration presentation according to the timing, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The game machine comprises a first light emitting means for causing the operation means to emit light, a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means, and a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game, and the predetermined effect is being executed. When the second vibration effect is executed in the second vibration effect, the first light emitting means can emit light in the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the second vibration effect, and the second light emitting means can emit light in a light emission mode different from the light emission effect according to the predetermined effect. It may be possible to emit light at Here, the first light emitting means may be, for example, a lever lamp 9B1, a button lamp 9B2, or the like. The second light emitting means may be, for example, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, the right frame lamp 9N, or the like. The predetermined effect may be display of a background image or a character image, for example. The predetermined effect executing means may be, for example, the image display device 5 or the like. The light emission mode corresponding to the vibration effect may be, for example, a light emission color included in the operation part effect pattern. The light emission mode according to the predetermined effect may be, for example, a light emission mode according to the lamp control data included in the variable display effect control pattern.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the lighting modes of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

A line-of-sight guidance effect execution means capable of executing a line-of-sight guidance effect for guiding the player's line of sight to the operation means is provided, and the vibration effect execution means performs at a first timing and a second timing after the first timing. , the second vibration effect can be executed, regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing, the second vibration effect can be executed in a common vibration mode, and the visual guidance effect execution means is capable of executing the second vibration effect It may be possible to execute the line-of-sight guidance effect without executing the line-of-sight guidance effect at the first timing and before the second vibration effect is executed at the second timing. Here, the line-of-sight guidance effect executing means may be, for example, the game effect lamps 9L and 9R. The first timing may be, for example, timings T1 and T2. The second timing may be, for example, timings T3 and T4. A common vibration mode may be, for example, a vibration time of 1.5 seconds or 3 seconds. If the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed at the first timing, for example, at timings T1 and T2 in step 10SHS3. If the visual guidance effect can be executed at the second timing, for example, at timings T3 and T4 in step 10SHS3.
With such a configuration, the vibration of the operation means can be appropriately recognized, and the interest of the vibration presentation can be sufficiently enhanced.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing the first vibration effect in the variable display before the variable display in which the second vibration effect is executed, based on the result of the prefetch determination. Here, the variable display prior to the variable display corresponding to the reserved storage may be, for example, a variable display that is pre-variable.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect associated with the first vibration effect includes a light emitting mode during the first vibration and a light emitting mode during the second vibration different from the light emitting mode during the first vibration, and the light emitting effect is the light emitting mode during the first vibration. The vibration mode of the first vibration effect may be different between when the light emission effect is executed in and when the light emission effect is executed in the light emission mode during the second vibration. Here, the first vibrating light emission mode may be, for example, a case where the light emission color is white. The second mode of light emission during vibration may be, for example, a case where the light emission color is red or rainbow. The difference in the vibration mode may be, for example, the case of the vibration pattern AKV01 different from the vibration pattern AKV02.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

The light emission mode may be different between the light emission effect accompanying the first vibration effect and the light emission effect accompanying the second vibration effect. Here, the difference in the light emission mode is, for example, when the remaining number of times is other than "0" according to the continuous effect pattern, the light emission color of the operation section effect pattern is different from that when the remaining number of times is "0". I wish I had.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the light emission mode of the light emission effect associated with the vibration effect and improve the game interest.

(Explanation regarding association of characteristic portions 48AK to 50AK)
Each configuration related to the characteristic portions 48AK to 50AK may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to other characteristic portions. Features that are combined in this way or individual features that are not combined may be appropriately combined with part or all of each configuration related to other features.

1 pachinko game machine 5 image display device 9 game effect lamp 9B1 lever lamp 9B2 button lamp 9C upper frame lamp 9M left frame lamp 9N right frame lamp 11 main substrate 12 performance control substrate 31A stick controller 31B push button 32 movable body 100 for game control Microcomputer 120 Production control CPU
131 Vibration motor 75SG001 Pachinko machine 300 First effect unit 301 Base member 302 Cover member 303 LED board 331 Decoration pattern 400 Second effect unit 401 Base member 402 Cover member 403 LED board 420 Decoration part 600 Third effect unit 800 Fourth effect Unit 801 Base member 802 Cover member 803 LED board

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of performing variable display of identification information and being able to be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
display means;
an electronic component provided so as to be visible to the player;
a specific member provided around the electronic component and formed in a color similar to that of the electronic component;
a light-transmitting member which is a member having light-transmitting properties and is provided so that a player can visually recognize the electronic component through the member;
Predetermined electronic components that are difficult or invisible to the player;
a predetermined member provided around the predetermined electronic component;
an operation means that can be operated by a player;
and a production control means capable of executing production,
The translucent member is provided in front of the electronic component and the specific member,
The electronic component is provided at a position further away from the display means than the specific member,
The predetermined member has a color different from that of the predetermined electronic component,
The production control means is
It is possible to execute a change effect that changes the display mode of the displayed identification information,
It is possible to execute a reach effect that suggests being controlled to the advantageous state,
A specific effect can be executed after starting the reach effect,
The operating means is operated at a plurality of timings including a first timing corresponding to the start of the variable display in which the ready-to-win effect is executed and a second timing before the start of the variable display in which the ready-to-win effect is executed. It is possible to execute a predetermined vibration effect to vibrate,
It is possible to execute a special vibration effect for vibrating the operating means in a specific effect period, which is a period during which the specific effect is executed,
As the special vibration effect,
capable of executing a first special vibration effect corresponding to an operation of the effect movable body different from the operating means during the specific effect period;
It is possible to execute a second special vibration effect corresponding to image display during the specific effect period,
The ratio of control to the advantageous state is higher when the predetermined vibration effect is executed than when the predetermined vibration effect is not executed,
Modes differ between the predetermined vibration effect and the first special vibration effect,
The mode is different between the predetermined vibration effect and the second special vibration effect,
A game machine in which the first special vibration performance and the second special vibration performance are different in aspect .

Images